Detailed What's New List ( Previous Changes) |
Go Back to List of FAQs Previous |
Jewelry Shopkeeper New Features, Modifications, Irmprovements
Jewelry Shopkeeper is constantly being improved so it runs better and so your business runs better.
Here are some of the more older changes. However, if you weren't aware of an "old" update, then it's new to you !
Version 4.140 12/30/2019 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 275 new items for early 2020 including Valentines and Mothers Day items. (This feature requires the Maintenance Plan)
On the sales screen, you can modify the usual tax status by unchecking checking the Tax boxes on the right edge of the sales Sku lines. In previous versions, the tax and sale total calculation at the bottom of the screen were not updated until you saved that Sku line and went to the next line. Even though that would only be a few seconds, starting with this version, the tax totals are recalculated and redisplayed instantly for a more responsive reaction.
The data-entry boxes on the Receive Inventory screens have been changed to use an easier-to-read color combination. (Black on white now, not black on fuchsia.)
The email form in Shopkeeper (for emailing receipts, appraisals, reports, etc.) Now has a button to fill in email settings for many of the most common email platforms such as Gmail, Outlook-Online, AOL, Comcast, AT&T, etc. Also, it will change certain technical settings depending on which email method you use. E.g. in most cases, if you use the "dotNet" email method, it's best to use "port 587", otherwise "port 465" is best for the "direct CDO" method. However, it's still best if you check your email system's configuration guide for the technical settings such as SMTP server, Port, SSL, etc., because the email systems do change their requirements periodically.
When you choose to email a report or a receipt and if there is no pre-filled-in email address, previous versions of Shopkeeper would create the PDF file but would *not* proceed to the email screen; it would ignore that option as being impossible. Starting this version it will open the email screen in such a case. (But of course, you still can't actually send the report until you type in an email address in the email screen.)
Some Windows printer drivers occasionally print doubled half-height lines and a previous VJS update added the "80" option so you can choose to use an alternative print engine for such printers. However, the "80" option was not compatible if you periodically chose to send a receipt or report to a PDF file or email, so you'd have to manually turn the "80" option off temporarily. Starting this version, the "80" option will be ignored when you are sending the report or receipt to a PDF file so you don't have to turn the "80" option off and back on.
When receiving inventory the usual setting for the Quantity box is to allow numbers up to 9999 - without any decimals. In previous versions, in Preferences, you could change the Quantity format to 99.9 or 9.99 in case you need to receive fractional quantities. Note that for space reasons, you lost some digits for hundreds or thousands if you wanted space for decimals. Starting this version, you can choose an input format of 9999.99 in case some items need hundreds or more and other items need fractions. You select this option on the Inventory page of Preferences. (Note: This is *not* related to weights; for items sold by the weight, you have always been able to enter many decimals.)
[susp/demo/live]
Version 4.131 12/04/2019 ===============================================================
Adds a pause after updating the cost or retail of an assembled item so you can see which cost and retail were applied.
Adds an additional receipt layout "31 - Full Page Receipt - Raised Summary" which may be of use for long receipts if pagination problems occur.
* A fix to accept large payments, over 500,000
* A fix for a miscellaneous intermittent error message 1231 on the checkbook screen
When you change the description of a major code, the description of the dummy Sku (-00001) for that major code will now also change starting with this update. (But it will not change if the description of the dummy Sku was previously different than the prior major code description - i.e. if it was not "hard-linked.")
Version 4.130 11/26/2019 ===============================================================
You can now require filling in customers' addresses. In the Customer Defaults page of Preferences, you can choose ACSZ to require the Address and the City and the State and the Zip, or you could choose to require just some of those address elements - e.g. Z for Zip alone.
Updates to enable adding images to archived appraisals. (in some cases this was not possible before)
Updates to Interstore inventory transfer to transfer the extended details such as pre-appraisal notes, etc.
When you use the SMS-Texting features and employ the template merging such as including the customer's name in the message, previous versions would include the name as typed-in even if it were in all-capitals such as JONATHAN. Starting with this version, the SMS text will make that upper and lower like Jonathan.
If you use integrated credit card processing and attempt to erase/void an authorized credit card payment from a previous date, VJS will now not attempt the void as that's almost always problematic; instead it will suggest that the user try to do a negative/return charge to the card.
On the same topic, if you use integrated credit card processing, and if you use a generic Cash Sale name on the sale, that can make voiding the charges awkward - because voids have to be linked to the original charge authorization and with a generic Cash Sale name, you'd have to sift through a large number of transactions. The current version adds an alert to avoid this situation.
A new security option allows you to prevent certain users from modifying the extended notes area of the customer profile while still allowing them to add new notes. You can find the option "Edit Customer Profile Notes" on the More Security Settings page of Preferences. For users who are affected by this security lock-out, a "plus sign" icon above the Notes box will appear which will allow adding additional notes.
* A fix to accept large payments, over 500,000
* A fix for a miscellaneous intermittent error message 1231 on the checkbook screen
Version 4.128 11/14/2019 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 75 new items. (Requires the Maintenance Plan)
If you use the new screen resize feature and significantly enlarge the sales or credit slip screen, previous versions would not always scroll through the entire list of payment types. This problem has been resolved in this update.
Includes a fix for some credit slips being marked as "Used" prematurely. (Occurred only in the one prior update version.)
Version 4.127 11/11/2019 ===============================================================
The newest David Geller / Jeweler Profit Repair Blue Book is now available to add to Jewelry Shopkeeper. This is a catalog of over 6,300 repair tasks with revised pricing which helps ensure you don't under price your services. The increases can range from 10 to 100% over the last major revision. To use this feature, you will need to request Jeweler Profit to send us the OK for the most current Blue Book Digital License.
http://www.jewelerprofit.com/contact_us.html
A program module to add the Lafonn Catalog of over 3000 items (including pictures) has been added to this Shopkeeper update.
Version 4.126 11/01/2019 ===============================================================
In previous versions there were occasional problem with in-house credit slips which had long numbers (over 10 digits long.) This has been resolved
The credit slip and gift certificate report now simultaneously creates an Excel version of the report information and puts it in the file Credit-Slips.xls in the VJS Reports folder. This may be useful if you intend to do mailings or emailings to certain customers with outstanding credit slips and gift certificates
Version 4.125 10/24/2019 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 200 new new items and over 100 additional price and cost changes beyond those of the August and September updates.
Version 4.123 10/11/2019 ===============================================================
The minimize button on the Inventory Entry screen wasn't active in previous versions, but now is.
On the sales screen, an unhelpful alert about a missing sales clerk has been removed.
The report screen would be too short in certain cases in prior versions and this has been fixed in this update.
The Inventory Web Site Export has always had an option to put the image files in a "staging folder" ready for upload to the website. In this update a new option is to copy just the files that are not already in the staging folder. This can save time in preparing the export for cases where there are a large number of pictures, but where most are already in the staging folder.
Version 4.121 09/18/2019 ===============================================================
A more thorough search for an unused sale number in case the next suggested sale number was already used.
[blockupdate zmisc]
Version 4.120 09/07/2019 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has a small number of new items and additional price and cost changes since the bigger August update.
If form resizing is active (see v 4.115 notes below), the reports selection screens can now remember different resizing and positions for different types of reports, whereas previously the resizing for one type of report selection screen affected all other types.
[bonusrtn, 1SNS ]
Version 4.120 08/28/2019 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 250 new items for Fall 2019. About 50 previous items have price and cost changes which are to go into effect on August 29. This update adds about 220 new image files.
New options have been added for credit card integration with support now available vis PAX Technology and Heartland.
Version 4.116 08/23/2019 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over 215 new items for Summer, Fall and Holiday 2019
Different computers can now maintain different sale number sequences. You can activate this option by assigning a sale number prefeix letter in Local Defaults page 2 of Preferences. While this prefix option was available in previous versions, using it didn't maintain a separate sequence number.
Misc adjustments
[det_inv->Notes, skulistrcont, convert2repair, receiptposcprinter, shorteremvsn]
Version 4.115 07/22/2019 - 08/01/2019 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 250 new items for early summer 2019. There is a small number of items with price and/or cost changes. This update adds about 50 new image files.
On the Sales Screen, on rare occasions, you may want to modify the Style box for non-inventory Sku's such as repairs. In previous versions this box would allow lower-case letters which could lead to inconsistent results. Starting this version, the style is automatically made upper-case. This box also has updated keyboard support such that pressing Enter or Tab will both save the changes and will land on the Save button in the Sku line.
Some jewelers have received gift cards with 16-digit numbers embossed on them. While that's not preferred, Shopkeeper has accepted such numbers for over a year. What's new in this update is that if you type or scan a number that long, it will automatically Not increment the next regular number in the sequence. E.g. after registering such a gift card number, it won't update the credit number sequence, even if you don't uncheck the Increment Next Number button.
A new Un-Archive utility can move a sale from the Archive sales file to the Current sales file if it (somehow) got into the Archive file. It can also do the reverse; move a sale from the Current File to the Archive file. (utility: unarchive.)
The resize window feature remembers the preferred enlargement and positioning of each resizable window. Starting with this version, there is the option of remembering resize-down settings. (This is expected to be rarely useful and is not active by default. Ask for instructions if interested.)
Resizing enlarges the entire Shopkeeper form, including fonts, for easier reading and easier selection of buttons - especially on high resolution monitors. When resizing is activated, not only is the enlargement of each screen remembered, but also the position is remembered, which is helpful on large monitors. This feature can be activated via the Local Defaults p.3 page of Preferences.
Version 4.10 07/11/2019 ===============================================================
The Internet Customer Search by Phone Number has been updated. Because changes were made to the www.411.info website, the search results were organized differently than before, which hindered VJS's ability to extract the name correctly - especially in cases where there was a middle name. The current VJS can now correctly select the first, middle and last-name portions of the results.
The Alternative Second Currency option for price tags has two changes.
- Normally, the second currency is the selling price multiplied by the conversion factor. In this update, you can optionally choose to present it as the MSRP multiplied by the conversion factor. To do that, add the keyword ALTCURRENCYMSRP anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
- The second currency can now be rounded to a multiple of any number, such as 5, 10, 25, 50 or 100. E.g., instead of $149 x 19.5 resulting in 2905.50, you could make it round to 3000. To do this, In Preferences on the Inventory Tags page under Inventory preferences, in the Round box, type UP 10 or UP 50, etc. (Less likely, but you could also round down, by typing DOWN 10 or DOWN 25, etc.)
The small calendar icons next to Date boxes have been more reactive, to reduce the frequency with which you might have to click a couple of times before they react.
The option to press Ctrl while you click the Print a Tag button on the Inventory Status screen has been restored. This instantly send the tag print request to the printer, bypassing a few dialog boxes which would normally appear before printing.
When you restock a particular merchandise style, the basic inventory information such as description, cost, price and picture have always been copied to the new Sku of that style. Starting with this version, the extended Notes / pre-appraisal will also be copied to the new Sku of the same style.
When recording an invoice of received merchandise, if you type a new vendor name but the vendor name is similar to a previous one, the Enter Inventory screen in previous versions would not let you add the new vendor at that time. I.e. you'd have to add it first via the Vendor Maintenance screen. Starting with this version, you can add such a vendor on the fly from this same invoice screen. This also applies to Memos, Purchase Orders, Non-Inventory payables.
When you receive an invoice of inventory, there is an option to print out the invoice details. There are two changes in that area in this update: Previously there was not a layout that included the retail price but excluded the cost and now there is. Previously, the version which included the cost and retail totaled the cost value but not the retail value; now the retail total is printed at the bottom of the report.
Version 4.000 05/31/2019 ===============================================================
Resizing of VJS windows is introduced
In previous versions of Shopkeeper, certain combinations of receipt options, combined with a slower network, could cause significant delays before receipt started printing. This version has additional optimization to avoid such delays.
When retrieving and unlocking an existing layaway or special order or repair sale, the cursor now initially lands on the first unused Sku line. This is more convenient than in previous versions where the cursor initially landed on one of the existing Sku lines. (This also applies to Cash Sales, though it's fairly uncommon to modify Cash sales.)
The Assemble Disassemble screen has a one-touch feature to both remove an assembled item from stock and to return to stock all the components. In the Assemble screen, type/select the master/assembled Sku then click the Delete trash icon at the top of the screen.
You will have options as to whether the components will continue to appear in the list for that item but with zero quantity, or if they should be removed from the component list. (In either case, they will be added back to the on-hand inventory count.)
You will also have the option as to whether to delete the assembled item entirely, or to zero the quantity, so that it can be looked up later.
The Physical Inventory Exception report by location has a new option to show only those items which were scanned as being in a location, say XX, which was not expected to have any in that location.
Such items would have appeared on the regular physical inventory exception report by location, but the regular version also shows items where fewer were scanned than were expected. I.e. this typically highlights the excess / unexpected items.
The Physical Inventory by Trac Tech RFID has a new option whereby you can save the memory of the RFID to a text file on disk and then import that list. This would be useful if you use the wand at a location which does not have the Shopkeeper installed locally. E.g. if a remote store were running Shopkeeper from the main store via remote control, the Wand may not work by remote desktop or LogMeIn, etc., but the list file method does work over remote connections.
The Chart of Accounts screen now makes it harder to accidentally reassign an account to a different number. I.e. the Account Number box is now "double-locked" and you have to Ctrl-click it in order to unlock it and change the account number.
When you click on a date field, the cursor will jump to the most logical point to make it easier to adjust the date. If you click in either of the digits for the day, the cursor will jump to the beginning of the day. If you click in either of the digits for the month, the cursor will jump to the beginning of the month. If you click in either of the digits for the year, the cursor will jump to the beginning of the year.
As before, unchanged is the behavior that if the date is empty (or, in fact if you click anywhere in a non-date box) then clicking anywhere in the box will jump the cursor to the beginning of that box.
The Google Image Search feature of Shopkeeper was no longer working correctly in many cases because the Google Images site had changed. This VJS update makes changes in that area to remain compatible with Google Images.
After issuing a donated gift certificate (with no payment), in previous versions the gift certificate screen didn't show a confirmation message and not every box was emptied. Also, the screen didn't immediately wait for the next customer name. So it might have been unclear to the user whether or not the certificate was actually created. This update adds a prompt and more clarity so that the user doesn't wonder if the certificate was created or not.
Previously, the SMS / Texting screen would set the message to all upper-case if you had set a Preference for customer names + addresses to be upper-case. Now the message will be left as originally typed - upper and lower case.
The Itemized Sales Report now has an option to filter the report to just a single Sku Number.
Version 3.910 03/22/2019 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 650 new items for Spring 2019. There is a large number (over 200 of price and cost changes. This update adds about 200 new image files.
NB: The U.S. price changes go into effect on April 2, 2019 so one should wait until that date before updating the catalog. (For Canada, the price chnages are effective March 14.)
A new feature allows creation of in-house Accounts Receivable installment contracts. This uses a Microsoft Word document file as a template so that you can create a contract with any wording and formatting that you need. Shopkeeper will fill in the sale details including customer name and address, interest rate, monthly payment plan, interest rate. etc. From the sales screen, chooose Options, More Options, Installment Contract.
The Entire Customer History Report could be too slow in some cases after the last update. This update resolves that speed issue.
The Print Tags screen has a new option to print tags for just those items in one particular location. Choose "Full Selection" at the top of the Print Tags screen to access this option.
When adding new unbilled repair jobs (i.e. not from within a sales ticket) VJS checks for duplicate repair numbers. Previously, VJS would accept a previously-used repair number if it was several years old and already in the archived data. Starting with this update, even numbers from the archived repair file will not be allowed to be reused.
[906030519]
The Customer History Report can be run via the Customer X-Tra Search screen and a new option is to select only Accounts Receivable transactions. I.e. you can exclude cash sales, layaways and special orders to focus on just the in-house charge account transactions. In addition, the Excel file that is created at the same time of the customer history report is now more complete, such as including sales tax amounts.
The Return to Vendor inventory report was previously supposed to have an option to sort and group by Brand (Mfg), but that sort option was not active. Starting with this update that sort option it is now available.
The Go! button to access a vendor's website from the vendor profile screen became unresponsive in a recent update. This update restores that Go! button.
In the summary area of the Sales Payment Spreadsheet report, some wording has been clarified. What was "Labor" is now "No Tax Services" for non-taxable items in class codes for repairs, custom work and appraisals. What was "Repair" is now "All Services" for non-taxable items in class codes for repairs, custom work and appraisals.
Occasionally, one may inadvertently send a gigantic print job or many copies of a print job to the Windows printer queues, which can be difficult to clear from Windows. Visual Jewelry Shopkeeper has long had a shortcut to clear these printer queues, but recent versions of Windows may have prevented VJS from clearing the queues. This update includes changes to request Windows Administrator rights in order to clear the queues. This option is found via the VJS File Center by choosing Options, then Clear Printer Queues.
The Activity page of Inventory Status has the option to show Wish-List / Quote records for the currently select item. Previous versions would show Wish-List / Quote records just for the current Sku Number, but starting this version Wish-List / Quote records will be shown for all Sku's sharing the same Brand Code and Style. I.e. if a customer wants Style XYZ, it doesn't matter whether that's Sku 100-10022 or Sku 100-10758.
The Multi-Year Sales Comparisons Report previously had a quirk where you had to specifically select a starting month before it would consider a specific month-range selection. That has been resolved in this update.
Improvements to the Google Image search option for adding pictures to finished inventory from established vendors.
Version 3.902 02/21/2019 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over 540 new items for Valentines, Mothers Day, Sprint and Summer 2019
The Podium integration program was updated to support the new, longer Podium transaction ID numbers.
Version 3.900 02/11/2019 ===============================================================
Within the past year, the preferred method of adding images to Shopkeeper inventory and repairs with a webcam has been to use a screen-grab program such as GreenShot, then to right-click the No-Image box on-screen in Shopkeeper, to pop down a small menu from which one chooses Paste. However, on many computers, the right-click behavior is not always very "direct" - i.e. it could take 2 or 3 right-clicks before kicking in.
With this update, the right-click on the image behavior should be much more reliable than before for first-time recognition.
Also, most image boxes are accompanied by a "Paste" button on-screen to further make pasting images quicker and easier.
Further, in the inventory take-in screen, next to each item within the inventory grid, there is a small camera icon which used to be only to open the picture manager screen from which you could then add or view a picture. Starting this version, if you click that icon at a time when you have just used GreenShot to capture an image to the Windows clipboard, it will immediately paste that image into that inventory item. I.e. one-click instead of several.
Many screens in Shopkeeper have small green "Go!" arrow-buttons next to data boxes to activate a related task. For example, the Go! button by the Email box on the customer profile opens a Send Email window. Clicking the Go! button by the SMS/Text option on certain screens starts sending an SMS/Text.
However, on many computers, it could take 2 or 3 clicks, or careful click-speed before kicking in. With this update, the click action of such Go! buttons should be much more reliable than before for first-time recognition.
Similarly, the "Print a Tag" icon at the bottom right corner of the Inventory Status screen should be much more reliable than before for first-time recognition.
The Sales Payment Spreadsheet has an adjustment to the sales tax breakdown in the summary area, which helps for cases where there are multiple taxes that apply at different price-points.
The Itemized Sales Report has a new Report Organization option: "3 Taxables" to show 3 separate taxable amount columns which can help if you have multiple sales tax rates. (The normal Sales Tax layout option shows the 3 separate sales tax amounts per item, but not the taxable amount per item.)
You can now temporarily turn off the automatic pop up of the Podium review request screens when finishing sales or repairs. To do that, go to the Web Services Settings screen, which is towards the bottom of the list categories in the Preferences screen. There, add the word OFF to the beginning of the Podium Options box. Remove the word OFF when you want to resume auto pop-ups. Even with this set to OFF, you can still send requests manually from the customer profile screen by choosing Options, Podium. Note that this affects *all* computers if you have more than one.
If you want to turn the off the automatic pop up of the Podium review request screens at just *certain* computers, from the Local Defaults page in Preferences, in the box "Miscellaneous Options for Just This Computer", add the following words (before or after any other words already in the box: PODIUM OFF For example, you may want to turn off automatic pop-ups from the accounting computer but leave them on at the register and repair take-in computers.
As you receive an invoice / shipment of merchandise, within the Inventory Entry screen it's possible to print a price tag for each line. In previous versions the item line had to be saved already before you could print the tag. (i.e., you'd have to save it and then re-click on that line.) Starting this update, you ca click Options Print a Tag for a new item even before clicking the Save button.
The size of the job picture on the repair tracking screen has been increased a bit. (About 50% more area.)
The date-stamp on reports will now include the time the report was printed and, further, it will include the initials of the person logged-in.
Version 3.868B 01/21/2019 ===============================================================
Typing 19 into the year part of a date field would typically result in the year looking like 1919 (prior to pressing Enter). Previous versions of Shopkeeper had auto-adjust for odd dates, but 1919 was previously interpreted as 2000, for historical reasons. Going forward, this will be auto-adjusted to 2019.
A standard option you can activate in Preferences for sales is to require the entry of the clerk's / sales person's initials. A new, non-standard, option allows you to require two sets of initials per sale.
To use this feature, at any computer that needs to use alternative credentials, in Preferences, on p.1 in the box "Miscellaneous Options" box add the following word, before or after any other words already in the box: REQ2CLERKS
Version 3.868 12/29/2018 ===============================================================
The Sales Reports by Clerk has many different layouts and in previous versions the layout with subtotals by major class code within each vendor had problems with the turnover (# of days to sell) on the major class subtotal lines. That problem has been resolved in this update.
Also in the Sales Reports by Clerk, starting this version, the Turnover # of days to sell) now leaves out of the calculations the service and repair items. That's because such items would typically show unhelpful numbers which could be 1000's of days because the repair Sku could have been created 5 or 10 years ago. These values are left out of individual lines and of the subtotals per clerk.
When taking physical inventory with an RFID reader or if importing a list of Sku's from a portable barcode reader data collector, in previous versions, if multiple people were taking physical inventory at the same time, occasionally VJS would show a 'conflict' error message. While this alert was benign and could be safely ignored, it was unhelpful and has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.867 12/27/2018 ===============================================================
Various updates for credit card processing as needed to remain current.
A new utility can reposition the accounts. E.g. If you have a new bank account in the fourth position, you could move it to the top line position.
Miscellaneous updates.
[tf.cap dpath-UN; crslipzcomp; preprect; sectoactivate; tablevalidate0
Version 3.866 11/27/2018 ===============================================================
When you run an itemized inventory report, or when you receive or edit an invoice of merchandise or a batch of inventory without an invoice, or enter a purchase order, Shopkeeper now simultaneously creates a small file containing just the Sku number and the quantity in stock. The file format is suitable for importing the entire list into certain inventory management screens. Return to Vendor, Interstore Transfer, Relocate, Deduct from Inventory, Assemble & Disassemble, Physical Inventory This can speed up your work if you need, for example, to return to vendor an entire invoice, or you want to remove from inventory all items over 5 years old from vendor XXX. (I.e. you'd choose those criteria from the Inventory Reports screen.)
Note that if you edit a received invoice without making changes, the list is recreated again. Every time the list is recreated, the prior copy of the file is replaced.
The name of the file created is SKU-LIST.TXT and it is put into the VJS Reports folder which is on the Windows Desktop. To import the list into the screens above, you click the "Import a List" button then select "A List of Sku Numbers." If the list is not precisely the list you need, you can easily remove or add Sku's before you choose to Save and continue your work. You can also Cancel if the list is entirely wrong.
When you choose to print tags for a received invoice of merchandise, when you get to the list of items to be tagged, by default all lines are selected. For cases where you just added a line or two at the end of the invoice a new option can save you time. If you Right-click the checkbox, that unchecks (deselects) all other items in the list and selects just that item.
[podium off+]
Version 3.865 11/20/2018 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 160 new items for Fall/Holiday 2018. There is a small number of price and cost changes This update adds about 260 new image files; - i.e. in addition to pictures for new items, it adds images for some prior summer items for which the picture was not previously available.
The Image area of inventory (or repairs, etc.) can now accept video files in .MOV or .MP4 format. Of course, such files take up a lot more storage space and will not print on reports or tickets.
[editsarlast5]
Version 3.860 10/19/2018 ===============================================================
There is now an option to delete a non-inventory payable. (Previously, you could zero the amount, but not remove a non-inventory payable.) This is accessed via the Non-Invent Payables tab after choosing Add or Change Accounts Payable from the Accounting Menu.
Podium Review Request integration updates: From the top of the repair detail tracking screen, when you click on Options there is a new choice to manually pop up the review request screen. (I.e. the same choice as available from the sales screen and from the customer profile screen.) You can now make VJS automatically pop up the review request screen when you fill in a repair's customer pick-up information. To do that add the keyword PICKUP in the Podium Options box in Preferences. (In most cases, this is not necessary, because the request screen would appear when you print the sales ticket for the completed repair. However, you might want to use this option if you don't generally print a sales receipt at repair pick-up time.)
In previous versions, the Inventory Web Export option could drop the last letter of the description in a small number of cases. (Only when every letter of both the short description lines were completely filled and when the export format included both description lines combined into one.) This has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.850 10/9/2018 ===============================================================
The Podium integration module has a new option whereby you can have more than one set of credentials for different locations even if those stores share the same set of books as the main store. To use this feature, at any computer that needs to use alternative credentials, open the Local Defaults p.2 page of Preferences and in the box "Miscellaneous Options for Just This Computer", add the following words (before or after any other words already in the box:
PODIUM KEY "XXX-YYY-ZZZ" PODIUM ID "123456" Where you add your own Podium authorization key and Podium Location Id between the quotes.
For times where you return all the items on an incoming invoice or memo a new option makes it easy to transfer the shipping charges to a separate payable. Retrieve the invoice or memo and proceed to the inventory list. At the top, click Options, then choose Transfer Freight to Another Invoice. You can type or select an existing payable for that vendor or you can type a new invoice number.
The Physical Inventory screen is primarily destined to produce a Physical Inventory Exception report - with just the problems. However, it has had the option to send your physical count list to an Excel spreadsheet file. This update adds additional columns to that XLS file, notably, the cost, the replacement cost, the extended cost value, the extended replacement cost value and the extended retail value. (Extended meaning quantity or weight multiplied by the unit cost or the unit retail.) Including the cost values in the XLS file is optional and is available only for users with sufficient security clearance. [As a reminder, note that simply entering the physical counts and exporting them, does not correct the quantities in Shopkeeper.]
Version 3.849 09/19/2018 ===============================================================
You have long been able to change the appearance ("skin") of VJS by choosing, from the Main Menu, Options, Screen Graphics. Starting this version, if you change the appearance for one set of books, that does not change the appearance for the other books. (E.g. you could set a different appearance for the DEMO / Evaluation books compared to the Main / real books, which can facilitate awareness of which set of books are being used.)
The Cash Register Journal Report has additional options. - Previously the payments were reported in the order they were entered. You now have the option to sort Date and Time. This will keep all transactions of the same date in the same grouping even if they were not entered in a strictly date-ordered sequence. - You can now select different combinations of payment types, of which certain aren't exactly payments. E.g. Accounts Receivable Adjustments, Charges to in-house A/R accounts, or only bank-depositable payments. -This report now automatically creates an Excel file (RegisterJournal.xls in the VJS Reports folder on the Windows Desktop ) of the report results in case you want to create other presentations, sorts or calculations.
[cstmcapscusteditspwork]
Version 3.848 09/12/2018 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 70 price changes beyond the change of August. These changes are primarily to set the retail price of promotion items back up to the normal price, but with the expectation that retailers will discount them 30 % at point of sale during the promotion. There are also a few other price and cost changes
There are no new items beyond the August 2018 catalog update.
Version 3.845 08/27/2018 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 1150 price and cost changes that need to go into effect on August 30, 2018.
There are very few new items beyond the June 2018 catalog update.
Version 3.841 08/10/2018 ===============================================================
On the Inventory Cont. page of Preferences, you can now set, or reset the next Purchase Order number. Previouisly this number was not user-changeable.
An adjustment was made on the Podium Review Request screen to better handle the (unusual) case where there is only a spouse's mobile phone number, not a primary mobile phone number.
[reputationstacker]
Version 3.840 08/01/2018 ===============================================================
This update adds the multi-year and multi-month comparison sales and purchases reports. Going beyond the previously-available Compare Two Date Ranges Report, this report can compare sales figures from ten different years or twelve separate months.
Another available version of this report compares inventory purchases for each of the past twelve months. These reports may not be available if you have a lite version of VJS (without advanced sales analysis.)
In Preferences, you can optionally set a rule to require that repair customers have a phone number recorded. In previous versions, having just the Spouse's Mobile number alone wasn't enough - another phone number was required. Starting this version, the Spouse's Mobile alone is sufficient to satisfy that rule.
The Podium Review Request screen has a change whereby it's now possible to select the spouse (secondary) name with the primary mobile number and vice-versa. Depending on the situation, you may not always want a "hard-link" between the primary name and the primary mobile number.
The Large customer export Excel / CSV option from the mailing label report screen now includes a column for the Spouse's Mobile phone number. (This is in the Merge1.CSV file which is typically created in the VJS Reports folder which is on the Windows Desktop.)
The cost of sales line-items for repairs and service can now be typed in by lower-security users even if they can't normally adjust the cost for inventory items.
Version 3.830 07/24/2018 ===============================================================
A previous VJS update added the ability to send, using your Podium account, internet review requests to customers when recording sales or repairs. This update adds the ability to send SMS-text messages to customers on any subject or for repair status updates - i.e. unrelated to reviews. This SMS-texting feature was available in previous VJS versions, but only using an account with a company called Red Oxygen. So, if you already have a Podium account, you can get a second use out of it. See this FAQ help topic on texting: http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?sms_texting.htm
See the Version 3.810 update notes below for more information on Podium integration in general.
In addition to the Podium SMS-texting addition, this update adds a new SMS-texting option whereby you can type each SMS-text message from scratch. In previous versions, you needed to create one or several SMS-text template messages ahead of time from which you picked one for each send. Starting from this version, you can start with a blank message and compose it on the fly. You can also select a template message and have the option to adjust or add to it for each message.
The inventory export to website file feature now includes the ability to include more than 254 letters of the Alternative Extended Description on the Style Detail page of Inventory status.
The Customer Reports by Special Events (Anniversaries, etc.) has previously had the option to include only those customers *with* items on their wish lists. This update adds the further option to include only those customers with special events and *without* a wish list item. This allows you to separate the lists in order to send more personalized mailings to those with particular items on their list, and more general mailings to those without.
Version 3.825 07/02/2018 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 570 new items for Summer/Fall 2018. There are very few price changes, but there are quite a few cost changes since the last update so you may want to update the prior catalog information - including the cost. So far, most of the new image files are not yet available, but we hope to receive those soon in order to integrate them in a forthcoming update.
The Itemized Sales Report has a new layout option to compare sales by year with one line per year. Choose: Sort By Year. In order to see many years at once, be sure to choose Full Selection then choose: Both for the Current vs Archive sales file.
Version 3.820 06/27/2018 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over 300 new Summer and Fall 2018 items.
The Podium Online Review integration option added in Version 3.810 now adds the option to select either the primary name or the spouse's name, along with the choice of which mobile phone number or email to use.
The Enter Existing Inventory screen now has an option to run a report of the batch of items that were just entered. This can be run either immediately after entering the items, or retroactively, if you re-open this screen and type a previous batch number.
The menu graphics have been updated.
[ccTerminalID]
Version 3.810 06/08/2018 ===============================================================
A new feature is integration with the Podium Online Review and Online Customer Interaction Management system.
Right at the point of sale a good time to propose sending a review request, Just when the customer most remembers the good experience shopping with you. To prevent missing out on these opportunities, Shopkeeper can automatically prompt you to initiate a Podium review request when you print receipts - or at any time you work with a customer.
See this FAQ help topic for more details: http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?podium_on-line_review_requests.htm
You can now use the keyboard Escape-Escape shortcut to exit out of the repairs job billing selection screen, whereas previously you had to click Cancel or the [X] with the mouse. (As a reminder, in the Sku No. box of the sales screen, pressing Ctrl-R is the shortcut to pop up the Job Billing screen to show jobs that were entered loose/unbilled.)
[TTUSBupdt]
Version 3.800 05/23/2018 ===============================================================
The repairs and custom job screen now allows you to add a list of components from inventory. Choose the Parts tab at the bottom of the Job tracking screen, then choose Update Parts above the list.
Notes: Sku's added to jobs are removed from stock immediately even if the job is not finalized and delivered. Sku's are not included in sales figures (The entire amount of the job will once it's finalized.) You can report a list of used parts by running the Itemized Sales Reports and selecting "Job Parts" for the "Components" option.
Some HP printers exhibit a symptom whereby certain text lines are printed in a stack of two half-height lines. The real solution is to install a new or a different Windows printer driver. However, this isn't always easy so this update adds a workaround. In the Print Options dialog box, type the number 80 in the "Options" box. To reiterate, this is just a workaround and the resulting printing may not be formatted quite right, and finding a better printer driver remains the real solution.
On the Inventory Status screen, the Print a Tag button at the bottom right previously had a ctrl-click option to simultaneously select a Sku and proceed to the tag printing. (Whereas a regular click added the Sku to the tag list and waited for the addition of further items.) The click and ctrl-click behavior could sometimes take a few clicks to register. As part of the adjustment to help that, in this update, the select-and-print-in-one option is now selected by pressing the middle button.
In previous versions, by design, miscellaneous bank adjustments and bank deposits had separate number sequences could overlap. Starting this version, a deposit and an adjustment cannot have the same number.
In previous versions, when you clicked with the mouse in certain empty date boxes, the cursor would start where you clicked so you'd have to arrow left before starting typing. In this update, clicking anywhere in an empty date box will move the cursor to the beginning so you can start typing immediately.
If you find that certain drop-down lists disappear a bit too quickly for you when you move the mouse out of them, this version has a "sensitivity" adjustment option. (Email us for details if you think this applies to you, it's not something we'd expect most people to tinker with.)
[salecommplswait]
Version 3.792 05/08/2018 ===============================================================
It's fairly common to create special Sku numbers which result in a credit on sale, such as Sku's for Trade-Ins, or Sku's for donated gift certificates or Sku's for promotion coupons, etc. On the sales screen, such sku's need to be entered with a positive price and a negative quantity.
To save you from manually typing minus-one each time you use such a Sku, this version adds the feature for you to specify a Standard Sale Quantity for any Sku number. This is available on the Notes page of Inventory Status.
This could also be used for positive quantities, such as items that are usually sold in twos - but where the price is entered as the per-individual value.
Technical update for higher security ftp passwords.
Adjustments to credit card processing timeout settings for smoother EMV credit card processing.
Adjustments to lookup of inventory by Part Number for cases where there are similar part number but with different lengths.
[206.188 nDelayChk3, vjsclient8,vjsincoming]
Version 3.790 05/02/2018 ===============================================================
A new module, Interstore Inventory Transfer, has been added with this update. If you have two stores with Shopkeeper inventory control, this allows you to record a list of items to be transferred to be deducted from one inventory and added to the other. It's important that the Sku numbering system for both stores be carefully coordinate and you'll need to ask Compulink for instructions before considering using this feature.
This includes transfer of associated images. It can send a payable to the receiving store. Reports on outgoing and incoming transfers are available. The transfer files can be sent on a USB memory stick that accompanies the inventory items. Or the transfer files can be sent by Internet.
This module is available for those with two or more licenses for the Full Version of Jewelry Shopkeeper. For smaller versions of Shopkeeper this module could possibly be purchased.
Version 3.782 ( incl. 3.775 a-k) 04/20/2018 ===============================================================
This version includes internet security updates that are necessary for integrated credit card processing which now has higher security requirements.
The Itemized Sales Report has a new sort option: by Part Number.
Version 3.780 ( incl. 3.775 a-k) 04/16/2018 ===============================================================
Shopkeeper has previously had a few methods of sending emails to customers (e.g. simple messages or sales receipts or appraisals or repairs.) Because email systems (e.g. Gmail, Yahoo, etc.) periodically change their security or protocol requirements, this update includes a new connection method which may help if the other methods don't work. This has been tested with Gmail, Yahoo and Outlook.com (the on-line Outlook.)
When you get to the email screen, switch to the Settings page and you'll see the new option: Direct dot-Net. This does support the Secure SSL/TLS option, which, if used, would typically be used with Port 587 or 465.
Some people may have experienced a problem looking up Sku numbers in inventory status in the prior version. This update addresses that.
The Slate and Tell catalog import program has been updated with over 100 new Spring and Summer 2018 items. A second update in April added 15 further new items which are shipping.
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with over 700 new Spring and Summer 2018 items.
[lockdefaultsaletype, ww6, rfidinvck]
Version 3.774 03/19/2018 ===============================================================
Just days after the huge cost and reprice update that went into effect on March 15, 2018, we have received a *further* catalog update. *) 150 new Styles (logo rings, letter charms, regular charms, bracelets, college jewelry bundles) *) Over 380 images that were previously missing from recent catalog updates.
Version 3.772 03/14/2018 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program includes over 300 retail price and wholesale cost updates. Even if further changes that need to go into effect on March 15, 2018. If you haven't updated the catalog recently, then about 600 new spring items will also be added.
The Alex and Ani catalog import program adds about 60 more Spring items (beyond Mothers Day 2018) - most with accompanying images.
Miscellaneous changes for credit card processing to keep in synch with the changes in the processors' systems.
A new utility allows you to retroactively apply a Dept Code to sales based on the presence of certain items on the sale. E.g. if you have previously applied promotion or discount sku's to sales, by applying Dept Codes to all items on those sales, you could report all the items on such sales to validate the result of the promotion. (The utility is u_dept_assign - in case of intereste ask Compulink for more details.)
*AddLastOnly
Version 3.771 02/26/2018 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program adds about 50 Mothers Day 2018 items - most with images.
On the Inventory Status screen, certain "more sensitive" data boxes are "double-locked" so they remain protected even if the padlock at the top is unlocked. To unlock them you need to Ctrl-Click them. E.g., the Part Number, Style and Major Code have previously been double-locked. In this update, the Price by Weight vs. Price by Piece selection is also double-locked. This is because an accidentaly change of that field would have a serious effect on the price on the sales screen or the cost in the inventory cost total.
Version 3.770 02/15/2018 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 600 new items for early 2018. Note: this does NOT yet include the new prices for March. Those price changes may not be applied before March 15, 2018.
VJS has has features for applying automatic discounts at the sales screen based on the major code, the minor code and the customer. A sneaky new option in this version allows you to round the resulting price up to the nearest dollar. E.g. $149.99 minus 15% = $127.49 and you have the option to make the result round up to $149.00 To do this, set the discount value to end in .01 such as 15.01% or 10.01%
You can now reorder the list of bank accounts within the accounting module. E.g. Perhaps your new/current bank account is #4 on the list, but it would make things easier if it were the default / #1 on the list. From the Checkbook Setup screen, choose Options, Change Order of Accounts.
The Chart of Accounts screen within the accounting module has a new feature to report the accounts along with a value from one of the prior 49 months. This report also simultaneously creates an Excel XLS file of the results. From the Chart of Accounts screen, choose Options at the top then choose Report COA with Values.
The Adjustments list on the Activity page of Inventory Status will now hide most information if the person signed-in to Shopkeeper does not have security access to run an inventory adjustments report.
A new security feature allows you to restrict access to the report "Entire Customer History." However, note that this does not prevent users reviewing sales history in various on-screen grid-lists; it limits access just to the full-page report-style listing.
In certain cases where a sale has no Sku line, or only non-printing Sku lines, a receipt would print without the customer name. This has been addressed in this update.
In previous versions, when receiving an invoice of merchandise, in certain cases, when you type the major code and press <Enter> and very quickly start typing the minor code, the second digit of the minor code could overwrite the first - so you'd have to retype it. That has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.761 01/30/2018 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program adds the new early 2018 / Valentines Harry Potter items and other new items for early 2018
Version 3.760 01/17/2018 ===============================================================
The sales activity list in Inventory Status now defaults to showing the most recent sales at the top rather than at the bottom. (Since regular inventory typically has a quantity of just one, this mostly affects generic Sku's which are re-used repeatedly.)
In previous versions, an invoice payable's discount date could get set to the due date in certain cases. That has been resolved.
Entering addresses with compass additions such as SE will remain as SE and not Se as was the case before. (In previous versions directionals like s.e. [with dots] already were being converted do capitals.)
The Repair Quick Status Update screen now adds the ability to update the Insurance Value for each job. To see this extra column, you'll need to increase the width of the screen (by dragging the corner with the mouse.) In addition, you can now increase the height of this screen to view extra rows of repairs. That's helpful if you update long lists of jobs, and if your monitor is tall enough.
Version 3.759 12/27/2017 ===============================================================
The sales receipt change in the previous version prevented the customer number from appearing on receipts in some cases. That has been fixed in this update.
The PDF version of some layouts of the inventory report did not include the minor code column. Starting this version, that column will be shown.
When adding the in-house charge account option to a customer records the options to turn OFF statements, finance charges and statements for this customer default to do not turn off, but in previous versions these options initially appeared blank so it wasn't always clear to users what the status was. Now these options are checkboxes so the status will be clearer.
Starting this version, VJS will check the status of Windows "network caching" and will warn you if it's on - since that can cause data problems. A fix for this Windows setting will be suggested.
[p.o. reporting/lt]
Version 3.758 11/17/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program has about 200 new items for the holiday season.
If an Entire Customer History report is more than one page, starting with this update, the customer name will print in the header of each page - not just the first page.
The sales receipts and appraisals will now print the customer name including the spouse's last name. If the spouse's name is not specified, then it will print the same way as before (e.g. Jack & Jill Hillsworth)
Actually, to be more precise, these receipts and appraisals will use the salutation format that you specify in the customer page of Preferences. Note that if you specify a format that uses titles (Mr. /Mrs.) then for customers without those titles, that aspect will be ignored.
This change may be extended in subsequent updates to repair tickets.
[shopify] [myreport]
Version 3.751 11/03/2017 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has a small number of new items - the Moon and Star items.
The Accounts Receivable balance audit utility has a new option to select an individual customer. When you choose just one customer, the results show the details of the transactions for that customer. (Normally, the utility shows just the total value of purchases and total of payments.)
Version 3.750 10/26/2017 ===============================================================
A new Managed Customer Alert system has been added in this version. You can create pop-up alerts or messages that appear when you record customer sales. These can be reminders to salespeople to ask customers questions or to inform customers of events. For example:
- Remind customers of a Gent's Night event - Inform customers of a new line you carry - Ask customers if they have recently noticed your advertising - Ask customers if they need parking validation - Ask customers if they want to contribute to a Charity drive - Ask customers if they need a gift receipt or gift wrapping. - Ask customers if you have their current address, phone and email - Ask customers if they would like any jewelry item they are wearing to be cleaned - Etc.
Using these alerts can improve customer service, learn more about customer awareness of your store's offerings, promote special events, increase add-on sales, etc.
See this page in the online FAQ help pages for more details: http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?sales_screen_customer_alerts.htm
The X and Z reports will be shorter and tidier in many cases because the large number of Accounts Receivable lines and the Paid Out and Received lines are removed if there is no activity in those areas.
The Itemized Sales reports with tax columns have been adjusted to fix a problem which could have occurred before in certain rare situations. (Where the sales tax rate is multi-tiered based on price, and where two or more identical, very high-price items are sold on the same sales ticket.)
If you want all merchandise items added via a Memo type of invoice to be set to a specific minor class code, add the keyword MEMOMINOR=XXX anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences, where you replace XXX with the desired minor code. Note that this should be rarely necessary, as inventory and sales reports can report memo inventory without needing a specific minor code.
The Alex and Ani Ugly Sweater item has been added to the Alex and Ani utility: u_alexanisep2017
{cdoattach}{impcsvinvxls1234}{bprecalcbackup}
Version 3.740 09/25/2017 ===============================================================
A new customer mailing list option allows you to select customers based on Male / Female notations in the customer profile screen.
This is a powerful new option to enable you to more easily do Ladies' Night or Gents' Night mailers.
On the Customer Reports and Labels screen, choose Full Selection and in the Male/Female box you could type M or F or MF or FM.
Choosing F will pick only customers where either the First Name or the Spouse's Name was set to F. If the Spouse's Name is F then in the list, the First name will be set to the Spouse's Name E.g. John Smith would be ignored, Jane Smith would be included and Jack and Judy Smith would become Judy Smith.
Similarly, Choosing M will pick only customers where either the First Name or the Spouse's Name was set to M. E.g. Jane Smith would be ignored, John Smith would be included, and Judy and Jack Smith would become Jack Smith.
If you select MF or FM then only customers which have both an M name and an F name are included - so you get only couples. MF would reorganize the results so that the Male name is first and the Female name is second, and FM would put the Female name first.
E.g. for MF Jane Smith would be ignored, John Smith would be included, Bob & Mary Smith would be included as-is and Sally & Rich Smith would be included but with Rich in the first name and Sally in the Spouse's name.
Note that the results for this selection apply only if you choose the Large Customer CSV export to create the Excel file MERGE1.CSV in the VJS Reports folder which is on the Windows Desktop. This version of the export file contains many, many columns, but you can erase any columns if that makes it easier to work with. Using that list, you can merge with Word or with your email program or create a call sheet.
Note that in the resulting file, the spouse's name will still be included in the spouse column. Also note that if the first and spouse name are switched then so are the title and the email addresses.
This way, if you do mail-merge and were doing a gent's night, you could make the letter or email say something like: Dear Rich, Come to our Gents' Night to find something special for Sally.
Of course, this ability works only if you have put M or F next to the first and/or spouse's name in the customer profile screen.
You don't have to use M or F specifically; you could use W or L or G, etc.
The Alex and Ani catalog program has been updated with 150 new items and corrected prices (or filled in prices) for hundreds of other fall items.
When running the Itemized Sales Report an Excel XLS file is simultaneously created. A difference in this update is that when that report is sorted by customer, the XLS file now includes an additional column for the customers' mobile phone number. (Along with all the other columns that were included in previous versions).
When you receive a shipment of inventory and some of the items are on pending special order sales, if the cost changes, that will change the cost in the pending special order sales record - this has been the case in previous versions. Starting this version, if you change the description as you receive such items, the description in the pending special order sales will also change.
When you receive a shipment of Loose Stones and you add extended detail at the same time you log it in, previous versions had a display quirk where if you added the stone details (e.g. MM, Clarify, etc.) then returned back to the invoice screen then went back to the stone details screen then the details wouldn't immediately show until you clicked in a detail box. This wasn't "dangerous" and only appeared with this limited combination. However, it could have been disconcerting if you happened to encounter that.
This has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.732 08/31/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora program has over 100 new items and includes over 400 retail price and wholesale cost updates. Even if further changes may be released in the next few days, this release will help log in new Pandora shipments.
Version 3.730 08/17/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora program has 3 more items - some dangles and a heart that have shipped recently.
The Appraisal feature can now print multiple appraisals together. Depending on the length of the appraisal text, multiple appraisals may print on one sheet or they may wrap to a second page, but still as a continuous appraisal. For this to be applicable: *) The multiple appraisals would have to be linked to line items on a single sale. *) Not all appraisal print formats support this option because they have limited space for appraisal text. *) The appraisal print format should be 'Appraisal for Letterhead, Multiple Per Page" or "Appraisal with Logo File, Multiple Per Page" *) From the Appraisal screen, choose Options, Appraisal Print Layout and check the box 'Print Multiple Appraisals Per Page" Note that if this checkbox does not appear, you'll need to choose from the VJS File Center "More" then "Update Data Files" - which requires all users to be out of Shopkeeper for a few minutes.
The Repair Status Quick Update screen, now allows you to see and update the Notes field - the one which is on the second page of the repair details screen. To enable that, click on the Edit Notes checkbox. Because that takes a certain amount of space, there is a bit less screen room available for other elements.
The Slate and Tell catalog import program has been updated with the current line and now includes over 3000 items and pictures. If you request your invoice files in Excel format, Shopkeeper can add the received quantities to stock.
One of the advantages of the Trac Tech RFID system is that Shopkeeper can simultaneously print a price tag, and encode the RFID number in the tag. That's instead of having a separate chip that you have to sandwich in the tag and then link to a Sku.
However, there may be cases in which using the pre-made reusable RFID chips/wafers would be useful and VJS now also supports the Trac Tech re-usable tags.
You can use a combination of both tag types: reusable and printer-"burned". Or, you could start with the reusable tags as an economy measure because you wouldn't immediately require the expensive RFID printer. (You could also forego the RFID wand to start; however, the wand reading is the main reason to use RFID in the first place.)
This update also adds support for the small "thumb-sized" USB RFID reader by Trac Tech. This can be used in the Inventory Status screen or any screen which accepts a list of Sku's (physical inventory, return to vendor, etc.) It can also be used to select items during sales. When the Sales screen is waiting for a Sku number, press Ctrl-I to switch into RFID lookup mode. The thumb-sized RFID readers (except the RDP model) require that you be running the TracTech keyboard emulation driver program and that it be configured to "Use RETURN" and configure to not use TAB or DASH or PREFIX nor POSTFIX. TracTech will provide this driver and instructions.
Version 3.720 07/31/2017 ===============================================================
In some cases, you may want to flag a sales ticket for a repair as Special Order so that if it is pre-paid before pickup, it does not finalize automatically. In previous versions, if the sale total were zero (i.e. you hadn't yet any repair estimate) VJS wouldn't let you flag the associated sales ticket as special order, but starting this version, you can.
The inventory report version which is grouped and subtotaled by the invoice number in previous versions had a running total for the vendor after each invoice instead of just the per invoice subtotal. Starting this version, the subtotal after each invoice is the subtotal for just that invoice alone.
Shopkeeper has a Wholesale Pricing option whereby certain customers can receive one of four different levels of Wholesale pricing. In previous versions, the wholesale pricing would be set on a per style basis. Starting in this version, the Wholesale pricing can also be set on a per major class basic - where the wholesale price is cost plus different percentages. Contact Compulink for more details if interested.
In Version 3.71 the Shopkeeper menu icons were updated. You now have the option to display the old-style icons on the menus add the keyword 2004ICONS anywhere in the box Miscellaneous Options for Just This Computer Settings box on the Local Defaults page 2 of Preferences. I.e. this setting doesn't change the preference for all computers on a network; each computer can change the option individually.
As you enter new inventory, a character counting feature shows the length of the character as you type it. This might help in case you try to optimize the use of tag spaces by making word breaks at certain lengths. The counter is in the header of the description column of Inventory Entry.
In previous versions, for the inventory report combination where you select to show images and the replacement cost, the regular cost shown next to each item. With this update the actual replacement cost will show. (Unless it's zero in which case, as always, the regular cost will show.)
Version 3.718 07/17/2017 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani Catalog utility has been updated with additional styles and pictures for Summer 2017.
In Preferences, there is a new option to disable printing inventory pictures on month-end accounts receivable statements.
In the Cash Register Paid-out and Received screen, in previous versions you could alternate between Paid-Out mode and Received mode by moving the mouse over the selection icons. However, starting this version you have to click the icons or the buttons not just move the mouse over them.
Now, if you change an invoice's vendor code, previously entered checks will be assigned the new vendor code too, in order to keep the checks linked to the invoice. You'll be given a choice of leaving the Payee Name on the check as it was originally entered (probably best if the check has already been printed and sent out), or changing the Payee Name on the checks to match the new vendor code.
Month-End Accounts Receivables Statements can now print a watermark of "Past Due" in very large letters. This option is activated in the Accounts Receivables Statement Layout page of Preferences.
The Fast Seller Report (Sales and Inventory Report Summarized by Style) has two additional columns: Price of Each Item and Cost of Each Item of the articles in stock inventory. This not necessarily the same as the price those items sold for.
Version 3.715 06/30/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program has a further 90 new items. Some of the new items are shipping, but this update also includes new items to come that will not ship until Fall 2017. It also includes a number of price and cost changes and adds over 400 pictures for items that previously didn't have an image.
Now, if you change an invoice's number, previously entered checks will be renumbered too, in order to keep the checks linked to the invoice.
Includes a fix for receipt printing Totals area, a problem that affected some copies of Version 3.710
v1icon
Version 3.710 06/16/2017 ===============================================================
This version introduced changes in the menu icons and graphics.
This update includes the addition of a rewards dollars system to help promote customer loyalty and repeat visits. The accumulation of Loyalty Points or Rewards dollars can be earned at different (or zero) percentages differently depending on the type of merchandise or service. The rewards can be used at point of sale as partial payments either at a rate of $1 per point or at a percentage you configure.
It's not extremely complicated, but there are enough details to consider and configure that you'll want to carefully read the guide, which is available on the online help / FAQ pages: www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?loyalty_rewards_program.htm
The inventory report has a new layout which summarizes the inventory by minor class code.
The customer reports screen has a new report option: "Special Events+Wish List Only." This choice is almost the same as "Special Events+Wish List" except that only those
customers who have items on their wish list are reported. This makes for a much shorter, more focused report on customers who both have a special event coming up and who have registered specific wish list items.
The sales screen item list now shows negative amounts in red to make them stand out more.
Under certain conditions in previous versions, there was a difficulty adding Part Numbers to inventory in the inventory-entry grid. That has been resolved in this update.
Under certain conditions in previous versions, the repair QuickUpdate screen could replace the sales screen price with the repair screen estimate. That has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.700 05/30/2017 ===============================================================
In previous versions, on occasion some drop lists of selection items (e.g. a pick list of invoices, or class codes or clerks, etc.) would remain on-screen when it should have disappeared, and that could clutter the screen. Starting this update, that should not occur any more.
The Customer X-Tra Search screen within the Sales screen, has an adjustment such that when you edit a customer profile and make changes, it doesn't immediately assume to add a new sale when you've finished editing.
In previous versions, using the Undo button on the Sales screen and then selecting a different sale from X-Tra search could result in an error message. That is resolved in this update.
The repair report adds the option to sort the list by the date the jobs were sent to a Shop (or to a vendor or to a jeweler - depending on how you use that data field.)
Adjustments were made to the Vantiv / Blackline credit card processing.
Version 3.689 05/10/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program has a further 550 new items. Some of the new items are shipping, but this update also includes new items to come that will not ship until summer 2017. It also includes a number of price and cost changes.
The Aging Snapshot version of the inventory report has had the wording changed to be more clear. The first line was Under 3 Months, but the second and subsequent lines showed "Under 6 Months", "Under 12 Months", etc. Now they read "3 to 6 Months", "6 to 12 Months", etc.
The Non-Inventory Payables entry has been tweaked to allow the invoice date to not default to seven days prior. I.e. it now has the same options available as inventory payables and memos. For details, see the version 3.386 update notes below.
Version 3.688 05/05/2017 ===============================================================
In previous versions, a timing issue in certain inventory adjustment screens could cause the picture to be one behind - i.e. it could show the picture of the last item in the list, not the one you're currently adding. Screens: Relocate Inventory screen, Add to Existing Inventory, Deduct from Inventory. That has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.687 04/29/2017 ===============================================================
A new product catalog import program has been added: The Slate and Tell line of over 680 items and pictures can now be imported. Also, Slate & Tell will provide invoice files in Excel format so Shopkeeper can add received quantities.
In the customer X-Tra Search screen, when you have the repair list selected at the bottom right corner, now the image of each repair shows as you highlight each repair line. This can help you more positively select the right line based on the picture. If the image doesn't appear, you'll need to widen the X-Tra Search screen slightly to allow the extra room for the picture. Just drag the right edge of the X-Tra Search screen to widen it.
In the customer profile page, if you change the last name, a reminder note indicating the old name, the new name and the date of change is now automatically added to the customer notes
A few optimization changes when you add a new customer and change the state. You don't have to delete the default state; the default city and the zip code will self-erase because they couldn't be the same if the customer is out of state.
Version 3.683 03/31/2017 =============================================================== The Pandora Catalog program has a *further* 140 new items (some of which might not be shipping yet.) It also includes the Canadian dollar values for the 100's of price and/or cost changes for March 2017
When receiving merchandise invoices, a running cost invoice total is shown at the bottom right corner of the screen. Added to that in this update is a running total of the retail value. That can help you keep an eye on the overall markup which could prevent accidental retail price errors.
When you assemble inventory component items into another item, the quantity of the components is deducted from stock. However, components which are in a labor or service category are not deducted. This version adds an alert in such cases because sometimes users are puzzled when certain items are not deducted from inventory. (In case you often assemble service and labor components, you can disable this alert by adding the keyword ASSEMBLESVCALERTOFF anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings on the first page of Preferences)
When processing EMV/Chip credit cards via the Vantiv/Mercury processor, some on-screen prompts have been made clearer and more helpful.
When receiving merchandise invoices, the invoice date automatically defaults to seven days before the received date. The exact invoice date doesn't matter much as the received date is used for accounting but if you'd like to change the default invoice date to today, you can add the keyword INVOICEDATE anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings on the first page of Preferences. If you make the keyword INVOICEDATE1, that would set it to one day prior to the received date which may be handy if you get a lot of overnight shipments. You can change the number 1 to another number such as 2 for two days earlier.
invcchg-blnkdate
Version 3.682 03/16/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program has a *further* 137 price and or cost changes
The position of the notes box on the customer profile screen got altered in the previous version. This update fixes the position.
On the sales screen, it is now possible to type in the cost of any sales line with a cost code. Activate this option via the Sales Screen Cont page in Preferences.
[Fix for negative/return charge processing with Vantiv Blackline ]
Version 3.680 03/09/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program will apply about 650 price and cost changes that are due to go into effect on March 16, 2017. Note that you probably *do* want to activate the option to Change Existing Costs because of the large number of cost changes. However, this does retroactively change the cost value of existing items in Shopkeeper, so you may want to print a summary inventory report for Pandora before and after the catalog change so you know what cost difference was caused.
There are also about 30 new Pandora styles added.
*Note* The order of the data fields on the customer profile screen has changed in that the Email address is now right after the customer's first name. This is to reflect the importance of registering email addresses. (The secondary email address box is still on the right-hand side.)
The Price Tag Designer allows additional data fields to be printed on the tags: Quantity in Stock, Quantity Received and Weight Received. By default, these data fields won't appear in the palette so if you want to use them, choose Modify Palette in the Tag Designer, then use the check boxes to select the fields you want to enable.
A new option can warn you if the repair ticket number sequence has "jumped" up or down. This feature is not active by default - ask Compulink if you think you may need it. [JOBSEQWARN]
Version 3.675 02/16/2017 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with hundreds of the latest additions to their catalog - including items Mothers day 2017 Many of the additions also include a picture - but some of the pictures won't be available until after the display date.
The basic mailing list report didn't include the spouse's name in previous versions, but starting with this update it does.
When sending the customer purchase report to a PDF file in previous versions, very long customer names (first and last) would be blank. This is resolved in this update.
When running a Return to Vendor report, an Excel export file is simultaneously put in the VJS Reports folder. The change in this update is that the minor class code column has been added to the XLS output file.
In previous versions the itemized sales report would show the cost regardless of one's security level. That might have required you to prevent certain users from accessing this sales report screen. The current update is modified such that the cost value will not show any more for lower-level login ID's.
The Cash Register Journal payment report now allows you to choose to show only layaway payments or just special order payments or just charge account payments or just cash sale payments.
The Itemized Sales Report sorted by customer shows sales details grouped by customer. In previous versions there was a synch problem such that the phone number printed by the name was the phone number for the customer above. That is fixed in this update.
[chg_maj chg]
Version 3.670 01/24/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds ~70 additional items - including Mothers Day 2017. In addition, some of the items added earlier this month didn't previously have a price in the Pandora catalog data and this update adds many of the missing prices - so you'll want to run the Update step to fix those prices.
50 additional image files for early 2017 and Valentines items are included in this update. (Further images will be included in later updates as they become available.)
A new security option allows you to restrict access to the ability to delete customer records. You can set the required security level on the More Security Settings page within Preferences.
A new security option allows you to restrict access to the ability to delete repair. You can set the required security level on the Sales Security page within Preferences.
It is now possible to require users to access the repair screen drop-down pick lists of canned wording and phrases. This can be helpful if you want people to be more consistent and complete with the descriptions and instructions.
To enable this option the keywords REQREPDROPDOWND and or REQREPDROPDOWNI anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings on the first page of Preferences The first one requires that the Description drop-down be activated and the second one requires that the Instructions drown-down be activated.
Note that VJS will not require the users to actually select entries from the lists - but at the minimum they have to click in the drop-down pick list.
The Equifax / Metro export utility for accounts receivable reporting to credit bureaus has been updated and includes some additional required fields. It now additionally creates an XLS export file at the same time - beyond the previously created DBF and TXT export files.
[err12]
Version 3.665 01/12/2017 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds ~400 additional items.
The Rank column was not included in the PDF version of the customer purchase report in previous versions, but is there now starting with this update.
The Advanced Customer Analysis options of the customer report now include the option to select customers based on sales in lists of brands and lists of major codes - instead of just by ranges. See the related notes in Version 3.660 for more details
The customer analysis export of customer purchases by zip code now no longer includes the zero-purchases customers.
Version 3.660 01/05/2017 ===============================================================
The Itemized Sales Report and the Inventory Report screens have some significant new selection options:
Previously these reports have allowed you to select a *range* of major codes (e.g. 100-199) and a range of vendor codes (e.g. 001 to PAN) The new version still has these options but adds the ability to select a list of vendors or major class codes to include or exclude. For example you could select vendors ANA and PAN and CHA and END or you could run the reports for all vendors *Except* ANA, PAN, CHA, END. Similarly, you could run a report for just major codes 50 and 175 and 800 and 850 or you could run a report for all major codes *except* 50, 175,800 and 850. Note that currently not all sales and inventory reporting choices have this option - just "Itemized Sales Reports" and "Inventory Reports." Other reports could see the addition of these options if there is demand for that.
For example these options could allow you to run reports for just your charms vendors (or all *but* your charms vendors) or for reports for any major code containing pearls (or to exclude them.)
Note that on the Itemized Sales Report the list option is for Brands whereas on the Inventory Reports the list option is for Vendors. In most cases these refer to same thing - the supplier.
Note that in both cases, to access the option for the list of major codes selection criterion, you need to choose Full Selection at the top of the report screen.
When you start a sale of type "Special Order" when you land on the Sku number line, VJS defaults to highlighting the Add Inventory option because special orders generally expect you to order a new item which has to be added to the inventory file. In case you do special order sales, but don't use this Add Inventory approach, a new option in the Sales screen configuration pages of Preferences allows you to NOT default to adding inventory. Instead the sales screen will wait in the Sku number box as with Cash Sales.
A new option in the Sales screen configuration pages of Preferences allows you to remove the Quick Sale option from the sales screen. If you don't use that feature, this will tidy the screen up a bit.
The Sales Payment Spreadsheet can now optionally include ZZ sales, either exclusively or all together with other sales. Unlike the X & Z reports, which cannot do so, the Sales Payment Spreadsheet can retroactively report ZZ sales. Contact Compulink if you need details on this report option.
The XLS export from the Commission Report / Sales Report by Clerk will now always be put in the VJS Reports folder. In previous versions, it could have been sent to an alternative folder - the one you select for the customer export. This change simplifies things.
Version 3.655 12/17/2016 ===============================================================
The repair envelopes used to print the Home phone number first. Now the primary Mobile phone number prints first to match the customer profile screen, where the mobile number was moved into the "pole position" in a previous update.
When you choose to edit a customer profile via the X-Tra Search screen (via the sales screen) , after you've closed the customer profile screen, previous versions would immediately start with the new sale routine - i.e. it'll pop up the Sale number prompt and possibly any credit slip and wish list screens. Starting this version, VJS will return back to X-Tra Search without assuming a new sale. This can reduce unwanted popups if you often edit or view customer profiles this way without necessarily wanting to start a new sale.
When you use the Repairs Quick Status Update screen, a new option allows you to store a log of any location changes. If you apply a new location and check the Log Location Changes box, then movements among locations are added to the repair Notes pages.
While unusual, it's possible to apply a zero-dollar payment to a sale. In previous versions the reference attached to such a payment would not appear on the Payment Spreadsheet report, but starting this version it will. One possible reason you might add a $0 payment record is to add a more explicit pickup record for a repair or a special order that was pre-paid but not previously finalized. Also, if you use Cash Register codes, adding a $0 payment is a way to make a sale appear on the Payment Spreadsheet report when you run the report for *only* a particular cash register code.
You can now make the sales screen pop up an alert message based on the major code of the item being sold. On the Major Class code screen, on the Other tab, add to the Class Code Notes <<MSG: Message Here >>, including the angle-brackets, and the "Message Here" words will appear on screen when you sell items in this major code. You can use this to remind staff about certain requirements, information or promotions to inform customers of when selling items in that category. If this feature becomes popular this message area may be moved to a dedicated sales pop-up message instead of being in the Notes box.
As with major codes, you can make the sales screen pop up an alert based on the vendor of the item being sold. Use the same <<MSG: Message Here >> approach - adding this to the Notes area on the vendor profile screen.
The GMROI report has a subtle change in the calculation of the cost of sales figure. If it comes across an item with a zero cost in the sales records, previous versions would use the cost in the master inventory file. While there's a logic to that, it can make the report different from the itemized sales report.
[GMROIUSEINVCOSTIFZERO / z_saledesc2repair ]
Version 3.650 12/1/2016 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog program will now download and link over 1200 catalog images. Download and run the u_alexaninov2016b utility. Note the b at the end of the name and when it starts, be sure the title includes "With Pictures" Email Compulink to request more detailed instructions if needed.
The Sales Payment Spreadsheet report has a "Depositable" recap line at the bottom which, in previous versions, did not deduct the cash register Paid-Out total. Starting this version, the net Paid-Out amount will be deducted from that line of the summary.
The Cash Register Journal Report is a simplified listing of payment activity. What's new in this update is the option to select just Cash or just Checks or just credit cards or just credit slips. The default, as before, is to show all types of payment.
If you primarily use the Cayan Genius terminal for credit card processing, but you may want the option to sometimes have the on-screen pop-up processing screen to either swipe using a simple magnetic swipe reader or to type in a card number (in case the card cannot be chip-read or swiped.) A new option allows for this if you add a new payment method called: Cayan on the Payment types page of Preferences and check the box for magnetic swipe/chip. This way, when you select Visa or Amex, etc., the transaction will be passed to the Genius, but when you select the Cayan payment type the on-screen processing screen will appear which gives you the ability to swipe or type a card number. The pop-up processing screen defaults to swipe mode and allows you to switch to keyed (typed) mode but if you want the screen to start out in keyed mode, name that new payment method: Cayan Keyed
The Sales Screen will prevent applying a price that is lower than your discounting and security rules allow. Starting this version it will allow a lower price if the item is a return (has a negative quantity) This can help if certain returns are subject to a lower return value for credit, or if you use promotional "coupon" Sku's which are entered with a minus-one quantity and which you may want to be able to reduce in value if they are limited to the total of the sale.
Sales receipts can print an extra message at the end of the item description based on the major codes and the minor codes of the items sold. Because these messages can be quite long, by default they do not repeat if you sell multiple items with the same major code or with the same minor code. This version adds the option to force certain messages to repeat for each item even if the message was already printed by another item on the same receipt. To enable this, start the extra receipt message/description on the major or minor code maintenance screen with the word REPEAT - the word REPEAT will not print on the receipt, of course.
The inventory adjustment report simultaneously creates an Excel XLS list, but in previous versions, the Excel list included ALL the adjustments, not just the selection based on the report criteria. Starting with this update, the XLS list contents will be restricted by the report criteria.
A new utility can import spreadsheet files of vendor shipments of merchandise, even if the vendor is not one of the prepared catalogs in Shopkeeper (such as Pandora, Endless, Alex and Ani, Chamilia, etc.) Request details from Compulink on how to use this program module and how the spreadsheet file must be formatted.
When you send an email via the customer profile screen, a record of that email can be added to the customer notes - if you turn that option on in Preferences. However, in previous versions, if you sent an email to the customer's alternative email address, the record was not made, but starting this version it will be.
[u_imp_inv_csv]
Version 3.640 11/02/2016 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program includes the pricing changes that need to go into effect on November 3, 2016 both in the U.S. and in Canada. Around 100 items have changes to the wholesale cost, the retail price or both. The changes are a mix of reductions and increases
Note: If you *have* run the Pandora catalog in VJS version 3.635 (e.g. since October 26), then this update includes no additional styles. But if you have *not* run this Pandora catalog program within the past week then there will be many new items (I.e., see updates 3.365 and 3.615 and 3.600, etc., below.)
A previous update added the option to store .DOC, .DOCX, .XLS, .XLSX and .PDF files in addition to the more usual image files (such as .JPG) to inventory and repairs and customers and appraisals. In some cases in previous versions it wasn't possible to open those documents via Shopkeeper. Those files are now always viewable in VJS by double-clicking the place- holder PDF or DOC or XLS icon, or by right-clicking that place-holder and choosing View Image File.
The Inventory Status Notes search option is now available even to users logging in at a lower security level. In previous versions it was available only to users who could make changes in Inventory Status.
When receiving memo items, you should generally have a quantity of just 1 per Sku line because when you convert a memo item to invoiced/owned, you have to convert the entire quantity of that Sku. I.e. you can't convert just 1 out of 3 of a single Sku. Starting with this version, VJS will warn you if you attempt to enter 2 or more when receiving memo items in order to prevent problems down the road.
The customer report export file "Large CSV" can include the description of the last Sku purchased. Starting this version, double quotes (often used for inches) in that description are stripped out because they can interfere with other programs reading in a CSV file.
[ u_rpm_expenses ]
Version 3.635 10/26/2016 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds ~130 additional items including the Disney Iconic Bracelet Gift Set
Note: If you run this catalog update, you will still need to download and run a *further* download and update on or after November 2, 2016 because of the numerous price changes due to take effect November 3.
[moreblackline]
Version 3.630 10/10/2016 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with hundreds of the latest additions to their catalog - including items for Holiday 2016. The Canadian price feature has the option to allow you to accept the US wholesale cost multiplied by a value that you choose.
New features have been added to enable emailing month-end accounts receivable statements in bulk. From the month-end statements screen, choose Full Selection then check the Email One-by-One choice. This would require that you have previously configured your email credentials in Shopkeeper. See this FAQ topic for that: http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?email_configuration.htm
The previous accounts receivable statement "print one-by-one" choice has been renamed "Enable Separate PDF's" because the usual goal of this choice is to create a separate PDF statement file for each customer, rather than one large PDF encompassing all statements.
In previous versions, the largest value that could display for accounts receivable account balances on the Charge Account status screen was $999,999.99. Further, for balances over $10,000 there was not enough room to show the cents. Starting this version, the largest value is $9,999,999.99 and the cents will always show.
Note that both of the above statement choices produce an Excel XLS list of customer name, email and PDF details in case you or your computer tech want to set up your own custom method of sending statements in bulk.
From the Purchase Order tab of Inventory Entry, a new button, "Next P.O. No.", allows you to reset the purchase order numbering to your preferred sequence.
If you specifically choose for quantities in most screens to allow decimal places, then the physical inventory screen will allow now you to enter fractions for on-hand counts, which it didn't before.
In some previous versions, in the right-most column of the Return to Vendor Report, the cents portion of the return value was partially falling off the edge of the report. This is corrected in this update. Also - previous versions of the RTV report had the option to include returns of memo items, but that option was on the Full Selection page. Starting this version, that option is on the first, Quick Selection page.
The Return to Vendor Reports now have the additional option to sort by style number within brand and to have subtotals per brand name. The previous options to sort and group by invoice or by return ticket number, are still available.
In previous version, the security setting for the credit card reports was via the setting "Cash Register Reports." Starting this version, it will be via the security option "Credit Card Payments Report." to make things clearer.
In the screens where you specify the G/L Code (accounting expense code) breakdown of invoices payable or checks, when you start typing a G/L code, the drop list will continuously search and navigate the list to help you find the right G/L code. (in previous versions you could drop down and navigate the list, but it didn't do a continuous automatic search.)
In the screen where the security level and password is assigned to clerks, previous versions listed the clerks in the order they were originally added. Starting this version the list is sorted by name. Where the list of clerks is long, this will make it easier to manage.
The time cards reports will now print at the top of each page the date range selected for the report.
When you start to make a sale, the next-sale-number-counter is incremented. But sometimes you may start to record a new sale, but then cancel out of it, or you may record a layaway then later cancel it. If the sale being canceled has a recent number, Shopkeeper will re-use that number for a new sale to avoid too many holes in the sales ticket sequence. However, some jewelers might prefer that sale numbers always march forward and don't want the unused numbers being used slightly out of sequence. This update adds that capability if you add the key word DONTRECYCLESALENO anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
When running a customer report and creating the large (more columns) export file and when you choose to calculate purchases, one of the columns in the export file is the Sku of the most recent item purchased. In previous versions only the current sales file was considered for this column; starting with this update, the archive file will be considered. Of course, this would make a difference only for customers who had not made a purchase in several years.
misc-log txt / sales / inv
Version 3.620 09/01/2016 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog program has five more styles that weren't in the early August update.
You can now paste a Cut-n-Paste type Windows Clipboard image into Shopkeeper. Using the Windows Snipping Tool (or any similar utility program) you can grab any part of any image from the computer display which copies the image to the Windows Clipboard. Then in Shopkeeper, right-click any No Image Saved box to paste into inventory, repairs, appraisals, etc.
For example, this can be used to grab an image from the "viewfinder" of any Webcam program or from any website. I.e. this gives you another way to use a Webcam in cases where the Webcam doesn't "play nice" with Shopkeeper with your computer's installation of Windows.
When you start VJS, it can ensure that your preferred screen capture program is always running and if you don't have a third-party program it can activate the Snipping Tool which is built-in to most installations of Windows. You can find this option in the Local Defaults p.3 in Preferences via the Maintenance Menu. See this help topic in the FAQ pages for more help: http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?adding_images_via_screen_captu.htm
The Picture Manager has a new button "Show in Windows Folder." which will open a Windows File Explorer window to the folder in which the original image file is stored and will select that image file. This makes it easy for you to drag the picture file to email or to Twitter or FaceBook or eBay, etc. In many cases, you access the Picture Manager screen by double- clicking an image in Shopkeeper, and from there choose "Picture Information" where you will see the "Show in Windows Folder" button. You can also access this option by right-clicking the image box within the Picture Manager.
The credit card report allows you to select a criterion to report just a single type of card. ( This also refers to any new payment type you might add such as Gold because new payment types are included in the credit card column of the payment spreadsheet report.) In previous versions, this selection of a single payment type worked only if the payment name were all capitals. Starting this version it will work even for card names including lower case letters - such as MasterCard.
The Repair Quick Update screen now allows you to assign a billing Sku No in the grid/list of jobs. (No drop list of Sku's is available in this grid so you'll need to know the valid billing Sku's.)
This version adds an improvement when searching for a Geller Blue Book task by the book's stock number. Previously it could be awkward landing on the right number when typing a number such as BB1017 when similar numbers exist such as BB10170 and BB10171, etc. and when they all had zero in stock.
Version 3.615 08/11/2016 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds ~250 additional items. This is beyond the 600 new items that were added on VJS update 3.600. Some of these additions are new items and some are a little older but were missing from previous downloadable catalogs.
On the Sales Tax page of Preferences is an option to retroactively change the sales tax on existing but open layaways in case you change the sales tax rates. Previously this option did not adjust changes to the tax cut off limits, but starting this version, it will do that.
If you choose to allow mixed case customer names and addresses, the customer screen may help fix some formatting, such as correcting "john" to "John" Previous versions would also format the country which was problematic when it "fixed" USA to Usa. This version resolves that issue and will recognize the abbreviated country names: US, USA, UK, UAE, PRC, with or without periods between letters.
Version 3.610 08/08/2016 ===============================================================
The newest David Geller / Jeweler Profit Repair Blue Book is now available to add to Jewelry Shopkeeper. This is a catalog of over 6,000 repair tasks with revised pricing which helps ensure you don't under price your services. To use this feature, you will need to request Jeweler Profit to send us the OK for the Blue Book Digital License.
http://www.jewelerprofit.com/contact_us.html
The Endless Jewelry Catalog program can register in Shopkeeper over 200 new inventory items for Summer 2016 along with their pictures. In addition, Endless has significantly changed the pricing of over 700 previous items - by over 20% in many cases. The Endless catalog program update in Shopkeeper can retroactively apply the new prices to your old inventory records. This includes both U.S. and Canadian prices.
The Chamilia Catalog program has been updated with the Season 4 2016 changes. This includes both U.S. and Canadian prices.
The daily backup from the VJS File Center now skips the backup of certain month-end files when the USB backup memory stick already has the same files. This will save a bit of time during most backups.
On the "Listing" page of Major Class Codes Maintenance, in some previous versions not all of the columns of information, such as the taxable status or category, etc was showing. That is resolved in this update.
In previous versions, after making a change to a pre-existing time card entry, exiting the time card screen was a bit awkward, with some unnecessary alert prompts. That has been improved in this update.
In all previous versions, if the preferred Windows printer driver for any print task was not found (or was renamed) the Print Options dialog box selects the overall default Windows printer. What's new in this version is that the Print Options screen will warn you that your preferred printer is not available.
Version 3.608 07/22/2016 ===============================================================
When using Add to Existing Sku numbers, you might want to print price tags for the list of items you added. In previous versions there were issues in printing price tags and the list of items if you'd simultaneously changed some of the prices or costs. That has been resolved in this update.
One previous version showed a (benign) error message at the end of the Cleanup. This is resolved in this update.
Version 3.606 07/15/2016 ===============================================================
The Commission Report / Sales by Salesperson report now creates an additional export XLS file with a summarized number of sales tickets per clerk per day. Beyond being a handy summary for yourself, the format can be used with the TraxSales company if you subscribe to their analysis services.
The Inventory Web Export is primarily summarized by style but it can include the most recent Sku number of each style. In previous versions, the Sku number included in the export files always used the number-only version of the Sku number. E.g. 125-12325 and not LSR-12325 if LSR were the mnemonic for major code 125. Starting this version, the export file will use whichever version is your usual default as per your selection in Preferences. In addition, the Web export file can now include a separate column for the 3-letter Mnemonic code - in case that's useful for your website formatting.
One page of the major class code maintenance screen has a grid listing of the major codes. In previous versions it wasn't intended that you could add new major codes via the grid, but it did let you. However, it let you use lower case letters for major code descriptions which is non-standard. Also, if you did add a major code via the grid, a dummy Sku number was not simultaneously generated. Starting this version, adding major codes via the listing / grid screen is ok and both of the above issues are addressed.
When you choose to delete the old physical inventory count list, Previous versions had an extra unnecessary (and possibly confusing) message indicating that the count file couldn't be opened. That unneeded prompt is removed in this update.
Under certain rare cases the Vendor X-Tra Search could take unusually long to open in previous versions. The cause was identified and resolved.
Version 3.600 06/30/2016 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds ~600 additional items for summer 2016. (You may need to request a new Maintenance Plan Code )
The Itemized Sales Report with picture option active was not previously completely suitable for the PDF output version as certain subtotals and totals were not formatted for the PDF file. It has been updated in this version.
On the Inventory Status screen, it's not very hard to add, blank stones detail record for items which don't need it. Normally you wouldn't notice them because your criteria would exclude blank entries. However, in case you run an entire stones report you'd see a few blank entries. In this update, when you run a cleanup with the condense option, any such blank records will be removed.
The repair report allows you to select based on a vendor/trade shop or a location. Previous versions allowed you to type in lower case criteria, even though that's not valid for this filter. This update makes sure that those criteria are typed in. upper-case only.
You can now print a price tag directly within the sales screen. This could be useful for cases where you are accepting a customer return or a trade-in and need to tag or retag the item. From within the Sku line of the sale, choose Options then Print Price Tag.
Running the Z report sometimes requires you to exit Shopkeeper back to the VJS File Center. Changes in this update will make that extra step much less frequent.
[AltGenius / EMV Timeout / TTwandFind]
Version 3.596 05/28/2016 ===============================================================
In any Date box (field) new shortcuts are available. Pressing the Letter B will fill in the beginning of the month and subsequent presses of B will fill in the beginning of the previous month. The Letter E will fill in the end of the month and subsequent presses of E will fill in the end of the subsequent month. (Not new, but as always, pressing T will fill in today's date.)
A previous update added the option for an on-screen pop-up when adding a new sale to alert you if the customer has available credit slips. This version adds a further Open-Credit-Slip alert any time you make a payment on a sale - even a layaway. This secondary alert is not a pop-up, just a small message near the payment amount box. This feature is turned on or off with the sale option within Preferences
Version 3.595 05/20/2016 ===============================================================
The Purchase Order Reports now allow you to filter the results of the report by the Cancel Date. This way, your report won't show $10,000's in outstanding orders that are effectively obsolete now. By default the report will omit orders that are beyond seven months after the cancel date. So, if your purchase order reports contain many outstanding obsolete orders, you can assign them a cancel date to omit them from the report.
On a related matter, when you add a new purchase order, the Cancel Date will now default to a date three months in the future; you can, of course, change this cancel date.
This version adds changes needed to support the most recent program update for the RFID Wave wand reader from Trac Tech. [I.e. it detects WaveConnector.exe as well as the previous WandRFIDreader.exe]
[invckmouseenter-picrefresh / only1attach]
Version 3.590 05/12/2016 ===============================================================
If you add the comment "SMS Warning" in the notes or comments area of a customer's profile, then at a later date, if you were to attempt to send a text / SMS to that customer you would get a warning that the customer may not want to receive text messages. You would then be able to decide whether to continue sending the text or not - based on the circumstances. (See this FAQ topic for general notes on texting: http://goo.gl/ExSM22 )
A new option on the Customer page of Preferences allows you to require that customer type be filled in for each customer. ( For pre-existing customers, this requirement would kick in if/when you access a name on the customer maintenance screen. )
Another new option on the Customer page of Preferences allows you to require that the customer-specific clerk be filled in for each customer on the customer profile screens. ( This is separate from the option to require that a clerk be added to each sale.)
The Itemized Sales Report adds the option to sort and subtotal by Minor Class Code.
The Itemized Sales Report when sorted by Brand (which sorts by style within brand) previously did not show the full name of the associated vendor - it just showed the brand code. Starting this version the full name is included in each brand group's title.
Many drop-down pick-lists of items to choose from have been made taller so that you can see more options at first glance - without having to scroll down. This includes, (but certainly not limited to) the lists of sorting options in reports, the list of printers, etc.
The option to select inventory reports by size now has an additional option to select a *range* of sizes, not just a single size. In addition, if you select NONE for the size, you'll report all the inventory items that don't yet have a size. (see version 3.580 comments for more background on this option.)
[AmountCharged]
Version 3.580 04/30/2016 ===============================================================
The Size data field was a recent addition to the inventory records, but it was not previously available as a selection criterion for inventory or sales reports. Starting this version you can select a specific Size when run the (regular) inventory reports and the Itemized Sales Reports. Note that if you want several sizes which have the same beginning you can add an asterisk to the criterion. E.g. selecting Size 18* would select sizes 18 or 18" or 18.5 etc.
When you add sales or repairs, VJS prompts you to confirm the sale or job number and gives you the chance to change the number. Previous versions had 'secret' ways of suppressing these prompts if you wanted to prevent people from assigning out-of-sequence numbers. Starting this version, these are standard options in Preferences. The options to look for are "Skip the Prompt for the Sale Number" in Sales Defaults and "Skip the Prompt for the Repair Number" in Repair Defaults in Preferences.
A long-available option for sales receipts is to print (or not) the regular price or the discount next to discounted sales items. The regular price was always the higher value of the normal selling price or the MSRP (if it was filled in.) This update adds the option to print the regular price (or discount) on the receipts but to consider only your normal selling price, and not the MSRP. You'll find the option "Use the MSRP as Regular Price? (if present" on the Receipts Options page of Defaults.
Previous versions had a 'less detailed' option for the Quick Layaway report. However, such a layout doesn't exist so selecting that option showed an error message in the past. Starting with this update, that less detailed version will not show as a choice.
Version 3.571 04/20/2016 ===============================================================
When printing sales receipts for inventory items that have the loose stones details page filled in, previous versions used the word "Certificate" for the grading report. However, trade groups stress that the word "Report" is legally more suitable. This update includes this change.
When opening The Purchase Order Report, previous versions had the typo "Accounts Payable Report" in the title. That has been corrected in this update.
Version 3.57 04/11/2016 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with the latest additions to their catalog - including items for Mothers Day and Summer 2016.
In the sales screen locating a previous sale by typing a sale number would search in just the current sales file (past 2 to 3 years.) Starting this version it will search both the current sales file and the archive sales file.
In previous versions on the Clerk Maintenance screen, when you clicked Add a New Clerk, the new clerk record was initialized with XXX in the Clerk initials box and <Type Name Here> for the name and you were to replace both with right entries. However, this approach wasn't intuitive to everyone, so now, when adding a new clerk a pop up window appears on top with just the initials and name to focus on. This should be simpler and clearer.
The Inventory Search window has a Word Search option which allows you to search for text anywhere in the description or style. The change in this version is that there is now a keyboard shortcut of Alt-W to select the Word Search option (i.e. as well as being able to click Word Search with the mouse.) This will be welcome to keyboard fans and will speed things up if you use this option frequently.
The VJS FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions and Answers ) web page is available by choosing Options at the top of any menu.
The web export feature from the Inventory Reports by style summarizes multiple Sku's with the same style into just one line. The export file contains the Last Sku (most recent Sku) of that style for information, but there could be other Sku's. This update has a small change such that when you select a single location to include, the Last Sku will now be the last Sku of that style in that location, whereas before, it was the most recent Sku of that style regardless of the location.
The web export feature from the Inventory Reports by style has a new export field option: Desc_Notes. This is a combination of the first and second basic description lines *and* the Sku's notes from the Notes page. These are all together in one field but this is limited to 254 total letters. ( exporting the entirety of very long notes is still possible in the export, but those are in the export fields Detail1 through Detail30.)
The Itemized Sales Report has a "Sort by Month" option which summarizes the sales to one line per month. The formatting of this version of the sales report has been adjusted to work better when sending the report to a PDF file. (previously the retail column was not included in the PDF version.)
A relocated inventory report was previously using the cost-access security setting from JS-Classic which made it awkward to prevent access to printing the cost on that report. That is resolved in this update.
When running the Inventory Report or the Itemized Sales Report where you select just one vendor, a recent update included the change such that the Excel XLS output version of the file (in the VJS Reports folder) would include the vendor code in the file name. This was done to help those who run many vendor-specific reports and who may send them off to the vendors. This update includes a small change to help avoid errors in cases where the vendor code includes characters that are "illegal" in filenames.
[203/bkupinst/dblage]
Version 3.564 03/30/2016 ===============================================================
In Customer Reports & Labels there is a choice to select customers by any "keyword" you have typed in the customer notes. Previous versions allowed you to report customers *with* certain keywords, starting this version you can also *Exclude* based on certain key words
For a primer on selecting customers by keywords, see this FAQ page: http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/vjs/faq/?customer_type.htm
[ignoregeniusver]
Version 3.562 03/23/2016 ===============================================================
In previous versions Sales Receipt Layout #11, on the right-hand copy, the negative dollar figure next to each negative or zero dollar item did not show (though the total did factor them in, of course.) Starting this version, that value will print on the right copy (in red when using a color printer.)
Version 3.561 03/20/2016 ===============================================================
From the Customer X-Tra Search, when you choose to Add a New Customer, depending on the previous circumstances, Shopkeeper might, at times, assume you want to add a customer with the same name as the last-searched customer, so your choices were to Add that as the First Name or as the Last Name. In case neither is wanted, there is a specific "Add Blank Customer" button that you can click.
If you inadvertently choose to Add a New customer, then try to exit the customer screen, there are now no prompts warning you about the blank customer name.
VJS logs a limited amount of auditing of changes to inventory and other data files. However, since 'dummy' Sku's and repair Sku's can be used 100's or 1000's of times, the tracking of all the changes can take a fair amount of disk space. Given that adjustments to dummy Sku's is not very interesting (compared to adjusting diamond inventory_ a list of changes to dummy Sku's is no longer logged.
This change does not affect any reports or item history. All sales and repairs records will be in place just as before (as would be adjustments, returns to vendors, etc. - although those would be rare for dummy Sku's.)
On a related note, when the cleanup is run without the Condense option ( which is normally used just a couple or so times per year) a partial condensing step is done to save disk space.
[packmemo]
Version 3.560 03/16/2016 ===============================================================
When creating a new special order inventory record during a sale in previous version, the Location box pick list was not a managed look-up list. Now this location box is linked to the same inventory location lookup list as in other screens.
The credit card breakdown report now allocates enough room for totals over $1M which is helpful when running the report for a large number of months.
The improvement to Return to Vendor lookup added in 3.553 (see below) introduced a problem making it difficult to retrieve a previous return. This is resolved in this update.
The pop-up inventory search screen now includes both of the two main inventory description lines. However, under normal circumstances the description column isn't wide enough to show very long descriptions. If you have a wide enough monitor, you can widen the description column by dragging the separator line in the column heading. It will likely be necessary to also widen the entire Inventory Search screen by dragging the window edge or corner.
When you run an inventory report, an Excel XLS version of the report is simultaneously put in the VJS Reports folder. A minor change in this version is that the MSRP column has been added to the XLS output file.
When you change the Mnemonic on the Major Class Code Maintenance screen, any existing item will now be automatically updated To help tidy up any pre-existing inconsistencies from the Major Class Code Maintenance screen, you can choose options, "Update Mnemonics in Inventory List" which updates for *all* major class codes.
In the Customer X-Tra Search, the sales grid on the bottom left corner didn't previously have room to show all digits of a Layaway balance over $100,000 and starting this version it does have enough room for balances that large.
In some cases the "managed lookup" list file could get unnecessarily large which would slow down certain screens in Shopkeeper. Starting this version, the cleanup does an extra step to make sure this file is cleared of unnecessary records.
In the Inventory Entry screen, when selecting to retrieve a previous invoice via the drop-list of invoices, in certain situations, VJS would respond "Already been recorded so another can't be added" - even though you were trying to retrieve an old invoice, not add a new one. This is resolved in this update.
Version 3.554 02/29/2016 ===============================================================
The accounts payable cash requirements reports adds the option to show the details of all checks applied against each invoice.
[ftpupdatecorrchk]
Version 3.553 02/22/2016 ===============================================================
Adds a further adjustment to the Not-Applicable Style behavior. (see recent changes in 3.550m below) If you type a style as *only* the non-applicable style prefix, then even the previous major code is not applied to the new item.
In the Return to Vendor screen, if you do not type a return number but simply click the drop-arrow to see previous returns, they will be presented in order of the most recent returns at the top. This is contrast to being sorted alphabetically/numerically as in previous versions. This makes it easier to find the recent returns - even if you have numbered them completely out of sequence (e.g. if you used return numbers provided by the vendors.)
[zrptnoexcl, editglichk]
Version 3.552 02/19/2016 ===============================================================
In certain cases, previous versions of VJS would generally not allow a payable to be added if the invoice number were the same as another invoice from a different vendor. That has been resolved in this update.
When dragging and dropping pictures into VJS, the source picture is left alone as and just a copy is made in the Shopkeeper data folders. It's now possible for the original picture file to be deleted (in order to keep the "staging folder" clear. To enable this option the keyword DELETEDRAGGEDPICTURE anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings on the first page of Preferences (for all computers on the network) or in the Miscellaneous Options box on the Local Settings Cont. page (if you want this to affect just one computer.)
When viewing an item on the Inventory Status screen, if the item was originally entered via a purchase order, a new "Go" button by the P.O. number will allow you to pop up the corresponding purchase order entry screen.
Further, still in Inventory Status, you can right-click the Style box to see a list of purchase orders for that vendor so you can either add this style to an existing P.O. or you can add it to a new one. Note that the style number is added to the Windows clipboard, so that once in the purchase order entry screen you can press Ctrl-V to paste it into the style box.
[salenotesallbands]
Version 3.551 02/12/2016 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds 100 additional items for Valentines and Mothers Day 2016 and other early 2016 Disney items, etc.
Adds three 3-part receipt options for when printing sales quotes / wish list tickets.
Adds 3-part version of the credit slip / gift certificate for printing on letter size paper with 2 perforations. This helps if you already use that type of paper for all other receipts so you don't have to change paper.
[z_na_style->*;]
Version 3.550 02/11/2016 ===============================================================
The Endless jewelry catalog registration utility program has been updated with 117 new items and 200 new pictures [From the Main Menu, choose Options, Utilities, On Web Site, then download u_endlessfeb2016 ]
The Cash Register Journal Report has a new option to ignore the date and show only the un-Z'd payments so that the report matches the X-Report. This can help identify the outliers if new payments are added with a date *other* than today's date.
The Cash Register Journal Report previously had a column showing the sale subtotal without tax, but now that column is the sale total including tax. This makes it more intuitive since the next column over is the customer's payment amount - which would be tax-inclusive.
When receiving inventory with no style where you use style N/A (not applicable) previous versions would start the new item completely blank on purpose so that you could enter the new item information without erasing inherited details. starting this version, the major and minor code are inherited from a previous Sku. This saves some steps because if you receive an estate watch, you will likely want to assign it the same major code as a previous estate watch (but not the previous description, of course.) See Version 1.28 notes for more information on the N/A style.
When using the Trade-In option added to the Sales Screen (see Version 3.54 notes below) previous versions did not support the N/A (not applicable) style prefix so in previous versions, if you used a generic N/AWATCH or *WATCH style it would have copied the description and price etc from a previous Sku. Starting this version the Trade-In option (and Add-Inventory) from the Sales Screen will support the not applicable prefix. (See Version 1.28 notes below.)
The Accounts Payable Cash Requirements report now lets you select a from-and-to date range to be included for the Due Dates and for the Discount Date. In previous versions only a due date before, or a discount date after were available as selections.
Version 3.544 02/05/2016 ===============================================================
The Endless catalog registration utility program has been updated with the Valentines Twin Hearts Charm. [From the Main Menu, choose Options, Utilities, On Web Site, then download u_endlessjan2016 ]
Version 3.543 02/02/2016 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds six Iconic Bracelet Gift Sets. See 3.542 notes below for other Valentines 2016 items.
A new catalog registration utility has been added for MantraBand (Ask Compulink for details if interested.)
A new catalog registration utility has been added for Thortiuda (Ask Compulink for details if interested.)
In the Return Inventory to Vendor screen, in the list of items, in previous versions the delete line check box was not enabled but it is starting this version.
If you notice a large number of duplicate entries in the "managed lookup lists" (the drop down lists for various data entry boxes such as location, customer type, etc.) a new utility can remove the duplicates. (Ask Compulink for details if interested.)
Version 3.542 01/29/2016 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds the Valentines 2016 items and a large number of prior-release items that were not previously in the download. You may need to request a new Maintenance Plan Code if you don't have a recent one.
Even if you have already imported or typed new styles for Valentines 2016, about 150 picture files which were not previously available are now included and will be added.
Version 3.541 01/27/2016 ===============================================================
Fixes a Webcam problem that arose in version 3.540
Version 3.540 01/27/2016 ===============================================================
In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the bottom left corner grid shows previous sales and there's a column for the balance due on layaways, repairs and special orders. In previous versions the balance was shown rounded to the nearest dollar (to save space.) Starting this version, the entire balance including cents is shown.
From the Inventory Status Screen you can click the drop-down arrow by the Sku number box to pop up the Inventory Search screen. By default the Inventory Search screen does not show zero-quantity inventory items - but you can click a check box to make them appear. Starting this version, you can make this Inventory Search screen default to showing the zero-quantity items. (when called from Inventory Status screen.) You can change this setting on the Inventory Cont. page of Preferences.
In the Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks screen, previous versions would default the date to today's date. starting this version, you will be prompted to either type a date or accept today's date. This may help you better control which dates are assigned to those checks.
If you accept a resalable Trade-in item during a sale you will want to create a new inventory item with a Sku number. In previous versions you would choose the in-Sku-line Options button then select either New Inv Item or Add Special Order which pop-up an Add Inventory Item screen. Starting this version, when you click on that Options button there is a specific Add Trade-in Item choice. This pops-up the same screen as with those other items, but with several helpful differences: - The P.O. information is removed; - The quantity is removed and assumed to be zero (previously the quantity defaulted to 1 and you had to change it to zero) - When the item is added to the sales screen, a selling quantity of minus-one is automatically filled in. (because you're buying the item, not selling it.) - If you enter both a cost and a price, the cost is used as the "selling" price for this sale because you won't give full retail credit on trade-in - just the wholesale value.
When selling a Sku on the Sales Screen, the inventory picture can be shown in the bottom left corner of the screen. In previous versions you could click the image to access the Picture Manager where you could add a picture at the time of sale. Starting this version, you can add a picture at the time of sale by just dragging and dropping a picture file within the sales screen. (This can be helpful when creating a Sku on the fly for a trade-in item - as above.)
A new program module is available to help export in-house charge- account credit information to the national credit bureaus using the new Metro 2 reporting standards. (If interested, ask Compulink for more details on the availability and details of this program.)
The backup from the File Center may take some extra space on your USB memory sticks because where previous versions did *not* backup certain Month-end files, VJS now does.
In general, this will NOT cause extra backup time. . . . . .except that just the first time you backup to any particular memory stick that does not yet have these files, it will take an extra step just that onetime. It also might take some more space on the backup memory sticks, so if you have low-capacity memory sticks, you may need to use larger ones (e.g. 16GB or more.)
[bkmonthend \ invfptsz \ custxml \ highbal \ blackline \ geniusv5msg ]
Version 3.53 01/13/2016 ===============================================================
Some changes on the Physical Inventory Status screen. In many cases, clicking the checkbox to delete a line was unresponsive. Clicking the "X" header of the delete checkbox column means "Select All" - now you will be prompted to confirm that you want to select all items to delete.
The basic customer name and address and phone number report previously included the home and work phone number. Now it also includes the mobile number and the spouse's mobile number
A previous update improved the appraisal form by giving it a rust-colored decorative border. This version keeps this new version but adds back, as an option, the version with the black decorative border. See the list of options by expanding the list of layouts when at the Print Options screen.
When adding a new sale, VJS verifies that the sale number selected has not been used before. Previous versions did not check the archived file of sales (more than 2 or 3 years old) so it could let you use a sale number that was already used a number of years ago. Starting this version, even old sale numbers cannot be re-used.
[except-deleted2 invckdebugv2, custmrgelastcust]
Version 3.525 01/08/2016 ===============================================================
The Itemized Sales Report has the option to sort and organize by customer. This way, you can run a sales report for, say, a week or a month grouped by customer. The customer's full name and address and phone numbers and email are included and this sort version can be combined with the Show Pictures option. This report can be very helpful for reviewing sales and follow-up messages. The XLS copy of this report (put in the VJS Reports Folder) now also includes the email address.
The Sales Summary - Compare Two Date Ranges report now adds the option to restrict the report based on the sales Dept code (This is the optional 3-letter code at the top of sales that can be used for flagging different types of sales such as responding to adverts, out of state, bridal registry, etc.) By default the ZZ Dept code sales are excluded. This option has previously been available on the Itemized Sales Reports.
[invckdebug]
Version 3.52 12/30/2015 ===============================================================
The version of the appraisal form with a decorative border now has the border in a rust color.
The Customer Purchase Report now includes the email address below the address and phone numbers.
The Hot Seller Report has a new option to limit the results to only those items which you have received more than a certain quantity. This can be particularly useful when running reports for Pandora or Endless where you may have 1000's of styles registered in Shopkeeper but that you have never received. Selecting a Quantity of 1 or more received will prevent those "no-show" items appearing - even when you choose to see both items that have sold and those that have not sold.
In the Print Options dialog screen, the Selected Printer box has been widened and the font made smaller so that longer printer names can be seen fully. This can help ambiguity when you have long and similar printer names such as HP LaserJet 2300Series PCL 6 MFP and HP LaserJet 2300Series PCL 6 MFP (Copy 1) In previous versions you might only see a part of the name and not know for sure which one was selected
Version 3.511 12/22/2015 ===============================================================
The Loose Stones Report now allows you to select items based on the date they were received.
If you made use of the change in version 3.51 to default the customer search to Last Name or First Name, then when Customer X-Tra search opened up, it would not initially select the most recently used customer. This update resolves that issue.
If using a EMV/Chip-Enabled Genius terminal from Cayan, starting with this update, VJS will include the Terminal ID value that you enter in the Local Defaults Cont page of Preferences. Note that the regulations require that each of your computers should specify a different Terminal ID number - just digits - from 1 to 3 digits long.
In previous versions, the Discount Dollars column of the sales report and commission reports by clerk was not reduced in the case of split sales. Starting this version, the Discount Dollars figure on those reports will be divided in the case of split sales.
Version 3.51 12/18/2015 ===============================================================
In the Payment Amount box in the Sales screen, if you accidently swipe a credit card at that moment all the credit card data is fed as keyboard entries and the result can be problematic. Starting this version if an unusually high payment amount is entered, VJS stops and requests confirmation.
In certain search boxes if you type a name or word that is not found, then press the Backspace key to correct the word, previous versions would no longer do the drop-list lookup to help you find the item. In this version, pressing the Backspace after a misspelling will now continue the searching.
The Customer X-Tra Search screen defaults to "Automatic" search where it simultaneously searches by last name, first name, and spouse's name. This is often the most helpful, but if you find it helpful to specifically search just by the Last Name or just the First Name, you can change the search option. Starting with this version, if you change the sort option to Last Name or First Name, VJS will remember that preference for you. This preference can be separate for each computer.
The Credit Slip report now has the option to separately report the gift certificates and credit slips (from return sales.) This report is accessed via Options on the Credit Slip screen.
In the "Large" customer export file (with many columns) where you also include purchase information, previous versions didn't include the Spouse's Gender column and this update adds that in.
This update adds additional status checks for Genius terminals. [MWGXPING]
The Cayan / Merchant Warehouse report in previous versions would show Discover instead of MasterCard - this is resolved in this update.
Adds an additional option to prevent any change to the date in the sales screen (both the sale date at the top and the payment dates at the bottom.) To enable this add the keyword LOCKSALEDATE anywhere in Miscellaneous Settings in Preferences - and set a high security level for "Override Date Restrictions on Sales."
When processing credit cards, if the customer address screen has a foreign country the zip/post code is not sent to the credit card processor. (actually, the zip code 12345 is sent which is recommended for foreign addresses.)
Version 3.504 11/28/2015 ===============================================================
Includes a resolution for a problem that could occur in certain circumstances when processing a negative credit card charge.
Version 3.503 11/25/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog program adds the 2015 Limited Edition Snowflake Ornament.
The Cash Register Paid-Out / Received screen and Z-Report Date now employ the Working Date if it's set. (see version 3.500 notes below for information on Working Date.)
Version 3.502 11/24/2015 ===============================================================
The previous version caused the Wish-List/Quotes "receipts: to not print. This update resolves that.
The previous version could show an irrelevant disk error message when exiting VJS. This update resolves that.
In the previous version, if you didn't totally exit VJS in the evening, then the next day, Shopkeeper could default new sales to the previous day. This update prevents that. (Of course, it's still best to exit VJS before leaving.)
Version 3.500 11/20/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program adds a further 5 new items for including the Black Friday Wonderland charm and Heart of Mickey, etc. In addition, included in this update are 160 images that were not previously available for some of the August through October 2015 drops (and a few older ones.)
Further to the new Inactive option for vendors (See version 3.480 below) this version adds the option to print a report of *only* those vendors which are marked as inactive.
If you sometimes batch-enter sales or inventory at a later date, Shopkeeper will assume today's date for each entry and you have to be careful to re-date each entry to match the transaction date. Trying to change the computer's date can cause all kinds of problems ( with Windows in general, not particularly with Shopkeeper.) Starting with this version, you can set a "Working Date" in the Local Defaults Cont page of Preferences to, say, three days ago. This way when you enter a stack of sales VJS will assign the 3-day old date to each sale and all the corresponding payments. Note that every time you exit VJS the "Working Date" is set back to the actual date - it will *not* remember the Working Date from the previous VJS session.
When you create Web Export files of inventory items, you have the option of copying the related image files to a "staging" folder so you can upload them to the website. Previously this copy would copy all the related picture files (i.e. some inventory items could have several pictures.) Starting this version, you can select all pictures or just the first (default) picture or just the first two pictures.
A recent update to VJS included a change such that declined credit card charge attempts can be reported. This update includes a change so that cash register reports in JS-Classic do not show an error message when encountering one of these decline entries.
Includes a fix for an erroneous message that could appear when doing a negative amount credit card charge.
Version 3.49 10/30/2015 ===============================================================
The addition of the Dept Code criteria to the Simple Layaway Report in version 3.480 (see below) had an unintended side-effect which was that sales without a Dept code would not show unless you typed ALL for the dept code to include. With this update, if you don't select anything in the Dept Code criterion then all sales will show. Note that if you specifically want to show *just* the layaways *without* a Dept code, type three dashes (---) for the dept code. Or, if you type three dashes and choose Exclude then the sales with no Dept Code will be excluded.
The customer reports / labels export feature includes an additional format "Large - Tab Delimited" which may be preferred by some mailing houses - especially if there are certain characters in the report which can "confuse" the CSV file format.
If, in Preferences, you choose the option to show the cost in code on the Inventory Status screen, you can make the inventory status screen show the value in numbers by double-clicking the cost box. So far, that is not new; what is new is that in previous versions, if you then wanted to edit the cost, you had to lock then unlock the screen's padlock. Starting this version, if the padlock were already unlocked then you won't have to lock and then unlock in order to change the cost. This applies to the Replacement Cost as well. Of course, users who don't have security clearance to the cost cannot use this option.
[minor1000]
Version 3.485 10/30/2015 ===============================================================
This version includes a changed needed in VJS to handle a change in the Cayan / Merchant Warehouse mainframe for jewelers using the "MWSECURE4" processing option with the simple magnetic card readers. (Without this update, the Cayan processing screen has been recently taking up to 40 seconds before it will accept the card swipe or the keyed card number.)
The Pandora catalog program adds a further 51 new items for Holiday 2015 including some sets. Only three previous items have new retail prices but there are several Cost updates to prior items.
The new picture files are not yet included. You can import the catalog changes now in order to log in new shipments and a subsequent update will add the pictures
Each Major code can be assigned an extra sales receipt message to print with the sold items. For example watch major codes might have an extra message indicating "1 year in-store warrantee."
This update adds optional extra sales receipt messages for Minor Class codes. E.g. certain minor codes for treated stones might require an additional disclaimer on the receipt.
The Price Tag Designer previously had the option to print the details from the loose stones detail page, but not from the grid-like Extended details page. Starting this version, the details from first two center stones and the first two side stones are available to Tag Designer. Since the palette is limited in length, to access these details you'll need to choose Modify Palette and deselect some tag fields in order to then select these addition stones details fields
Version 3.480 10/26/2015 ===============================================================
You can now mark Vendors as Inactive. This is done on the Other Addresses and Notes page of Vendor Maintenance. Most lookup lists will not show Inactive vendors.
Marking vendors as inactive has no effect on any inventory or payable or QB transfer. It simply removes them from certain vendor lookup lists so that they are less cluttered with essentially obsolete vendors.
Since the X-Tra Search screen will not show the inactive vendors, the only way to retrieve such a vendor's profile is using the Search box at the top right of the Vendor Maintenance screen.
Credit slips can now have up to 16 digits for the number. This is useful in case you obtain gift cards that are pre-assigned long, credit-card style numbers.
Running customer reports based on purchase histories can be slower than other reports as the buying histories and customer files are reviewed. If your computer/network is particularly slow, a new option can help speed this report if you are considering sales only within the past 2 or 3 years. The option does this by not looking in the Archives sales file. Choose Full Selection and set the Recalculate option to Yes - Current Sales File Only. Note: The current sales file typically contains the past 2 full prior calendar years plus the current calendar year. (of course, if your computer/network is very slow, you'd also want to have it improved.)
The Inventory Web Export can now include the Weight field. This is done via the Inventory by Style Report screen where you choose Web Export. To add this field to the export, also check the Config Export option. If a style has multiple Sku's, this weight field is not summed - it's the weight of one item.
When receiving inventory, the Size data field/box is now available directly on the inventory entry screen in the Inv. Details box at the bottom of the screen. I.e., you no longer have to click on the Extended Details button to pop up the full Inventory Status screen to access this field.
The Simple Layaway Report now lets you select results based on the sales Dept code; i.e. you can include or exclude sales with certain sales Departments codes. (Which is not related to the inventory major code/category.)
Choosing the "Delete" option at the top of the Inventory Status screen could in some cases generate an error message. (This was for certain cases where and old inventory list or a charm list was converted and imported into Shopkeeper.) That has been resolved in this update.
[repairupdateprivatedata/notsuccessfailed]
Version 3.470 10/02/2015 ===============================================================
The OpenEdge/XCharge/Accelerated payments credit card processing features have been updated for EMV/Chip credit cards. Chip-card receipts include more transaction codes - this is a en EMV requirement. Email Compulink if you need the details on this development.
You can now add images to the Appraisal Screen by drag-n-drop even when the appraisal is tied to a specific inventory Sku. (In previous versions drag-n-drop of pictures was possible for non-stocked items such as customers' own items, but appraisal images for in-stock Sku's had to be added via the inventory screen.)
The Appraisal Screen's "New" button at the top is now active. (in previous versions you could choose to add an appraisal only via the Xtra-Search screen.)
A new utility program is available to update the Endless line of charms and bracelets. In addition to being able to revise the prices of your existing inventory (due to price increases) the new program will add over 400 new items for Fall and Holiday 2015.
The Inventory Reports by Style and the Inventory Web Export now let you select items based on the Web Status code and based on the Web Category code. (These codes are added via the "Style Det." page of Inventory Status.) In the report screen, if you don't remember all the codes, you can view a list of possible codes by right-clicking the selection criteria box. If you want to select only items with *no* web code, type --- (three dashes.)
You might use Web Status codes or Web Category Codes as a way of including or excluding items from your web export - because you may not want to send all of your inventory to the website. Or the status code may be a 'flag' on the website to indicate something 'special' about the item such as 'Call to Verify Stock', or 'Extra Shipping Time Needed', etc. ( Your web person would have to display the appropriate words based on the code on each item.)
The Inventory Web Export in prior version had the option to include in the export file the Web Status and the Web Category but previously only the short, 5-character, version was included. Now, you can choose to include in the export file the short code version or the longer description of the Web Status and Web Category, or both.
When you select the "Lower" or "Least" On-Screen Graphics setting in Shopkeeper, a large number of "data selection" lists will now be black text on a white background instead of the usual coloring.
When you add unbilled repairs (i.e. repairs added not via the sales screen and which start out not linked to a sales ticket) the next repair number is suggested which you can accept or change. A new option allows you to *not* have a suggested number appear. This would be useful if you have pre-printed repair tickets that you may not use in strict sequential order and so you may not want to erase the suggested number before typing your own one. To activate this option add the keyword NOAUTOJOBNO anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
Choose Full Selection on the Checkbook Reports screen to access the new "Summary" option which results in reports showing just the subtotals and totals for shorter versions of the reports. The layout varies depending on the sort option selected.
Version 3.461 08/28/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program adds a further 58 new items mostly Pandora Rose (tm) items but also some Disney Charms and some Limited Edition Bangles and Holiday 2015 items.
[skipxreport] Version 3.460 08/27/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog program adds the Olaf Disney Charm.
On the Repair and Custom job tracking screen the second page is for extended notes and this is accessed by clicking on the "Notes" tab at the bottom. Starting in this version this "Notes" tab at the bottom will include an asterisk ("Notes *") if there are actually notes to be seen. I.e. by having this indicator you can know when to check that page for extra information and when you don't have to bother.
On the Inventory Entry screen and on the Payables Entry screen, there is a new button "Checks Paid" which shows the list of checks paid against the selected payable.
The Cash Requirements (accounts payable) report now includes the Notes/Description of the invoice. This may help with payment scheduling information, etc.
The Return to Vendor screen would not previously save or print a return ticket if it had no items. It is now possible to add a ticket (with a description) and print it without having any items. E.g. you may want a return ticket even without previously having had an official sku number in stock.
One version of the Cash Register Payment Spreadsheet previously had some stray square brackets ] in the total line; these are removed in this update.
[u_findpx]
Version 3.450 08/20/2015 ===============================================================
Some pictures from the August Pandora Collection were not previously linked to the new items in the inventory list To get those pictures linked, In the Pandora for VJS utility run the Start Updating option on the first page. There is no need to run the Add Catalog items if you've already done that in the last week.
A late addition, the Disney Olaf charm data has not been received yet - but it should be available soon.
In Preferences you can specify that certain customer types will cause a pop-up alert when retrieving customers. In this update, the alert box will also show you the customer comments and extended notes which can provide you with more information about what special case you're being alerted to.
When you select the PDF version of reports, the same file name is used every time so that you don't end up with 1000's of different files. E.g. Inventory-Report.pdf. Starting this version, if you select a single vendor for the report, a vendor-specific file is created - e.g. Inventory-Report-ABC.pdf. This applies to inventory reports, itemized sales reports, checkbook reports and accounts payables reports. The Excel XLS files that these reports create will also have a vendor-specific name. This can help when you have to send data to several vendors of just their product. (Reminder - the XLS files are put in the VJS Reports folder which is on the Windows Desktop and the PDF files [if selected] are put in the PDF folder which is inside the VJS Reports folder.)
When you prepare checks using the Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks screen, you can now select a check number of up to nine digits compared to 8 digits maximum in previous versions.
The Itemized Sales Report format for the combination of sorted by location and summarized is now compatible with the PDF output option. The various layouts of Itemized Sales Report have been updated with enough room to show total costs at the end of the report above ten million. (e.g. this is useful if you run the report for many years.)
Version 3.442 08/10/2015 ===============================================================
The Alex and Ani catalog import program has been updated with the latest August 2015 additions to their catalog. It also includes Canadian pricing for styles sold in Canada.
The format of the Payment Spreadsheet report has been adjusted to have a smaller bottom margin so it may take fewer pages for busy days or for reports covering more than one day.
Version 3.441 08/04/2015 ===============================================================
Some copies of Version 3.440 yesterday would cause the Sales Screen to minimize to the Windows Task bar, requiring an extra click to make it appear. This update resolves that problem.
Yesterday's Version 3.440 contained various Pandora additions and price changes (see 3.440 information below for details)
However, 46 more price changes were needed and which are included in this update. To get the price changes choose the "Start Updating" button on the first page of the Pandora Catalog program in order to reprice your inventory (and fix some descriptions.)
[ftptimeout45]
Version 3.44 08/03/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has two types of important update.
*) The retail prices of about 220 *previous* items have been retroactively changed effective Monday August 3, 2015. These are mostly increases of $5 to $10. The catalog program will change them for you but if you need a list of specific items and your Pandora rep hasn't provided it, you can view the list of changes via the Compulink website:
http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/misc/pandora-aug-2015-reprice-list.pdf http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/help/misc/pandora-aug-2015-reprice-announcement.pdf
*) Note that you have to choose the "Start Updating" button on the first page of the Pandora Catalog program in order to reprice your inventory (and fix some descriptions.)
*) The catalog program includes 100's of *new* items for Autumn and Holiday 2015 which will ship in August and October 2015 (but orders for these 'Drop 5' and 'Drop 6' can be placed with Pandora starting now.) This requires using the "Start Importing" button on the Add Catalog Items page of the Pandora Catalog program.
* If you have not already updated the Pandora catalog since July 1, 2015 you may need to request your updated maintenance plan code from Compulink - - -
A sale number change loophole has been found and closed. In previous versions it was found that retrieving an old quote sale, then making a change to it, then exiting by pressing the red [X] button then choosing the Delete option would reset the sale number sequence. (in order to recycle the number.) Starting this version, this combination will not reset the sale numbers if the change in number is more than 25. This is the same procedure that was in effect for when the Delete button (at the top of the sales screen) is used.
When running month-end Accounts Receivable statements and choosing the option to create PDF files (instead of printing to paper) some layouts did not print the account balance at the bottom. This has been addressed in this update.
Also on statements, some versions have the words "Due Date" at the bottom. Starting this version these words are removed if you haven't actually specified a due date. (where previously "Due Date" would print but there would be a blank by it.)
Some parts (The Description parts) of the side-by-side repair ticket layouts were not included in previous versions when creating the PDF version and this has been addressed in this update. In addition, since making a PDF version is primarily for emailing a copy to customers, a new full page (one per page) repair ticket layout has been added in this version. (emailing side-by-side duplicates is a bit odd.)
You can retroactively change the vendor code or invoice number of a vendor payable (vendor invoice) by clicking the padlock next to the vendor code or invoice number in the Inventory Entry screen. In some cases in previous versions this change could take a fair amount of time and this has been optimized and sped up in this update.
A further change in this area is that a loophole that could let you try to merge two vendor invoices together has been closed; trying to merge two inventory invoices would have been a problem.
The Itemized sales report has previously had a version which included only sold items that still have a quantity in stock. This version actually showed only items that specifically had just one (1) received and ignored any repair/service items [because it's a type of audit report] This update keeps that version and adds a similar version which includes any item with a quantity in stock.
The Itemized Sales reports with the Quantity Left option now can be combined with the Show Picture option. [The picture option still doesn't apply to *all* versions of the sales reports.]
In rare instances, when repair jobs entered unbilled (without a sales ticket) weren't saved, they may have remained in the 'scratch' pad where they could neither be retrieved nor removed. Starting this version, such jobs can be retrieved by typing the number in the repair screen and once retrieved they can be saved or deleted.
The TracTech P100 RFID tag printer layout screen has a fix such that any special font code entered before would not show in the designer when the layout was re-edited.
A minor change in the receive inventory from a purchase order makes the sequence easier when receiving a lower quantity than the quantity ordered. [previously you had to check the box on the left *before* selecting the quantity received - now you can select the quantity or check the box first or vice-versa.]
[salecomm/lcks/pmtck]
Version 3.43 07/14/2015 ===============================================================
A new program is now available to import the Alex and Ani Catalog including the style number, description, cost retail, UPC barcode number. The pictures are not currently available yet - probably later. You can also import the quantities if you request an Excel version of your invoice * ask Compulink for instructions and more details.
On the Major Class Codes maintenance screen the dollars and cents parts of the markup were available for editing in the Listing Page, but the cents were not in previous versions. (The cents were changeable only on the Pricing page) Starting this version the cents are also available on the listing page, which can make it easier to update the markup formulas for many major codes in succession.
In Return Inventory to Vendor, when you return an item that is *not* valued based on the weight, entering a weight to return in previous versions has not deducted that weight from inventory. This was by design because for non-weight valued items, the weight is often of a descriptive nature. However, starting this version if you enter a weight to return, it will deduct from the in-stock weight - but you'd have to manually select this weight to return because for non-weight-valued items the suggested return weight will be zero.
Previous versions would handle 30 different payment types and starting this version 100 payment types can be accommodated.
The appraisal screen now accommodates values up to $99,999,999.99 whereas previous versions were limited to $999,999.99
Version 3.42 06/26/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has been updated to include about a dozen new "Drop 4" items with Pets and Travel themes.
When searching by phone number in the Customer X-Tra Search screen the most common method is to type a 10-digit number without punctuation. It has also been possible to search for a 7-digit phone number if you add the dash in the middle. Starting with this update you can also search for a 7-digit number without typing the dash. This adds consistency between the 10-digit and 7-digit search method.
A new sales report layout groups all of the items by the customer so you can see the details of what each customer bought. Even if you don't apply commissions, this report is found in the Sales by Clerk - Commission Reports screen if you change the Sort option to "Customer" The clerk is shown next to each sale, but there is no subtotaling by clerk.
Vendors can now be assigned a sales commission rate which will override the clerk's standard rate (and even the major class code's special rate if one exists.) This is set on the Payment Terms screen of the vendor profile.
JS-Classic (DOS Shopkeeper) has a fix for a problem the commission area that could arise when retroactively adding items to prior sales.
Version 3.413 06/16/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora catalog import program adds the 791359CZN spacer.
In the Sku line of the sales screen you can click on the in-line Options button and select Discount to pop up the Discount calculator. That was present before but the changes in this version are a) that you can use the Ctrl-D keyboard short cut from the price box to pop up the Discount Calculator, b) In the discount calculator you can change or set the quantity of items. (previously the qty, if not 1, had to be set before invoking the Discount Calculator.)
Some users experienced a long delay when using the "Manager Override" feature from the sales screen. Some adjustments there appear to have eliminated those cases of slowness.
Some users experienced some screen "painting" issues recently. Some adjustments may help in those cases.
[single3411pr]
Version 3.411 06/11/2015 ===============================================================
What used to be identified as the Spouse's Work phone number box has been re-titled the Spouse's Mobile phone number. None of the information will change, this is just a recognition that this data field is much more likely to be used for a mobile phone than a work phone.
The PDF version of the inventory report with pictures didn't have the total cost value at the bottom in previous versions but that does appear starting with this version.
[dontpopdrawer]
Version 3.411 06/10/2015 ===============================================================
The Credit Slip / Gift Certificate Report now defaults to sorting by the customer last name (instead of by order entered.) It also now allows you to select which sort method will be used from: Last Name, Customer No., Credit Slip No., Date entered.
The % of Gross Profit column of the GMROI Report (sorted by Vendor) was misaligned in some previous versions and is adjusted in this update.
Version 3.41 06/09/2015 ===============================================================
There have been some layout changes on the Main Menu and File Center to streamline the titles and the background.
In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the default order of the columns has been adjusted so that less-used columns are further to the right making room for more useful columns. As before, you can resize X-Tra search and you can change the column widths if you want to hide or widen certain columns. If you want to set the columns back to the standard settings, right-click the mouse anywhere in the main customer grid.
When a phone number is typed in the Customer X-Tra Search screen VJS will now search the Spouse's Mobile phone number box in addition to simultaneously searching the other phone numbers. (home, work and primary mobile.)
When you modify items via the Relocate Inventory or the Deduct Inventory screen or Add to Existing Inventory screens, previous versions always dated the log file with the current date. Even though there was a date box, it was used only for searches and not applied to new "batches" of changes. Starting this version, you can set your own date (such as a prior date if needed) for new batches. This also applies to batches of inventory reductions and additions.
In previous versions, new customers were always assigned a number which was one higher than the largest customer number in your list even if that is beyond the sequence number you'd prefer to be at. Starting with this version the sequence can be set to a number lower than that (provided it's not used yet.)
Version 3.40 05/18/2015 =======================================================
When adding sales the Open Credit Slips listing screen or the open Wish List screen may appear and these screens now show additional notifications about the customer such as missing address, missing email address, outstanding repair jobs. [Future versions may well have options for these Notifications to appear even for when neither the Open Credit Slip nor Wish List screens show.]
Inventory items have a new Size field. This can be useful if you want to keep the size out of the Style so that reports summarized by Style ignore the size. Also, you may want this information to be included when you export your inventory to a web site. When you export, even though there is just one record per style, there is new SizeList field which contains a list of all the different sizes available. The Size can also be added to the price tag layouts. If you add it to the tags,k you may also want to use one of the Message fields on the tag to say "Size" or "Sz" and put it just before the actual Size field. The new Size field doesn't currently appear on any inventory report, but it could be made to appear if needed.
The Sales Summary Report: Compare Two Date Ranges has six sort/organize options. In previous versions, the last three listed (Vendor by Sales, Vendor by Profit, Vendor by Units) were not actually active, but starting this version they are.
The Return on Investment (GMROI) Reports were not compatible with the Save-to-PDF option in previous versions but starting with this update they are compatible with PDF output.
On the Time Card entry screen, when you type in initials previous versions would not update the box showing the full name. (That didn't affect the time cards, however.) Starting this version, the full name will be updated and shown when the initials are changed and this will avoid any confusion there.
A miscellaneous error message when editing and re-saving credit invoices from returned merchandise has been cleared up.
[invckcat3er]
Version 3.391 05/06/2015 ===============================================================
The Endless Jewelry import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has been updated. About 200 new items and images will be added. From the VJS Main Menu choose "Options", "Shopkeeper Utilities" From the utilities Toolbox select "On Web Site" and download u_endlessmay2015. Email a request for more detailed instructions if needed.
The update earlier today made the an Options button in the sales inactive (the one near the Save button in the Sku Line.) This update resolves that.
Previous Single-Computer versions of VJS could not use the "Manager Override" feature of the sales screen. (network versions always could use this feature) Starting with this update, Single-Computer VJS installations also have access.
[kltv10]
Version 3.390 05/06/2015 ===============================================================
The Itemized Sales Report now has a layout which includes a column for the quantity remaining in stock next to each item. Choose Full Selection, then set the choice Qty Left Report to "Yes"
This option used to appear but in previous versions, it would restrict the report to show *only * those sold skus that had one or more left in stock. This was a type of Audit report because if you stock only one of each Sku then any item you sell you would expect zero left in stock. This Audit version is still available if you choose "Yes (only Items w/Qty Left)
Categorizing a Wish List / Quote sale as Layaway or Special Order is "dangerous" because that makes it too easy to accidentally convert to an actual saved sale. They should be Cash Sale, because if you accidentally save as a sale, since there is no payment you'll be warned.
In this update, saving a ticket as a Wish/Quote will automatically make it a Cash Sale type to avoid that problem when retrieving it later.
In previous versions on the Appraisal screen, if you drag and drop an image immediately after typing some text (with the cursor still in the text box) the text could be removed. That undesireable loophole has been resolved in this version.
When the X-Tra Search: Customer form appears, the most recently accessed customer name is pre-selected in the search box. This is almost always useful. However, if you prefer that X-Tra Search starts with an empty search box, you can activate a new bypass option starting with this version by adding the keyword XSBLANKCUSTOMER anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
The Main Menu has some font changes to use the more current Segoe UI font. If the Main Menu choices don't look clear you may need to activate ClearType in Windows (Google: Activate ClearType Windows) If you have Windows XP, you may need to install all the Segoe UI fonts from Microsoft http://www.microsoft.com/typography/fonts/family.aspx?FID=331 The change on the Main Menu is a just a "shot over the bow" because other screens will likely follow. So do resolve it soon if the text on the Main Menu buttons is not crisp.
Under rare circumstances, the Sales Screen may have inccured some "shifting up" of screen elements making the form unclear. A change has been made in this version to solve that.
[menutextsegoe/triplelineicon]
Version 3.380 05/01/2015 ===============================================================
A new feature added is that when you add a new sale a a list will pop up showing all outstanding Wish List / Quote items for that customer. This can help save sales for wish list items that may have been forgotten. You can turn this feature off from the "Sales Cont." page of Preferences.
The feature to optionally *not* print the .00 cents part of prices is now active. You can activate this feature by choosing "More" on the Tag Designer / Layout screen or via the Inventory settings page in Preferences
The Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks screen previously would warn you if you were about to prepare a checks with a negative totals but it would allow you to override/allow it if you confirmed it. ( You may have your reasons e.g. when using a credit card as a bank account) However, previous versions of VJS would not continue the session unless at least one invoice had a positive payment. That limitation has been removed in this update.
[OrphanedSalesSkus]
Version 3.376 04/21/2015 ===============================================================
A (benign) error message during the backup procedure appeared in the previous version. This update resolves that problem.
Note that the backup routine now backs up a useful station-specific settings file (visualjs.ini) both from the workstation and from the server.
Version 3.375 04/20/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has been updated. The previous Spring update include about 60 Disney collection items, this update adds 25 additional Disney items.
Note that if you previously imported the Spring catalog last month you would have imported some of the Disney items and since then some costs have changed. In that case before importing the new items you'll also want to run the Start Updating step on the Update Existing Items page and *do check the Change Existing Costs option* (which is not normally pre-checked for you.)
The Inventory Snapshot Aging Summary report now has some additional measurements in the report footer. Average Cost of each item Average Retail of each item Unit-Weighted Overall average inventory age Cost-Weighted Overall average inventory age
The Alternative / Web Description area of inventory status now permits the description to be mixed upper and lower case even if you have chosen for the Regular inventory description (e.g. for tags) to always be upper-case
Version 3.370 04/03/2015 ===============================================================
This update fixes a formatting problem on the box for the Rep's name on the vendor profile screen.
On the Sales Screen, you can select the default sale type such as Cash Sale, Layaway, Special Order, Repair or House Charge. In previous versions, the default you selected applied to all computers on a network. Starting this version, you can select a different default sale type at each workstation. For example, your repair take-in computer could default to Repair type, while other computers default to Cash Sale.
When you delete a customer, VJS will require that you close the charge account (if it exists) first. This is to prevent orphaned charge accounts.
The invoice number column on the accounts payable cash requirements report has been widened to reduce the number of cases where the invoice number wraps.
When printing Layaway Statements, under very infrequent circumstances, the sales for some customers would appear twice. This has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.360 03/27/2015 ===============================================================
If you have network version of VJS, on the sign-in screen you can now select a different default clerk/ID at each computer. Previously there was one default that applied to all computers. As before, to select the default Clerk/ID, choose "More" on the Sign-in screen, highlight the desired default clerk and check the "Default to This Name" box in the lower half of the screen then choose "Save Changes."
Version 2.88 (see below) added the option to store .DOC, .XLS and .PDF files in addition to the more usual image files (such as .JPG) to inventory and repairs. This update makes the same option available for appraisal images ( was not only incompletely available before)
When entering new inventory or editing items from the Inventory Status screen, an alert will show for any item that has a blank inventory location code. (This warning will not appear if you have chosen, in Preferences, to not enter inventory locations.)
When the Customer Profile screen includes a Country, the U.S. phone number formatting will not be enforced. I.e. you could put an international phone number such as +52 4 784 571 The same change applies to the Vendor Profile screen.
When you print price tags it has been possible to change the price printed on the tag without changing the price in the inventory file (this is subject to security restrictions, of course.) Starting with this update, it is also possible to change the costcode that prints on the tag without affecting the inventory file cost. (this requires security level 10) Note that this option doesn't verify that you enter a valid cost code. I.e. you could even simply add extra letter codes to the normal cost code to indicate "something special" to the sales people.
From the Inventory Status Screen, you can access the Vendor Profile screen via the green "go" arrow by the vendor code. Previously this access method did not check security settings. Starting this version, access to the Vendor Profile screen from here checks the same security settings as needed to get to the vendor Profile screen via the Maintenance Menu.
When adding physical inventory counts with a wand RFID reader, duplicate reads of the same Sku are usually ignored and added to an error list. Starting this version, you can allow multiple reads of the same Sku by adding the keyword RFIDMULTIPLESOK anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
Misc: a stray "]" has been removed from the subtotal lines of the Payment Spreadsheet reports.
Version 3.350 03/11/2015 ===============================================================
The Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has been updated. There are two aspects to this: *) The Disney Collection with about 60 new items and images has been added. ( Merchandise shipments expected April 2015) *) The prior catalog update with about 300 new items for spring 2015 and Mothers Day 2015 contained some incorrect descriptions. So, if you imported that previously, you will want to run the "Update" step of the Pandora catalog program to correct the descriptions. (in addition to running the "Add Catalog Items" step for Disney)
See the Version 3.10 & 3.11 notes below on new options for automatically logging in quantities from a Pandora Excel invoice file.
Some computers need to use a "simplified interface" to webcams if they can't handle the "advanced interface". The usual way to use the simpler approach is to add the keyword ALTWEBCAM1 anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences. However, this affects all computers on a network. In this version, there is a new This-Computer-Only version of the Miscellaneous Options on the Local Defaults Cont. page of Preferences. If you add the ALTWEBCAM1 keyword on this page, the change will affect just this computer, and the other computers can continue to use the regular (advanced) interface for webcams.
When paying invoices payable, the current version will warn you, before the checks are generated, if any of them would result in a negative total.
When editing old, outstanding layaways, cancelling them and issuing a credit slip for the initial down-payment, previous versions would assign the initial date to the credit slip. The current version will assign today's date.
In update version 3.33 when the price or cost or MSRP on the Inventory Status screen is changed, VJS would check the inventory for similar items and prompt if all Sku's for that style should be updated. (see 3.33 notes below for more details.) However, if you changed the Price *and* the Cost *and* the MSRP, that would be 3 separate prompts. In this update, whichever answer you choose for the Price update will be assumed for the Cost and MSRP, to reduce the number of on-screen prompts. Further, if you *never* want to be prompted to possibly update all Sku's of the same style, you can add this key word anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences SKIPISSKUSTYLEUPDATEPROMPT
Version 3.34 included significant improvements in the Customer X-Tra Search screen (see 3.34 below) but had a flaw in that if you checked the box to see only those customers with an in-house accounts receivable account, it sometimes also showed customers without an in-house account. That has been resolved in this update.
[dropn/aprefix]
Version 3.343 03/01/2015 ===============================================================
Adjustment to the Merchant Warehouse reports by Date. In previous versions the last date of the date range you selected was not included. That problem is resolved now.
Version 3.342 02/26/2015 ===============================================================
The last update caused layaway receipts to incorrectly show a zero balance.
The updated customer search features introduced in Version 3.34 failed with names including apostrophes such as O'Brien. This update resolves that problem.
Version 3.34 02/23/2015 ===============================================================
The Customer X-Tra Search screen has been updated to greatly facilitate searching by customer names.
Previously, you could search by first name or last name or spouse's name, however, the search results were not altogether complete. For example, if you searched for DAVID, VJS would have probably found customers with last DAVID and DAVIDS and DAVIDSON but it wouldn't *also* show you customers whose first name was DAVID unless you specifically switched from Automatic Search to First Name Search, or if there were no customers with last name DAVID.
Similarly, if you searched for SMITH,JOAN, VJS would have shown you Joan Smith, but wouldn't show the customer record Bob Smith with Joan in the spouse's first name box.
Starting this version, all combinations of customer last name, first name, spouse's last name and spouse's first name will be searched and all matching results will be shown. In addition, the Last,first search method will work whether or not you put a space after the comma.
An additional 3-part repair ticket layout has been added. This one is for the Impact Specialties Repair Card, part number #LRC. It's heavy paper/thin card and offers the same three (differently sized) repair tickets as the other 3-part tickets. The difference here is that the entire sheet is letter-sized which makes it easier to load in printers. Because it's a little taller than the previous repair tickets, the top inch or two tears off. These stubs are printed on and so they can serve as mini-repair tickets. e.g. they can easily be stored in the wallets of customers.
A new optional feature will add to a customer's notes area a log of emails sent (the subject line, date and time) This can be turned on in the Customer page of Preferences.
A small adjustment to the "Require Customer Email" feature stops VJS from asking for the email address on a new customer before you have even filled in the customer name. Now it will wait until you actually continue to the sales screen before checking and warning about a blank email field. [see version 3.13 notes below for more details on that feature.]
Adjustment to image backup routine needed in case there is a space in the folder name. (data path)
Version 3.33 02/12/2015 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program for Maintenance Plan subscribers has been updated with about 300 new items for spring 2015 and Mothers Day 2015 including images. This is beyond the additions for Valentines 2015
See the Version 3.10 & 3.11 notes below on new options for automatically logging in a Pandora invoice from an Excel file
In X-Tra Search, the quantity column in the list of items doesn't normally appear, a) because there's not much room, b) because the quantity is overwhelmingly just 1. Starting this update if you widen the X-Tra Search screen sufficiently, then the Quantity column will now appear.
The inventory report has a new sort option "Major-Style" which has the primary sort and grouping by major class code and within each class code sort by vendor style number.
When you change the cost or MSRP of an item in the Inventory Status screen, starting in this update, VJS will check if you have other Sku's of the same style number (still in stock) and will ask you if you want to change the MSRP price and/or the Wholesale Cost of just this one Sku or all Sku's with the same style. This can help when you receive new prices from your suppliers or when you change prices due to gold-price fluctuations. [This is analogous with the selling price feature change in Version 3.325 below - but this change adds MSRP and Wholesale Cost.]
Version 3.325 02/07/2015 ===============================================================
Jewelers using the encrypted credit card reader for Merchant Warehouse (now called Cayan) credit card processing recently noticed that it was necessary to click the processing screen before the card could be swiped. Compulink assumes this was a change in the Cayan computer, but this VJS update adds an "auto-click" so you won't need to do that. Another minor change is that you can Maximize the Merchant Warehouse processing screen. This may be useful, if you ever need to key a credit card and some of the help bubbles (e.g. for Zip Code) are not fully visible. You can even make this screen automatically maximize, in case you decide it's "cleaner" to hide everything else on the monitor until the card is processed. This option is activated by adding the keyword MAXCCPROCESSING in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences
When you change the selling price of an item in the Inventory Status screen, starting in this update, VJS will check if you have other Sku's of the same style number (still in stock) and will ask you if you want to change the retail price of just this one Sku or all Sku's with the same style. This can help when you receive new prices from your suppliers or when you change prices due to gold-price fluctuations.
Certain 'bulk' inventory screens such as Return to Vendor Physical Inventory , Relocate, Deduct or Add to Inventory, could occasionally be extremely slow for some users. It was found that a "timing" issue would affect a small number of computers, probably if the computer and the network had a particular speed. This is expected to be resolved for all computers starting with this update.
Version 3.321 01/30/2015 ===============================================================
The optional Endless Jewelry Import program has been updated with a large number of new items including the Valentines 2015 items and gift sets - including images. [contact us for an updated Maintenance Plan Code and instructions.]
In the Time Card screen in older versions, a certain uncommon keyboard sequence would result in two copies of the timecard entry being saved. This is resolved in this update.
[trackroa][picomp]
Version 3.32 01/22/2015 ===============================================================
The option to print the A/R account balance on sales receipts (for customers with an in-house charge account) has long been available. In previous versions, printing the balance would prevent the customer phone numbers from printing. Now, the A/R balance and the phone numbers can both print on receipts.
A couple more reports were found that were not optimized in previous versions for the save-as-PDF output option. The Itemized Sales Report summarized by major code and the Return on Investment Report by Major Code. Those reports layout have been updated now.
The accounting P&L report previously did not show the gross sales figure lines - just the net sales. Starting this update, the Gross sales (merchandise and service) lines will appear.
From the Inventory Status screen, by the invoice number there is a green "drill down" arrow to bring up the payables/inventory entry screen for that invoice. If you have some items without an invoice [such as bead or charm inventory entered without a payable] in previous versions, clicking that arrow would *create* a payable which was awkward. Starting with this invoice, an alert message will appear instead in such a case.
The Add to Existing Sku Number screen and the Deduct from Inventory screen now require that a Reference be entered. Previous versions didn't require this, which would then make it difficult to re print a list. Further, having no reference in the items' adjustment activity log isn't desirable.
When you run the Itemized Sales Report, in addition to getting the report formatted for printing, an Excel XLS file of the results is created in the VJS Reports folder. That has always been the case; what's new in this update is that in addition to the Selling Price column there are the columns Retail (which is your ticketed selling price) and the MSRP (the optional suggested price of the manufacturer.) These additional fields can enable you to do further calculations in Excel involving discounting.
[assb/wt; ]
Version 3.31 01/09/2015 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with a large number of new items including the Valentines 2015 items and gift sets - including images.
[currently just 2 images are not yet available: USB792900, USB794018]
This is for Maintenance Plan subscribers and you'll need to email us to request an updated "Maintenance Plan Code."
See the Version 3.10 & 3.11 notes below on new options for logging in a Pandora invoice from an Excel file
--> It's unrelated to the Pandora update, but note that if you have not done a Shopkeeper update yet in 2015 then your first update in 2015 may take a couple of extra minutes - see the Version 3.30 notes below.
When you run a Cash Requirements report, an Excel XLS version of the results is put in the VJS Reports folder. What's new in this update is that two extra columns are included: Freight & Other Expense.
In previous versions, in the itemized inventory report by Sku number the Quantity Ordered and Quantity Received columns were not included in the send-to-PDF version of the report. That has been resolved in this update.
Version 3.301-2 01/07/2015 ===============================================================
Minor adjustments relating to the Data Structure update of version 3.30.
In the Physical Inventory Exception reports in previous versions certain columns were not completely compatible with the send-to-PDF option. That has been resolved in this update.
[Physical Inventory 'Force' utility updated to support Vendor selection in conjunction with Location selection.]
Version 3.30 01/05/2015 ===============================================================
* Note For All Users --------------------- Unlike most updates, this update will require a "Data Structure Update" which means that a backup will be requested first. For those running a network version of VJS, all computers will need to be out of VJS while the first computer runs this backup and Structure Update. After this first computer runs the update, all additional stations must also run the update. However, the additional stations*can* run the update while others are in VJS.
I.e. This update might require a few extra minutes compared to 'regular' updates. ------------
Adding pictures via webcams. This update has an update to the "engine" used for capturing images from webcams. This should be better for most computers. Unfortunately, there may be some computers which don't "get along" with the new webcam interface. ( Which ones is impossible to predict given the infinite combinations of Windows versions, Windows patches, installed software, installed hardware, installed drivers. etc.)
If your computer doesn't "like" the new webcam update, let us know. As a workaround you can revert to a simpler webcam engine by adding the word ALTWEBCAM1 anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
It's possible that you already reverted to the simpler webcam engine in the past. In that case, we suggest you see if the new webcam engine works for you now. To do that, *remove* any ALTWEBCAM word from the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
When locating customers in Customer X-Tra Search, there are several methods of searching for customers (phone, last name, first name, customer number, etc.) There are two search improvements in this update:
When searching by last name *and* first name you now would type SMITH,ZACH *without* typing a space after the comma. In Previous versions it was necessary to type the space after the comma which might not have been intuitive. This is useful when searching with common names such as Smith or Fernandez.
When searching by customer number a problem in the past has been that you might type a number such as 2125 and Shopkeeper would favor the phone number lookup and show you a customer with a 10-digit phone number starting with (212) 5 or a 7-digit phone number starting with 212-5 In this version, adding a period after the number, e.g. "2125." forces Shopkeeper to search by customer number.
Version 3.14 12/31/2014 ===============================================================
The security settings for the Customer Profile screen have been updated. In previous versions you could prevent access to the customer screen but if you granted access it was always for both lookup *and* making changes. Starting this version, you can set one security settings for lookup and a different (e.g. higher) required level in order to update the customer profile.
Some reports or tickets have both a full-sheet layout for letter-size paper and a 40-column layout for a roll-of-paper receipt printer. Sending a 40-column layout to a letter-size printer or vice-versa will cause an error 1298. Starting in this version most inappropriate combinations are detected before printing and a clearer warning is displayed rather than a semi-obscure error.
The "Hand-check" feature (writing a check *not* against an invoice payable) previously did not use the alternative "Remittance Address" which is available in the Vendor profile screen. This is resolved in this update.
The checkbook report now allows you to search / filter by a specific invoice number. This way you can more quickly identify when and with which check you paid a suppliers invoice. Choose Full Selection from the checkbook report screen to see this new option.
If an inventory item is deleted via the "Inventory Status" screen starting this version, the Sku will be blanked, but not 100% removed and an audit entry will be added to note when it was "deleted." This matches the behavior when you delete an item via the invoice entry screen.
[prtqt/dtinvrec1]
Version 3.133 12/24/2014 ===============================================================
On sales receipts payments are identified as "Cash", "Check" or "Charge." Starting this version, the word "Charge" is removed because when you add other payment types, such as Scrap Gold or PayPal, they may not be really "charge." Actual Charge payments will still look ok because they'll include the card type such as Visa.
A miscellaneous error situation has been resolved - one that occurred after trying to add a new gift certificate with a previously used number.
Version 3.132 12/19/2014 ===============================================================
When issuing a gift certificate, if you fail to enter the payment a warning message now appears. Further, a new security option in the Sales Security page of Preferences can allow you to disallow ignoring the payment (e.g. for donated or promotional gift certificates.)
You can add an extra sales receipt message based on the type of item sold - which is added via the major class codes screen. This feature has been available before but what's new in this update is that the message can be upper and lower-case where previous versions made it upper-case only, so now it can look better.
Version 3.131 12/16/2014 ===============================================================
To help with busier computer networks where other computers may momentarily lock some data files, VJS will now wait another couple of seconds before giving up. [The delay can also be customized with REPROCESSxx in Miscellaneous Options - ask for details if needed.]
Fixed miscellaneous error message when selecting amount different tag layouts.
The inventory adjustment report resulted in an error message in rare circumstances - which is resolved in this update.
Version 3.13 12/11/2014 ===============================================================
Email marketing is very important for many jewelers so a new option on the Customer page of Preferences allows you to show a warning whenever you pull up a customer whose email address is not recorded. You can choose option S to just Suggest that an email address be filled in, or you can choose option R to Require that an email address be filled in. Either way, if a customer declines to give you one, you can stop that prompt reoccurring for individual customers by entering an invalid email address such as "N/A" or "None" or "Decline."
From the Vendor X-Tra Search screen, a list of prior invoices shows at the bottom left corner. You can double-click a merchandise invoice to select and edit that invoice. With this update, this "drill down" feature also works for non-inventory payables.
Version 2.97 added the feature to print price tags based on the list of inventory additions made via the "Add to Existing Sku Numbers Screen." However, the feature could be used only before you saved the list, not later on. This update adds the ability to print the tags retroactively. Open the Add to Existing Sku Numbers Screen, type in the original Reference/Explanation and original Date and click on "Tags" at the top of the screen.
The Repair details screen has a Parts Used tab. Currently this doesn't allow *adding* parts but it does show the list of Sku's / parts that were added via JS-Classic. [a future update can be expected to allow adding parts.]
[CrSlip]
Version 3.122 12/03/2014 ===============================================================
Some previous versions would not let you manually modify or delete the list of image files associated with an inventory (or repair item). This has been resolved in this update.
From Inventory Status, double click the image zone to pop-up the Picture Manager. From there, click on "Picture Information" where you can directly edit the list of pictures linked to the current item.
From the Checkbook entry screen, the look-up list for the vendors had problems in the last update. That has been resolved. In addition, there are now more columns in the vendor list which may help you select the right vendor in cases of similar or same names (i.e. the phone and account number show now.)
The Customer Reports and Labels screen allows you to select customers based on purchases - which you can fine tune by date, major code, etc. A new criteria now available is the sale location. I.e. you can select only those customers who have purchased from location, say, CC.
In previous versions, the Credit Card Payments Report could show you multiple subtotals for one card type if you had entries with different cases - e.g. some with VISA and some with Visa. Starting this version the case will be ignored so such variations would be subtotaled together as the same card.
Version 3.121 11/29/2014 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with a small number of new items - some additional size 48 items plus a Holiday 2014 ornament, including images.
* Note that there is no pre-defined major code for the ornament so on the import page select a major code for "Pandora Other"
The Customer Reports and Labels screen has always had the option to create export files for use with mail-merge, mailing houses, email marketing.
"Constant Contact" is a commonly use email marketing tool and we found it had difficulty importing the Shopkeeper export file. In this update the format of the "Export List Small CSV" file has been adjusted so that it is more easily imported into Constant contact.
In addition it combines the first name and spouse's first name into a single field which can help with other mailings in addition to Constant Contact.
In addition (not for Constant Contact) the Salutation column in this export list now will include the spouse's last name if present, e.g. John Smith & Jackie Jones. This can help improve formatting other mailings performed with the Export file. The Carrier route was removed from this format too.
If you happen to need the old format - say your mail merge depends on the old layout - you can still access that by choosing the "Export List Small Orig."
[TracTechP100]
Version 3.12 11/14/2014 ===============================================================
In the Customer Mailings / Reports screen you can export the resulting customer list in a few ways. In this update the additional export option "Export List Small TAB" creates a "Tab Delimited" file called custlist.txt in the VJS Reports folder. This was added in case your mail house or email program (such as Constant Contact) has difficulties reading the other formats.
On the repair screen, the Cost box will not appear if the logged in person does not have access to view inventory costs. Starting this version, there is a separate security setting for the cost on the repair screen. This way, you can grant access to the repair cost box but disallow viewing the inventory cost. This option is on the "Other Security Settings" page in Preference.
In the sales screen, the "New" button at the top would simply clear the screen without any questions which could be awkward if it were clicked accidently after entering 10 Sku's. Starting this version it will ask what you want to do with the current sale if there is one on-screen already.
From the Vendor Maintenance screen, a list of payables shows on the "Buying History" page. In previous versions you could retrieve a particular payable by double-clicking it in the grid - but only for merchandise invoices. Starting this version you can also retrieve non-merchandise invoices this way.
On the Cut Checks for Accounts Payable, a running total appears at the bottom of the Selected Net Payment column. In previous versions if you resize this screen (e.g. to see more columns or more rows) this total would be hidden. That has been resolved in this update.
The program module which imports the Endless bead and bracelet catalog and imports the quantity on the Endless invoices has been updated to include the option for Canadian pricing. [This option is on the Misc page of the import program.]
[reporthist]
Version 3.11 10/29/2014 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated so that it will import new items for Fall / Holiday 2014 into Jewelry Shopkeeper, including images
* See Version 3.10 for information on the new option to read in the Pandora invoice Excel file. to update quantities in Shopkeeper by
* New option for Processing Pandora Invoices *
After you have updated the Pandora Catalog in VJS many jewelers received the inventory not via the Receive Invoice screen (which creates new Sku numbers even for re-orders), but via the screen "Add to Existing Sku Numbers." This is fast because you can scan the Pandora Barcodes.
A new feature can make it even faster by reading in the Pandora invoice file. Recently it has become possible to ask your rep for an Excel version of your invoice.
Save your Excel file to the computer, then from the Add to Existing Sku Numbers screen, add a Reference such as "Invoice 12345" and choose "Ok - Edit List" then click on Import a List, select "A List of Style Numbers"
If you don't yet have an Excel version of your invoice, but you have a Word (.DOCX) file, you can copy n paste the Shipped and Style columns from the grid in the Document to an Excel file (then your Style and Shipped will likely be in columns B & A rather than the expected E & C
A new option available on the Repairs page of Preferences allows you to require that the Insurance Value box of repairs be filled in.
A new security option on the Security Inventory page of Preferences allows you to limit the ability to delete inventory and repair pictures.
Version 3.10 10/27/2014 ===============================================================
Question boxes in VJS ask you a question such as "Add as Last Name or as First Name." If any of these got covered by another window or another program in previous versions, it could appear that Shopkeeper was locked as you couldn't see what it was waiting for. Starting in this update if such a question box were covered it would pop itself to the 'front' after 15 seconds so you'd be sure to see it.
When you choose "Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks" you can now select the vendor by name or by vendor code where in previous versions you could select only by vendor code.
In the sales screen, you can change the tax rate for the sale by choosing Options (at the top) Sales Tax Rates. A new option here in this version is the option "Mark All Items as Non-Taxable" Which un-checks the tax box on all items on a sale. This would only be worthwhile for a sale with many items.
The effect is roughly the same as changing the tax rate for the sale to %0, but it's a bit different in that a) you visually see the tax boxes next to each item unchecked, b) if there were a sale of, say, 20 items, but 1 should be taxable, you would want to mark all items non-taxable, but you could check one item as taxable.
Version 3.00 10/21/2014 ===============================================================
For jewelers who have the Accounting Module of Jewelry Shopkeeper, version 3 adds a number of important checkbook functions that were previously available in JS-Classic. On the Accounting Menu there is now the option "Checks, Deposits, GJ Entries." Unlike the previously available option "Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks" The new screen can create "hand-checks" 0 check entries that are *not* written against pre-recorded payables.
This same screen provides access to searching, editing deleting any checkbook or GJ entry and also printing checks.
The Reconcile Checkbook to Statement option is the tool used to verify bank statements against Shopkeeper records.
(These were previously in beta for a few weeks and are more officially released in version 3.)
* * * Endless Jewelry Charms and Bracelet Import * * *
A new program module enables you to import the new Endless Jewelry catalog of bracelets and charms. All the costs, retails, descriptions and images can be imported saving a lot of data-entry time.
In addition, this program can save you additional time by importing the invoices from Endless. This logs in the correct quantity of each item.
This is available for subscribers to the Maintenance Plan. Email Compulink for your access code and instructions.
The Pandora Catalog import program now has the option for the Canadian Dollar price-list.
The Sales Summary - Compare Two Date Ranges report has a number of sort options including grouping by vendor, sorting by name alphabetically or grouping by vendor sorting by vendor code, or sorting by the most to least sales or most to least units or most to least profit etc.
The sort selection is now indicated in the report title, unlike in previous versions. The change helps better understand which report version you're looking at.
For jewelers who use Merchant Warehouse integrated credit card processing at point of sale, VJS now sends just the last eight characters / digits of the sale number in case you ever have a nine-character sale number. This is because M.W. will not accept more than eight characters and a nine-digit number would cause processing problems.
Version 2.983 10/16/2014 ===============================================================
Many data entry fields in Shopkeeper have "Managed Lookup Lists" where you define the list of selections. Some of the selections can include long text such as for repair descriptions appraisal wording or messages for SMS texting. In previous versions, these text selections would be forced to be upper-case only if you have selected in Preferences that customer names be upper-case only. Starting this version the look-up text and messages can be mixed-case even if customers are upper-case only.
A program module to identify possible duplicate customer entries has been added to the utilities area.
Version 2.982 10/13/2014 ===============================================================
When typing a vendor code or major code and other criteria for reports, a list of options appears. In previous versions you had to type quite fast e.g. S-T-U quickly in succession. If you typed slowly then when you got to the T the list would jump to the T's (ditto the U) Starting this version, you don't have to type such selections quite as fast - now up to 2 seconds between keys. [if this change doesn't work for your typing style or you prefer a different inter-key delay limit, request instructions from Compulink]
When you search for a customer by phone number and Shopkeeper finds that customer via an Internet search, previous versions would fill in the State of the address in mixed case like Ny instead of NY This update resolves that, making it upper-case only.
The printed report from the Relocate Inventory screen didn't print the entire reference No./ ID in previous versions if the ID was long. This version will print the entire ID.
For clarity, the wording of the title of the printed Sales Payment Spreadsheet has been changed to 'Sales Payment Spreadsheet.' (previously it read 'Posting Report to Match X Report')
During inventory entry, in each line of the grid of all the items there is an 'Options' button. In previous versions you had to click the small drop-arrow to the right of the word 'Options' but starting this version you can click either the arrow or the word 'Options' which makes it easier.
When using a credit slip that is under the name of a different customer you have to type the slip number. It is intended that you press <Enter> or click the green 'Go' button to search and the OK button is to continue once you have found and selected a slip. Starting this version, you can use the OK button to both 'Go Search' and to select from the list. This can avoid the case where typing a number and clicking OK did nothing in previous versions.
Starting this version it is now possible to record a cash register "Paid Out" for $0. Of course, it's not a real paid out, but it's a way to enter short comments on the Cash Register Journal Reports and on the Sales Payment Spreadsheet
[emptyclerksale / editafterfindck / ckvencode / ckprintreset ]
Version 2.98 09/23/2014 ===============================================================
The Inventory Search screen is now customizable. You can change the height and width in order to view more rows of items and more columns of data fields. Further, you can move the columns by dragging the heading of each column. For example, you could move the More Description column next to the Description column.
The changes you make are remembered for the next time.
In addition, a new column, the location, is now viewable in the Inventory Search screen.
FYI, the Inventory Search screen is the one which appears when you click the "drop arrow" by the Sku number box on various screens including the Inventory Status screen and the sales screen. [or when you type an incomplete Sku number]
The repairs detail screen will now hide the job cost when security settings restrict viewing the inventory cost.
In previous versions, certain combinations of criteria for the customer special event report (e.g. selecting a specific event code and a month and a year) could bypass some customers. That has been resolved in this update.
[bkrec, chg ckno]
Version 2.973 09/05/2014 ===============================================================
In the Charge Account profile screen, you can choose for certain accounts to be skipped during month-end statement printing. In previous versions, deactivating statements for one customer could also stop the next customer in the list from having a statement printed. This has been resolved in this update ]
For multi-computer versions of Shopkeeper an new option can do more frequent checking for changes made by other computers. This is to ensure that each computer is seeing the most current data.
However, since this can slow down certain networks it is NOT the default setting. If you want to try this setting, add the keyword REFRESH0,-1 anywhere in miscellaneous Options in Preferences [that's a zero before the comma ]
[lockcommsale / refreshbuffers 1,-1]
Version 2.97 09/04/2014 ===============================================================
The Add to Existing Sku Numbers screen has a new option to Print tags for the list of items you just added. This is also possible from other similar screens such as Deduct from Inventory, Return to Vendor, etc, but the feature is most useful from the Add screen.
The printed Return to Vendors slip now includes the vendor's fax number.
The feature Add to Existing Sku numbers is sometimes used for low-value untagged items such as charms instead of the more official Inventory Entry screen. In previous versions, adding to the quantity of an existing Sku would update the cost of the Sku to the new Cost. Starting in this update, you have the choice to accept the new Cost (as before) or to average the cost based on the previous quantity, previous cost, and the new cost and quantity added. E.g. if you had 2 @ $100 and add 3 @ 125 the, cost could be averaged to $115.
It is now possible to select an alternative ID number for MMF brand cash drawers. The default and suggested ID is 1, but sometimes drawers are shipped set to 0 (zero) To change the ID, enter a single digit number in the box for Cash Drawer code on the Local Defaults of Preferences.
From the screen Add to Existing Sku Numbers, newly added is the option to import a text-file list of items by Part Number. (There are limited cases where you could use this. Ask Compulink for details if you think you have a use for it.)
Version 2.96 08/27/2014 ===============================================================
When running customer reports based on purchase history one of many selection options is by vendor. In previous versions if you selected a vendor code with one or two letters, the results would include all sales for vendor codes *beginning* with those letters. E.g. if you selected vendor "GO" the results would include purchases from vendor codes GO, GOL, GOX, etc. [This distinction was rarely an issue since most vendor codes are three-long.] Starting this version, only the exact match will be included in the results unless you specifically select a range of vendor codes such as GO to GOX. This can help you more accurately focus on a particular vendor in case you have vendor codes of less than three letters.
In some previous versions, clicking the red [X] (close) from the X-Tra Search from the Gift Certificate screen, the Appraisal screen and the Payment on Account screen would not close X-Tra search. Instead you had to hit the Escape key. That has been resolved in this version so the [X] to close works.
In the Gift Certificate screen, clicking the down-arrow by the "Slip No." box brings up a window where you can select from a list of "most recently used" slips. In previous versions clicking here would also pop up X-Tra Search, which was awkward. This has been resolved in this update.
In some previous versions, closing the Gift Certificate screen would simultaneously open the X-Tra Search screen which was awkward. This has been resolved in this update.
In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the email column has been moved from one of the right-most positions (which often would not be seen) further to the left. By default it's just a very narrow column so you won't see the entire address, but at the least, this way you will immediately notice any customer which doesn't yet have an email address entered. As before, you can resize X-Tra search and you can change the column widths if you want to hide or widen certain columns. In previous versions you could make columns narrow but not too narrow. Now you can even make some columns disappear (by setting them to a zero width)
If you want to set the columns back to the standard settings, right-click the main customer grid.
A new security option can prevent the display of the running total of the total value during physical inventory entry. The previously existing security option to prevent viewing the cost already limited viewing cost on the physical inventory screen. This new option also prevents showing the running total of the retail. I.e. even though staff are generally allowed to see the retail prices (!) you may not want the accumulated total to be so evident. You will find this new security option on the Inventory Security page of Preferences.
If you prefer that VJS screens be less colorful, you can choose Options, Screen Graphics from the Main Menu. Previously the Graphics selection you made was generally remembered except that the two simplest / most stripped-down options were not save-able. Starting this version the 'Fewer' and 'Least' options *can* be saved. In addition, there are some layout improvements when the 'Least' or 'Fewer' option is in effect.
The utility which forces the Shopkeeper inventory levels to match the physical inventory counts has been updated to have the option to also update the location codes to match the physical count location codes. In addition, starting this version, this utility will create a log of any quantity changes made. (This utility is one that is best not run in most case because it is more usual to correct physical inventory discrepancies individually)
[prodcarddetail]
Version 2.952 08/14/2014 ===============================================================
On the Time Card screen in previous versions, if you went to the List page and selected a date range, you couldn't exit the screen without going back to the Main Time card page and choosing Cancel. That requirement has been removed in this update.
An audit report for in-house accounts receivable accounts is now available in the Utilities area. [this corresponds to the chgbal utility in the older JS-Classic program.]
The Payment Spreadsheet Report now includes the customer account number for lines with accounts-receivable transactions.
Backups should be done daily to a rotating collection of USB memory sticks. However, if on rare occasions you need to make a quick backup to the local C: drive because you don't have a memory stick, some installations of Windows don't allow files to be put in the root folder of the C: drive so such a backup would fail. Starting this version, if you encounter that situation, VJS will put the backup in the folder "Backups" off the root of the drive instead of failing.
Choosing the Bank Account Set up screen in previous versions would store the wrong bank name for the sixth and seventh bank accounts. This has been resolved in this update.
[bktranpmupdt]
Version 2.951 08/08/2014 ===============================================================
The last update caused an unnecessary warning/error when retrieving a repair job by double-clicking the job number via the X-Tra Search screen. This update resolves that.
Improvements in the Clerks screen In previous versions, there were some awkwardness's such as the clerk name and profile not updating immediately when using the keyboard to search for a clerk. Also, the drop list of clerks had colors which made reading difficult. This update has improvements in those areas.
In previous versions, certain return memo credit invoices could not be retrieved on the Non-Inventory Invoices page of Inventory Entry. (quite possibly credits that were created via DOS Shopkeeper) This update makes that type of credit find-able.
Version 2.95 08/07/2014 ===============================================================
When you sell a repair-type Sku on the sales screen a button called "repair" shows on the right edge to allow access to the repair tracking details screen. Otherwise (for inventory-type Sku's) the "Appraisal" button appears. A new option in this version allows you to add a repair tracking screen even on an inventory-type of Sku. To access, this, click on the in-line "options" (not the Options button at the top) and choose Repair Details.
This may be useful if you are doing work on an item you are selling. Or, you may want a repair type of envelope for a layaway item.
During inventory entry you select your major code which you can select by number or by name or by clicking from a list. If you type a major code number such as 6, starting this version the major code number six is prioritized. In previous versions, if you had a major code whose description started with "6" would have been prioritized. This speeds up entry if you are familiar with your major code numbers.
During inventory entry, there is a new camera icon by the Save button. This makes it a bit quicker to access the screen to add pictures to the new item. You can click with the mouse but you can also tab past the 'Save' button to the camera button and press <Enter> if you prefer the Keyboard. After you have taken or viewed the pictures, the focus returns to the Save button in that line so that pressing <Enter> saves the new Sku line and prepares the next line. This can speed up entry of inventory.
During inventory entry just the essential data fields are requested initially in order to speed up the process. Other fields can be accessed via Extended Details or Inv Details at the bottom. The field "Alternative Part Number" may be used for the manufacturer's UPC barcode number (not style) and for pre-tagged items this is a common field. Starting this version it is possible for this field to be one of the first items available - immediately under the second description line. If you use it for the manufacturer's UPC code - you should read the UPC barcode instead of typing in the number. You can activate this option via the Inventory Defaults page of Preferences.
The sales entry grid and the inventory entry grid have a small button to save the *current line* and continue to the next line. In previous versions the buttons had the word "ok" and now they have the word "Save" to make their function clearer. (In the past, some users have clicked the "Save" button at the top of the inventory entry screen which means Save and exit the entire invoice, which would waste time if used after every item!)
Note that in the Inventory entry grid, the ok/Save button and options have now been moved to the right side of the line. a) this is closer to the last inventory field entered (either quantity or location) b) this leaves room for the Part Number (see above)
Time Card entry changes: After the first box where you select the initials, the next box is now the confirmation initials box after that, the focus goes to the Save button. In previous versions you would tab through the time and date boxes first.
If you open the Time Card screen, but wait a long time before actually saving a time card entry, the time the Time Card screen was opened could be saved with the time card resulting in a clock out time that is too early. Starting this version the time is updated after you confirm the initials.
On the Other Security Settings page of defaults, the box for the setting for Customize Menu Settings was previously a bit narrow making it hard to see the correct setting if were set to a two-digit number (e.g. 10 or 11)
TeamViewer Remote Assistance option is more easily accessible now from the Options button of the Main Menu and of the File Center.
When you make a memorized report the *Default* report for a certain report screen then that memorized combination is loaded automatically when you open that report screen again. In addition, the report screen opens first to the Full Selection page instead of teh Quick Selection page. However, in previous versions, even though the Full Selection page was selected, the Quick Selection button remained highlighed at the top. Starting this version, the correct button will be highlighted.
Version 2.941 07/30/2014 ===============================================================
The customer history reports now include the accounts receivable balance for customers with in in-house charge account.
When you open the Sales screen, most often the X-Tra Search screen appears on top to help you find customers and sales by name. For the cases where you want to find an existing sale by sale number, you need to close X-Tra Search and type or search by a number. Starting this version, when you close X-Tra Search when there is not already a sale retrieved, the cursor will land in the sale number box instead of the customer name box. This will make it quicker with fewer keystrokes or fewer mouse movements to search for the sale.
You can now reset the customer number sequence. Go to the customer page of Preferences and check the box to "Assign your own customer numbers" and Save. This option has been there before, but what is new is that when you add a customer and are prompted for the customer number to use there is an option to "Reset the ext Customer Number" and if you both select a number and check that box, you will reset the sequence for subsequent customers. Note that after you have reset the numbering you will probably want to turn off the "Assign your own customer numbers" option in Preferences.
Version 2.94 07/29/2014 ===============================================================
The feature Add to Existing Sku numbers is sometimes used for low-value untagged items such as charms instead of the more official Inventory Entry screen. In previous versions, adding to the quantity of an existing Sku would not change the date of the item. Starting in this update, you have the choice to leave the date as-is, to update the date to today or to average the date based on the previous quantity and previous date and the new date and quantity received.
When you retrieve an existing sale, by default it is locked and you have to unlock the padlock before you can make changes (except for a payment on an outstanding layout repair or special order.) When locked, you also couldn't scroll down the list of payments if you had more than five payments. Starting this version, you can scroll down the list of payments beyond five even with the padlock closed. (Though you still can't change payments when locked.)
When a part of a credit slip is used as payment on a sale, you are prompted if the balance should remain on the credit slip. The usual answer is Yes, so if you choose No, that is less common so starting this version a No answer will request reconfirmation to help avoid a keyboard/mouse mistake.
In previous versions, retrieving a pending special order sale by typing the sale number (e.g. not by clicking the sale on screen or searching by name, etc) would result in an unneeded warning about the sale being locked. This has been resolved in this update.
[bktran.#/fnd/tt20 ]
Version 2.933 07/24/2014 ===============================================================
The "Small" customer export file now adds the customer number column. This way the small export file could be used to send out for mailing list corrections and with the customer number column it then changes could be imported back into Jewelry Shopkeeper. (However, you should request more detailed instructions from Compulink before sending a list out for this purpose.)
From the Main Menu there is a "shortcut" method to access the Windows folders which contain your inventory and repair images. This might be useful if you want to copy or email some of the image files. From the Main Menu, choose "Options" then "Windows Features" then "Image Folders"
[bktran:duplicate,srch;invstexcl] Version 2.931-2 07/18/2014 ===============================================================
Miscellaneous
[bktranv2/ttv2/lgrid/nsave]
Version 2.93 07/16/2014 ===============================================================
When receiving new inventory you can click the button "Extended Details" in case you need to add notes or information beyond the basics and this pops up the Inventory Status screen. In previous versions the inventory status screen would start out in the display-only (locked) state and you would have to unlock the padlock in order to make changes. It's fairly clear that accessing the details screen during inventory receipt implies that you want to add details, so starting this version the Inventory Screen will start out unlocked if accessed via the Extended Details button of Receive Inventory.
The "Initial Date" saved with a sale was previously the actual date the sale was entered. Going forward it will be set to the first date used on the sale - which could be altered if one is entering sales from a few days back.
The security setting needed to change the "Initial Date" used to be fixed at level 10. Now it shares the same security setting as "Override Date Restrictions on Sales."
When running the Repairs Reports, you can restrict the report by selecting a certain Trade Shop name or a Job Location. In previous versions, you had to remember the exact word you used in order to get the right results. Starting in this update the report screen offers a drop list. I.e. this way you can see if you have RONNIE in the trade shop list instead of RONNY.
If the pop-up calendar with two months displayed is used, in previous versions certain dates (already typed in) could cause the calendar to not display the correct months. This has been addressed in this update. Note that the one month calendar is the default pop-up. If you want the calendar that shows two months at a time, add the keyword CALENDARV2 in Miscellaneous Options (in Preferences, from the Maintenance Menu.)
From the Receive Inventory screen the Delete icon at the top can be used to erase the entire invoice. Starting this version, when you choose that option, the warning is much clearer that the *Entire* invoice would be deleted. This can help avoid the entire invoice being deleted when someone wants to delete just one line.
Version 2.922 06/30/2014 ===============================================================
The additional Pandora images for the pre-autumn / CZ lines have been added to the Pandora Catalog Import program.
If multiple people are entering inventory at the same time and two people add a new item in the same major code at the same and then both pop up the extended details screen the timing was possible in older versions such that the detail screen for the other person's item could appear. That possibility has been prevented starting this version.
If a sale is started as a layaway sale or a cash sale and then converted to a charge account sale, in rare cases the sale would remain as the old sale type. That has been addressed starting in this update.
When making in-house charge account sales, you can now adjust the customer's payment plan without accessing the entire charge-account profile. At the top of the sales screen choose Options, More Options, Change Payment Plan.
[pmt/rc1]
Version 2.921 06/27/2014 ===============================================================
With the new option to transfer the sales screen description to the repair screen in different ways (see v. 2.82 below) certain combinations could cause the description to re-transfer when editing the repair. That could be awkward if you had subsequently modified the repair screen description. With this update, that description transfer feature will function only when first adding a repair ticket - not during updates as well.
When you are recording new inventory, the entry grid requests just the basics (style, class code, decryption cost, retail_ and if you need to access more details you can click the "extended details" button. By default that brings up the grid-style extended details page of "Inventory Status" or, for a loose stone, the stones details page. Now, if you prefer that the Notes (pre-appraisal) page appear first, you can add the key word EXTENDED2NOTES anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
Version 2.92 06/23/2014 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated so that it will import the new destination charms for June 2014 into Jewelry Shopkeeper. The destination images are also imported.
In addition, approximately 250 other new Pandora styles (Drop 4 and Drop 5 for 2014) are imported. These styles may not yet have shipped and the pictures for those forthcoming items are not imported yet but will be added later.
This will *not* need a new access code from Compulink. (There is no charge for the Pandora catalog import program if you have the Maintenance Plan.)
Version 2.911 06/19/2014 ===============================================================
The Excel XLS file created when doing the inventory export for websites previously did not include the retail price for items which were out of stock. In most cases jewelers don't choose to include such zero-quantity items but in some cases they are included - e.g. for items that you can easily special order for customer orders. In this update, those zero-quantity items will include the retail price in the export file.
When using the enter 'Existing Inventory' Screen, in case you ever add an invoice number (which is generally not the case), starting this version the invoice number is automatically entered as upper-case. This could help if one were to later do a search by invoice number.
Version 2.91 06/17/2014 ===============================================================
When adding new sales VJS can now automatically pop up a list of unused credit slips and gift certificates for that customer. This is before adding the Sku's because that might help the salesperson suggest an add-on sale if the customer knows they have more to spend. This is an option you can enable or disable via the Sales Screen defaults from Preferences.
The grid of time cards on the List page of the Time Card entry screen previously showed an error message when you chose to limit the date-range shown and this has been resolved in this update. [ The time card reports in previous versions were not affected.]
[Manager Override Adjustment.] [costrecolor-2] [gldist] [custhistemail]
Version 2.90 05/24/2014 ===============================================================
When you run reports, it's common to enter a range of vendors or major codes or expense codes, etc. In a great many cases you want a range of one - i.e. just one major code or one vendor code so when you fill in the first box with XXX the second box is filled in with XXX. But if you run the report again for a different vendor and you type CCC it wouldn't change the second box to CCC because CCC to XXX is a valid range. However, starting this version the assumption, when you run the report for a different range is that you want a range of one so the second box will always update to match the first. Of course if you really do want a range, you can update the second box. In case you prefer the previous behavior, you can re-enable that by adding the key word DONTSYNCHRANGE anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
In previous, the comment added to credit slips resulting from a customer return was "Refund From Sale" but from now on it will be "Credit From Sale."
[costrecolor] [cpic] [tagshapecolcc] [ccextratrack]
Version 2.89 05/07/2014 ===============================================================
The April Pandora catalog update for the NFL Dangles and Charms did not include the images files as of Update 2.87. This update includes the image files.
If you *have* already imported the NFL charms catalog you merely need to open the Pandora Catalog import program and the pictures will install. (no need to re-import)
If you have not previously imported the April 2014 NFL charms, import the new catalog with the usual instructions (ask for emailed instructions if needed.)
From the Add to Existing Sku number screen you can search by vendor style. However, in previous versions a style with zero quantity would not automatically show in in the pick-list. Starting this version, zero qty styles will show when searching by style. This is handy for Pandora when you first receive a specific style - because the quantity will be zero. [however, note that it's still easier to receive Pandora items by Part Number - where you scan the Pandora baggie barcode.]
In a small number of previous versions, when you retrieved a Wish List/ Quote sale, the X-Tra Search would not close (get out of the way). That is resolved in this update.
[invstyledups]
Version 2.88 04/30/2014 ===============================================================
The picture-storing options in VJS are principally designed for actual image files of type JPG, GIF, BMP and PNG. Starting this version, you can also store document files of type PDF, XLS (Excel) and DOC (MS Word) Note that VJS doesn't display these document types within VJS, but if you click (or double-click) the placeholder icon to get to the Picture Manager you can choose to open and view the file. They will open with the appropriate application if installed on your computer - e.g. Adobe Reader for PDF, Excel for XLS MS Word for .DOC. [however, you may install alternative programs such as PDF-Xchange, and OpenOffice]
This way, you can store PDF, XLS or DOC document files that relate to customers or appraisals or inventory files.
On the Sales Screen Cont. page of Preferences there is the option "Warn users if they change the sale number by more than" Previously this option wasn't available in VJS (it was for JS-Classic) but now it is active. This can prevent you from accidentally changing the sale number sequence by a large number - e.g. from 2500 to 25000.
If you send an SMS/Text message and the message is very short you will now see a warning/question asking if you intended such a short message. This can help you avoid accidentally sending messages that hadn't yet been correctly written.
If you haven't uses the SMS/Text message option, see Update 2.440 notes below for more details and ask Compulink for instructions if you want to try it out.
In the Adjustments list on the Activity page of Inventory Status previous versions didn't show the ID/Clerk initials of the person who made the adjustments. Starting this version the Login ID is shown by each adjustments.
[AltCurrBta]
Version 2.87 04/28/2014 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated so that it will import the new NFL charms for April 2014 into Jewelry Shopkeeper. Note that this is a pre-release update as the images are not yet available. You can run this import to help you check-in your merchandise into Shopkeeper. A follow-up update will add the image files.
This will *not* need a new access code from Compulink. (There is no charge for the Pandora catalog import program if you have the Maintenance Plan.)
A new customer analysis by zip code is available. When you a customer report and set the Type of Report to Zip/Post code *and* also select a Dates Sold range *and* also select an Export option, the resulting Excel file will be a summary list of zip codes with the number of customers and the total purchases per zip code - with the highest purchases zip codes at the top. This will help you quickly identify the top zip codes.
The detailed layaway reports has had the option to select results based on sales Dept code, but in previous versions the selection results weren't quite right. ( Some additional customer names were shown even no unnecessary sales were included.) This has been resolved in this update.
In VJS Preferences there has been a security setting "Access Finalized Sales" however, it applied only within JS-Classic. Starting this version, this setting can be used to prevent retrieving finalized sales onto the sales screen. However, some sales details will continue to be visible in the X-Tra Search screen.
The GMROI report now lets you select results based on the age of the inventory. Of course, almost by definition, the results from items that are old would have a slower turnover and a lower GMROI, but by specifically selecting the older items you can get a report that clarifies for you how badly the old items are worsening the GMROI.
Resolved a benign error message that would appear if a Sku were deleted via the Inventory Status screen.
Version 2.860- 2.861 04/18/2014 ===============================================================
The Time Card screen no longer shows Inactive clerks in the drop-list of clerks. [Clerks can be marked as Inactive from the clerk maintenance screen.]
By default, when you add a Time Card, the initials of login ID are pre-selected for Time Cards. In case you have several people who share a Login ID, a new option in Preferences allows you to NOT assume the login ID as the same for new time cards.
The Commissions / Sales Reports by Clerk now have the option to restrict sales to specific inventory location code.
Version 2.861: An adjustment was made to the upper/lower-case behavior for customer names for the case where you select names to be all upper-case.
Century Gothic Bold Italic is installed (if it's missing.)
The Main Menu instructions pop-up for when you drag menu items (to rearrange) has been made less sensitive for fewer unwanted pop-up messages. See 2.830 update notes for more information on moving menu items.
[remote assistance added to main menu, options]
Version 2.850 04/10/2014 ===============================================================
A new monthly summary report is available via the Itemized Sales Report screen. Change the Sort By option to "Month" and the report will show one line per month.
The Clerk Maintenance form has a page to show the sales for that clerk. In some previous versions the option to limit the sales by date did not work, and that has been addressed in this update.
When moving items from one invoice to another (usually from a memo to an actual invoice) you now have to option of also moving the freight charges. [As before, this is done by editing the memo, selecting the item, then choosing the Options button within that line, then selecting Move to Other Invoice.]
When adding customers, if you have the CapsLock key not set to your usual position, you might end up typing names in the wrong format like jOSEPH. Starting in this version those names will autocorrect to Joseph. (This does not apply if you have chosen upper-case only names in Preferences.)
When you run a Commission report, you can simultaneously create an Excel XLS file. The XLS file is not new, but starting this version the XLS file includes the sales Dept code column because that can help some jewelers in their analyses.
The new Loose Stones reports introduced in a recent update have been reformatted to allow more room in the size (mm) column. This reduced word-wrapping so that in most cases each stone will take one line instead of two in order to keep the report from being unnecessarily long.
One inventory report layout has been adjusted to make it compatible with PDF output (with pictures by Sku with 2nd description line.)
The 'Summary Tax' version of the Itemized Sales Report has been adjusted to make it compatible with PDF output.
In the Repairs screen in previous versions , the pink "zone" points did not all jump to the appropriate zone of the screen. This has been resolved in this update. [Press Alt- and the number of the pink dot, or press the Function-key on the keyboard - e.g. F4 for Completed Date.]
[email address repairs ]
Version 2.840 03/31/2014 ===============================================================
A report on Loose Stones / Diamonds details has been added in this version. This allows you to select by Material, Shape, Cut, Clarity, Color, Vendor, etc. This can help you better analyze your loose stones inventory and to search for matching stones. The report can also create a standard Excel export file of the results. Also, a special RapNet formatted Excel export is available. This includes extra columns that aren't in Shopkeeper, but this file format can be used to upload your inventory to RapNet.
The Accounts Payable / Cash Requirements Report now simultaneously creates an Excel XLS version of the report in case you or your bookkeeper want to do further analyses, sorts or extractions of AP.
The JS-Classic custom job screen has a place to add "hidden" Sku's but this was not previously compatible when also using VJS. VJS doesn't have this feature but starting this version it won't conflict with a JS-Classic custom job with hidden Sku's.
[customer dbf import utility]
Version 2.830 03/25/2014 ===============================================================
The Sales Payment Spreadsheet (Daily Cash Register Report) now includes additional performance metrics in the end-of-report summary. Principally they are "add-on" performances showing the number of tickets which include more than one Sku line and the overall average number of items per ticket. Return items and zero-dollar items are left out of these calculations. in addition, the number of finalized sales and the average dollars per sale are shown.
The ability to purposefully type in a non-existent sale-number in the sales screen in order to select from a list of sales has been re-instated (this was available in the past) Further, it has been made more key-board friendly as you can now press <Enter> from the list of sales to select one.
The sales comparison report previously had a formatting problem in the subtotal lines of the percent change in gross profit. (i.e. 100% would show as 1%) This has been resolved in this update.
There are two ways to organize the buttons / features on the VJS menu. You can choose options, Customize Menu where you can select the features and can change the order in which they appear. You can also drag the buttons. In previous versions the buttons could be dragged out of position a bit too easily. To reduce inadvertent moves, starting with this update, in order to drag buttons to a new position, you need to right-click before dragging a button.
[dontinheritpix, upnp, logpath]
Version 2.820 03/13/2014 ===============================================================
The Cash Register Journal Report is a simple listing of payment entries by type - without other sales detail. This version adds the column to identify the user who was logged in for each payment. This way, even if a layaway or repair was originally assigned to clerk AAA, you can track who record the payments on later dates. For example, this can help identify who delivered a layaway or repair. Necessarily, to make use of this, each person people will have to log in to VJS with his/her own initials.
The cash register Sales Payment Spreadsheet report will now print the Reference next to each payment. I.e. for a credit card this is like 'Visa' or 'Amex', for a check it could be the check number. (If a sale has a split payment such as a check and a credit card, there might not be room to print both references.)
When layaways are recorded, the date of the sale is updated each time a payment is made - until it is finalized with the last payment. The sale does remember the Initial Date and certain reports can be run based on this Initial Date. In previous versions, the Initial Date was filled in with the actual date. Starting this version if you record a new layaway sale today but date it yesterday then the Initial Date will be registered as Yesterday. On a related note, if you need to change the Initial Date of a previous sale, retrieve the sale, choose Options, More Options Change Initial date. (this is password protected.)
when recording a repair or custom job on a sales screen you might include one line for the job tracking and several other lines for parts. In case you prefer that the receipt not show the price next to each component, with this update there is now a new option to allow the sales receipts to NOT show the price of each line - but to show only the total at the end of the receipt. To enable this option for Sku's in certain major codes, edit the major class code description so that it contains (anywhere) N$ (think No dollars) This is experimental - and if found useful by several jewelers may be made a more standard choice. Note that just the *first* item on the sale needs to contain a Sku in such a major code. The remaining items can be any Sku in any major code.
When you recording a repair sale, it's possible to enter several different repair Sku's for different tasks and it's possible to add a repair tracking detail page to each of the lines. Or you can choose to add just One repair tracking detail page. What's new in this version is the ability to have the description of All of the repair Sku lines of the sale added to the one repair tracking detail page. This could be useful if you break down the pricing of the repair into multiple steps and so use several Sku's, yet you want all the steps listed on the envelope. It can also be useful if you combine several different jobs on one ticket. This option is selected in the Repair Defaults Cont. page in Preferences. The options are to put all the sale screen descriptions into the Repair Description box or Instructions box. Or you can choose Both where the first 3 will go into the Description box and the rest into the Instructions box. Or you can choose to Split, where of Sku on the sales screen the first description line goes to the Instructions box on the Repair screen and the second description line goes to the Description box on the Repair screen.
If you use this option, you will likely want to *also* use the repair option to transfer the total price of all the Sku lines to the estimate box of the one repair ticket. This option has been in place for many months and is selected on the same Repairs Defaults Cont page in Preferences.
For both of the multi-line sale / repair ticket cases above, be sure to add all the repair Sku's to the sales screen before adding the single repair tracking detail page. The transfer of all the descriptions and the total price will only kick in when the repair tracking page is first added to that sale.
On the Vendor Profile screen in previous versions the preferred G/L (accounting ) code box was accessible even if security restrictions allowed only viewing of the profile. This has been resolved in this update.
Version 2.810 03/07/2014 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated so that it will import the new items for Spring 2014 into Jewelry Shopkeeper along with the related images. The over 400 additions include 2014 MLB Charms, 2014 Mothers Day, Essence Zodiac Charms and all the other new Spring 2014 styles. This will need a new access code from Compulink. (There is no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)
Version 2.800 03/06/2014 ===============================================================
In some previous versions, the "Undo" button at the top of the Sales Screen could erase a new sale that was in the middle of being added without prompting for confirmation. Starting this version clicking the Undo button will prompt for further clarification - depending on whether you have made any changes to the sale on the screen.
The length of message available in the Text/SMS box from the customer screen or the repair screen has been increased from 30 to 250 characters., (This 30-character limitation didn't actually apply in most cases because it's more usual to send SMS messages by creating a message template which did not have that length limit. This applies just to ad-hoc messages.)
Version 2.780 added the ability to show more than 15 payment types, but the associated click-to-scroll bar in that area remained optimized for up to 15. This update updates the scrolling among the payment types.
In the payment select scroll list, payment types can be associated with an icon. If you deselect the icon the payment type is shown in words. In this update, if you remove the icon the words can be clearer because they will be split into two lines in some cases. For example, what would previously have shown as CoChec (for Company Check) will now show as "Co Check" on two lines. This can help make selecting the right payment type easier.
Various Adjustments to Accounts Payable and Checkbook: ------------------------------------------------------
When writing a check to pay invoices payable, previous versions could retroactively change the G/L code of the invoice to the vendor's standard G/L code - if it had been changed for select invoices. This update resolves that.
When entering a non-inventory payable, certain sequences of keyboard and mouse could let you save the payable without assigning G/L Codes. Other sequences could exit a new payable without saving it/ This update resolves those issues.
When changing a previously-entered non-inventory payable, if you make a change but then choose "Done" instead of "Save", you have the option to *not* save the changes. In previous versions the option to Not save was not active but starting this version it is.
Non-Inventory payables have always been accessed via the "Inventory Entry" menu choice - using the "Non-Invent Payables" tab. This version adds a dedicated "Add or Change Accounts Payable" button to the Accounting Menu. Some users will find this a better access method.
When adding an invoice of merchandise, the button "ADD/EDIT INVENTORY" is used to access the grid of merchandise items to add. In previous versions was not visible until after you had selected a payable. Some beginner user felt stumped with that button "missing." In this version the button is always visible, but if you click it before you have selected an invoice, a prompt will ask you to select an invoice first.
In addition, the wording has changed to "Add Items to Inventory" and an icon is in the button.
If you add a payable (inventory or not) and skip the Due Date, It will be set to 30 days.
If you add a payable (inventory or not) and enter a discount percent but do not set the Discount Date, it will be set to the same as the Due Date.
Version 2.790 02/28/2014 ===============================================================
A new option in the Commission Reports screen allows you to mark the commission as having been paid. That way you can later run reports showing only items that haven't had their commission paid yet. [This is the last option in the report screen when you choose Full Selection. There is also a mark as Unpaid - in case you need to undo the action.]
The ability to drag n drop picture files has been in VJS for years - and this is a very quick and easy way of adding pre-made image files (either from your own still camera or images you received from a vendor.) When you drag and drop, the original image file is left alone and a copy is added to Shopkeeper. A new option in this version can move the original image out of the originating folder. This can be useful in order to keep a tidy "staging" folder with only the last one or two images. I.e. dragging from a folder with 1000 images might get tricky. This new option is on the Local Defaults page of Preferences. (Email Compulink for more details if you think this may be useful for you.)
In Previous versions, in order to delete a minor class code you had to delete the minor code description. Starting this version you can click the Delete button at the top of the form.
On the Pay Invoices Payable - Cut Checks screen you are presented a list of payables from which you can select which ones to pay and how much. If you widen the screen you will see more columns of information on the payables. What's new in this version is that two columns were added to show the Description information from the Payables. This could contain information that is useful at the time of cutting checks such as terms or a note to wait for a credit. (remember, you have to manually widen the screen to see more the extra columns of information.)
When a sales ticket is changed, a memo indicating the time and date of the changes is now logged with the sale. To see a history of these changes, choose Options at the top of the sales screen then More, then Sale History.
The Non-Inventory payable screen now allows you to change the number or vendor of a previously entered payable. This is done in the same way as for Inventory Payables: by clicking the padlock next to the invoice number and vendor code.
When you locate a previously entered payable on the Non-Inventory payable screen by typing the number and pressing Enter or Tab, previous versions would leave the "pick-list" of vendors on screen which was messy. This version fixes that.
LogMeIn no longer offers a Free version of their Remote Connection program (more details in the version 2.65 notes.) For those who decide not to get the LogMeIn Subscription Compulink is testing out some other remote-assistance options. This update adds another test with one called Screen Connect. From the initial VJS File Center, choose Options, then Remote Assistance. Then choose Screen Connect. The One-Time option will deactivate after one help session and you have to request a help session code ahead of time. The Install Screen Connect option keeps Screen connect available until you deactivate it. ( Either way, this would be in response to a request by Compulink to connect for technical assistance.)
[mod_second]
Version 2.780 02/18/2014 ===============================================================
Clicking the "Save" button at the top of the sales screen previously offered some options such as cancel changes, save as quote, etc. Now it will simply save the sale and close the sales form. As before, the more common ways of saving a sale remain to click "Print Receipt" to save and print a receipt and get ready for the next sale, or "No Receipt: to save the sale and get ready for the next sale.
When increasing quantity using the Add to Existing Sku Number screen, records are added to the adjustment log. However, in previous versions the Inventory Adjustment Report would show 'dn' (for down) next to those items. Starting this version, addition adjustments will show in the log as "up." The report format has been slightly adjusted too so now it will show "-1 (dn)" instead of "-1 dn." (the -1 dn might seem ambiguous - e.g. does -1 dn mean +1 up?!)
From the Payment Types page in Preferences, you can add any number of new payment types. However, the payment selection list (e.g. on the sales screen) was able to show just 15 types in previous versions. Starting this version there is room to show 30 types.
From the Physical Inventory screen (and the screens Add to Existing Sku, Deduct from Inventory, Relocate Inventory and Return Inventory to Vendor) you have the option of importing a list of Sku numbers to help speed up larger actions. This version adds a prompt after you select the import file to show you how many items were in the list and asks you to confirm the import. E.g., if you were expecting 100 items and the count were 870, you might want to stop and check things out before importing.
In addition, a new option allows you to Undo the last import of a list of Sku's by clicking the Undo button in the tool bar at the top of the screen.
Both of the above improvements also apply to reading in a batch of Sku's with a RFID wand reader.
[intentional jump from 2.670 to 2.780 ]
Version 2.670 02/10/2014 ===============================================================
The first time VJS is started each day, some data verification steps are done. In this version those steps will take less time.
when you make changes in Preferences (from the Maintenance Menu) the saving step could take fairly long on certain network configurations with previous versions. That saving step will be faster starting with this version. The same change should also make the preferences data file more resistant to damage.
Version 2.661 02/06/2014 ===============================================================
The Inventory Status screen has performance improvements in the Activity Page, such as when viewing sales for the Sku number. The improvement will be most noticeable if you have a large sales file There is also a bit of a speed-up when opening the Inventory Status screen from the Main Menu and when switching from one Sku Number to another within Inventory Status.
On the Extended Details page of Inventory Status most of the cost boxes were previously in code for lower-level logins but there remained some costs visible. In this update the remaining cost boxes are now converted to code (for lower-level logins.)
The Center Stone Clarity, Cut, etc. boxes have been widened so you can see all the text of longer entries without having to scroll.
The sales receipts will now print a "Taxable Amount" line in the totaling area. However, to maintain a cleaner receipt, this will not print if the Taxable Amount is the same as the sale subtotal. You can force the Taxable Amount to print for *all* sales with the new Preference: "Print 'Taxable Amount' even when it's the same as the total or zero." This option is on the Receipts Defaults Continued page in Preferences.
The last update introduced an error message in the financial reports which is solved.
Version 2.66 02/04/2014 =======================================================
The "Incomplete Payment" warning option introduced in update 2.641 has been adjusted a bit so that it update 2.641 has been adjusted a bit so that it is now easier to purposefully decline a payment on a Cash Sale thereby converting it to a Layaway.
The Date Range version of the inventory Reports was not optimized in previous versions for the save-as-pdf output option and various column would not appear in the pdf file. That report layout has been updated now.
In previous versions the checkbook reports sorted by Expense Code sometimes gave a warning about out of balance expenses in cases where the warning wasn't needed.
The two-date-range sales comparison report, the one grouped by vendor, has been modified for the case where a vendor's sales increase from zero to a non-zero value. Mathematically, the *percent* increase is infinite but previous versions showed this as 0%. Starting this version such cases are represented by the number of units sold - e.g. zero last year to this year will show as 200%. This is not strictly mathematical, but it makes better sense from a business perspective than zero or infinity. This change was made to the report version grouped by major code in a previous update.) Such lines are marked with a double-asterisk as a reminder of the alternative percentage calculation for such lines.
[memslog]
Version 2.651 01/24/2014 ===============================================================
In previous versions if you activated the Manager Override feature to temporarily increase the security level (e.g. to discount more, etc.), then the Manager Override would remain in effect until the sales screen were closed or if the manager override option was explicitly selected. Starting this version, the Manager Override feature will self-cancel at the end of the current sale in progress. This can help avoid leaving the access in place indefinitely.
An error message problem with the zebra tag printing was introduced in the 2.650 update (it could be ignored safely) but that is removed in this update
Version 2.65 01/23/2014 ===============================================================
LogMeIn no longer offers a Free version of their Remote Connection program which can be used for technical support or for accessing your office computers from home. If you currently have a LogMeIn account, you can convert it to the Premium account for a yearly fee in which case you don't have to reinstall LogMeIn and your account remains as-is. The subscription charge is reasonable and LogMeIn is well-proven.
For those who decide not to get the LogMeIn Subscription Compulink is testing out some other remote-assistance options. From the initial VJS File Center, choose Options, then Remote Assistance. Then you could try the TeamViewer option or the Send Invitation option. ( Either way, this would be in response to a request by Compulink to connect for technical assistance.)
The Accounts Payable / Cash Requirements Report now has two a further new sort option: Order by Due date within Vendor. This is in addition to the two new sort options added in the previous update. Further, a new option for this report is the Summarized version which will not show individual invoices, but just a total for each vendor and a grand total - for a quick overview of your payables position.
One version of the Sales by Clerk Reports was not optimized in previous versions for the save-as-pdf output option and the retail price column would not appear in the pdf file. This version (the "Clerk Summary" version") has now been updated.
The extended data check checks for unusual data and previously ignored the lower-case e-acute (驠and in this update the upper-case e-acute ( ɠ) is also now ignored. This is so that descriptions with pav頡re not flagged.
The ability to open a Charge Account can be restricted via the Security Settings in Preferences. In previous versions, when an attempt was made to open a charge account with too-low security, the warning message showed too briefly to be read easily. That is fixed in this update.
If you have a Genius credit card terminal by Merchant Warehouse VJS now does a communications check when you first start VJS each day to see if the Genius responds.
Version 2.642 01/18/2014 ===============================================================
In previous versions the Detailed Layaway Report would not report Special Order sales that were not-finalized. Starting this version, you can have those included if you set the For Balance Over line to zero.
If you have more than one Genius credit card terminals from Merchant Warehouse, they each will need to have a unique IP (network) address. Previous versions of Shopkeeper had support for just one Genius terminal, starting this version, you can go to the Local Defaults Continued page in Preferences and set a different Genius IP address for each computer: i.e. for the closest Genius terminal.
One of the layouts for the itemized inventory reports in previous versions would not show the cost on the version that was used when creating a PDF file of the reports. That is resolved in this update.
The Accounts Payable / Cash Requirements Report now has two new sort options: Order by Date Received and Order by Due Date. (the previous sort options by vendor code and vendor name still exist.)
Version 2.641 01/10/2014 ===============================================================
On the sales screen if you enter a payment amount, but don't actually complete the payment (e.g. by selecting cash or Visa or check) and then try to save the sale or print a receipt, previous versions would simply ignore the payment. Starting this version, you will receive a warning for incomplete payments. Of course, in such cases, the payment is still not saved unless you complete it - but at least the warning can help you avoid cases where you thought the payments were recorded when, in fact, they were not.
The Sales Reports by Clerk / Commission Reports now have the activated options to select only or to exclude items based on whether they are special order items or memo inventory items. [these choices were visible before but not active.]
The Inventory Entry screen has a Delete button at the top to delete an entire invoice. Starting with this update this button can also delete an entire purchase order. As before, this is subject to security restrictions on deleting inventory.
Version 2.640 01/07/2014 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated so that it will import the new items for Valentines 2014 into Jewelry Shopkeeper along with the related images. You can use the same access code as you used for the Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013 update. (no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)
You can open multiple copies of most screens in VJS, such as Sales, Repairs etc. Previous versions couldn't open multiple copies of Inventory Status which is now possible. This is useful as it enables side-by-side comparison of the details of different items.
When editing an invoice (of received inventory) some previous versions did not show the major code part of the Sku number until you clicked/selected that line. In this update that part of the Sku number will show up on all lines, not just the selected line.
When you enter a sale and instead of choosing to save it (with or without a receipt) you click the red [X] to close the screen, your intentions are ambiguous so VJS asks you whether to save, delete, or save as a Wish-List / Quote. In previous versions the default response (if you were to press <Enter>) was Delete and the action to take if you pressed Escape or click the red [x] on the prompt screen was to save as a Wish-List / Quote. Starting in this version the default action for any of these is to do nothing - i.e. stay in the sale. This makes you actively decided which action to take and can avoid accidentally deleting the sale or accidentally keeping it in the Wish List. As before, however, it's best to choose Receipt or No Receipt in these cases.
On the Physical Inventory screen, if you type in a bad or an incomplete Sku number, the inventory search screen appears to help you locate the right Sku. In this version there is a new checkbox option "Bad Sku Warning" that will cause a sound alert and an extra warning box to appear when a bad Sku is entered. This is help in situations when you are scanning many Sku's very fast and may not be paying much attention to the screen. Without the warning you may end up scanning without realizing that the program is not in the correct mode for scanning.
On the Physical Inventory screen there is a new option to export the physical count list to an Excel XLS file.
On the Physical Inventory screen, when you are starting to enter fresh new counts you have to confirm the deletion of the previous list by typing DELETE followed by the number of previous Sku's - e.g. DELETE 4517. This number of Sku's is different from the quantity total at the bottom of the screen (because some items could have a quantity of 2, etc.). Some users found this difference disconcerting so starting this version, both values are now the total quantity count.
Version 2.630 12/26/2013 ===============================================================
When retrieving a previous sale, on rare occasions one might see a "2H" error meaning duplicate sale number. Starting this version, VJS will fix the duplication (possibly by adding a suffix to one of the sale numbers) and let you continue.
The Sales Report by Clerk / Commission report previously had problem when selecting the "Initial Date" option. This has been resolved in this update.
When viewing the images where an inventory item or appraisal has multiple pictures, there is a button to select which picture is "Primary" (the first one to show) Under certain conditions before the Primary button didn't take effect and this update resolves that issue.
When you are viewing an item in the Inventory Status screen you can switch the search option between Sku No, Style and Part Number. Starting this version, when you switch from say, Sku to Style, the contents of the search box will change from having the Sku number of the current item in it to having the Style number of the current item. (previously the search box was emptied when you changed the search method.)
When changing the number or vendor of a received shipment/invoice certain uncommon conditions (with other users on a network) could prevent the date update. This version update can bypass the conflict.
A new option from the repair screen allows you to change the Job Number of a repair. (Note that jobs entered via the sales screen have a Sale Number, not a job number, so this doesn't apply to all sales.)
If you retrieve a repair and make a change and do *not* choose to save it but instead choose X-Search in order to locate a different repair, previous versions would not save the change. Starting in this version, you will be *asked* at this point whether you want to keep or discard the changes. This can help prevent inadvertently losing data updates.
A certain sequence of 'jumping' back and forth between the repair screen and X-Tra search screen without saving could lead to entering two jobs with the same ticket number. A loophole has been closed to prevent those possible duplicates.
A 'cross-hatch' pattern now covers the part of the Inventory Entry screen at the times when it's not active. This helps you to know not to try to click buttons on it at those times.
[archive-quote; transcan; norepairxs,ipl,xchgrtntip]
Version 2.620 12/06/2013 ===============================================================
The Repair Status Quick Update screen has a new feature for when you type a sale number which has multiple repair lines. Where previously it would select just the first job, it will now ask if you want to add all lines to the update list. As before, if you want to select just one particular line, you can type the suffixed repair number like 456-2 for line 2 of sale 456. You can also now remove items inadvertently added to the repair list by right-clicking that line in the list.
When you move an inventory item from a Memo to a billed invoice payable, the item no longer appears on the Memo. This update adds the option, while editing the memo, to review all the items that were *originally* on that same memo - even if they have been subsequently moved to a different invoice. Choose Options at the top toolbar, then Review All Items From Original Memo/Invoice. Note that this feature can apply only to new memos added after this update - not retroactively to previous memos.
Shopkeeper now checks to see if the "Windows Print Spooler" is running while printing a report. It's extremely rare for it to not be running, but printing with the spooler off can crash a program.
An easy access to some handy Windows "utilities" has been added to the Options button at the top right corner of the VJS Main Menu. [e.g. direct access to printers, the My Computer screen, the Shopkeeper custom reports folder.]
A new remote assistance option is available in case you don't have LogMeIn. This uses the Remote Desktop program built-in to Windows. [You'd only access this feature if Compulink asked you to in relation to a technical support question.]
Fixes a picture problem that under rare circumstances could add a picture to a Sku number that has no picture assigned.
[The picture-check utility previously would look for one picture matching the Sku number; now it will check for additional ones with the suffixes A to G. As before, this utility still also checks for pictures matching the style number.]
[errscreen; bkupdeltmpfiles]
Version 2.610 11/21/2013 ===============================================================
When you change the sales tax rate in Preferences this affects new sales entered afterwards. However, pending, unfinalized layaways and special orders and repairs are not changed. A new option on the sales tax page of Preferences allows you to update all of these outstanding sales so that they will have the correct rate for when they are paid off and finalized.
All report screens will now open up with the "focus" on the first selection line. This way you can more quickly navigate with your keyboard cursor keys to set your criteria without having to click with the mouse.
When running the Itemized Sales Report, an Excel XLS file of the results is simultaneously put in the VJS Reports folder on the Windows Desktop. What is new in this update is the addition of the sale location - i.e. the location of the inventory item from which the item was sold.
On the Customer Reports screen in previous versions, the option to calculate customer purchases by Sales Dept code (separate from major code) was not active. Starting this version, it is.
For situations where the total number of all pictures for all appraisals becomes very large, (e.g. over 10,000 or so) it is now possible for the pictures to be shared among more than one subfolder instead of just one folder. [If this is needed, ask Compulink for details.]
[receivepo; apprpix; nccremxx]
Version 2.600 11/12/2013 ===============================================================
Running the Inventory Adjustments Report now simultaneously creates an Excel XLS export file which is put in the VJS Report folder on the Windows Desktop.
The Customer Reports and Mailings screen has long had a feature to allow you to select customers based on key words that you add to the Notes or Comments are of the customer profile. This is powerful because you can unlimited different keywords to each customer - unlike the one customer type. What is new in this version is that you can now also *exclude* customers by keywords. E.g. you could flag customers as [NOCATALOG] and exclude those from a mailing even if you also give them another keyword such as [CHRISTMASCLUB]
When you make payments on layaways and special orders, the date of the sale is brought forward to the current date. There is now a simple way to see the original date of a sale by retrieving the sale and then positioning the mouse over the date at the top-right corner. A "Tool Tip" message will show the original date if it's different than the current date.
Related to the above, certain boxes in Shopkeeper display "Tool Tip" message when you hover the mouse over that box or area. This message can contain a mini help message or additional information. In previous versions, this message would show for up to 3 seconds. Starting in this version the message will remain for as long as you keep the mouse pointer stationary. This can make the messages much more useful.
When receiving merchandise previously on a purchase order (e.g. from a special order) where the retail price was previously known but the cost was not (and was initially zero) when you enter the actual cost previous versions would automatically assign a new retail price. Starting in this version, this will not happen. (however, for new items without an expected retail price, VJS will continue to suggest the selling price.)
Also when receiving inventory from a purchase order where the item was previously on a special order sale, previous versions of VJS would issue a warning that the Quantity appears wrong. This warning is needed for non-special order items, but for special order items, the quantity in stock is supposed to be already reduced to zero so starting this version that message in this instance is unhelpful and has been removed.
The checks printed from the Accounting Menu have the possibility to print the bank account name. (This requires customizing and would require additional information from Compulink.)
Version 2.59 11/08/2013 ===============================================================
The Notes area of the vendor screen previously was an all-capitals area, but now allows upper- and lower- case which can be useful if you store vendor website passwords there for cut-n-paste.
For jewelers using the financial reports: If, somehow, you end up with a payable or a GJ entry or a checkbook record that is out of balance, a warning will appear when you run a financial report and a screen will appear allowing you to correct those entries. An out of balance entry is one where the total doesn't match the sum of each of the G/L code breakdowns. In addition, you can access this review screen via the Utilities area via the Options button at the top right of any Menu.
Addition of a utility to correct the city name in your customer records. The most common symptom is when you add a new customer with a certain zip code and the wrong city is selected. This means one or more of your customer records has the wrong city. This is accessed via the Utilities screen.
On the Customer Profile screen, the Mobile phone number has been moved into the first position - because it's more often a customer's primary telephone. For several versions, the word "Mobile" on the customer screen will be bold and underlines in order to make this change more obvious. The Mobile number has also been moved into first position on the Customer Xtra-Search screen.
In the Security configuration area of Preferences you can now permit view-only access to Preferences where in previous versions there was either make-changes access or no access.
When exporting the Itemized Sales Report to PDF file for a small number of items, previous versions would have resulted in the style number not printing. This update will reduce the chance of that occurring.
[Misc fix keycode/name resolution][magstripx1]
Version 2.582 10/29/2013 ===============================================================
In previous versions it has been possible to merge the records of one vendor code with another, e.g. in the case of accidental duplicates or if one vendor buys another. The change in this version is that additional warnings have to be acknowledged before the merge occurs. This is because merged records cannot be unmerged. FYI, to change a vendor code and/or to merge two vendors, retrieve the old vendor code in the Vendor Maintenance screen, then Ctrl-Click the vendor code. (You'll notice these instructions if you hover the mouse over the vendor code.)
Some areas of possible 'conflict' between two users have been resolved, such as when at one computer an accounts receivable credit memo is being entered at the same time at another computer a charge account sale is being entered.
[REPSKUTODESC ]
Version 2.581 10/23/2013 ===============================================================
A certain sequence of entering sales and the sales clerk initials in a particular way could result in the sales items not being assigned to a clerk. A change in this program closes that loophole.
From the sales screen you can enter Wish List / Quote sales, however you can't print them using the usual "Print Receipt" button - because that means save as a real sale and print a real receipt. Instead, you can print a different Wish List / Quote ticket by choosing Options at the top of the sales screen followed by "Print a Quote Sheet / Wish List." In many previous versions, choosing this print option would work fine, but it would present a confusing message suggesting that the Quote Wish-List had already been saved as a real sale. This erroneous message has been removed in this update.
The utility programs area add the utility to force the Shopkeeper inventory quantities to match the last physical inventory. ( This isn't commonly used - only run this on advice from Compulink. )
[nomemsgnewdata, gl]
Version 2.580 10/17/2013 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated so that it will import the new MLB Charms list for November 2013 into Jewelry Shopkeeper. The related images are not yet available, but they will be added later. In addition, this catalog update includes the significant price and cost changes ( reductions) for the watch line so in addition to the Import step, you will first need to run the Update step. You can use the same access code as you used for the Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013 update. (no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)
The "More Details" page of the repair tracking screen includes additional fields to track the historical progress of a job through Waxing, Casting, Stock, General, Molding and Setting.
The Profit & Loss / Income Statement report has been adjusted to include a line identifying the Vendor Discounts Taken This Period. In previous versions, the value was deducted from the overall Cost of Goods Sold, but the discount line wasn't shown, which could have been mysterious.
Version 2.570 10/14/2013 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the new inventory list for November 2013. This will add the Essence Collection and two images per new style. You can use the same access code as you used for the Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013 update. (no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)
A somewhat recent update introduced an error in the calculation of the column called average inventory cost value of the GMROI report. This version fixes that.
[extra verification to prevent customer numbers lower than 0]
Version 2.561 10/10/2013 ===============================================================
From the sales screen you can double-click the clerk initials at the top right in order to display the clerk profile screen. In previous versions this method of accessing the clerk screen did not check the required security settings, but starting this version it does. I.e. you may want to prevent access to the clerk profile screen.
The Detailed Layaway Report now includes the customers' phone numbers.
[bpenrldt, mgwnostatck]
Version 2.560 10/08/2013 ===============================================================
From the Inventory Reports screen the normal layout is line-by-line showing each Sku, but there are various other styles. One other style is the Vendor Summary. In previous versions, this layout always included the value of layaway items even if you chose to include them. Starting this version, the vendor summary inventory report will respect the exclude-layaway option.
The commission report now has the option to select sales based on the date the inventory items were received. Previously this option was not active. For example you can use this combination to see what success sales people are having in clearing old merchandise.
On the Inventory Status screen you have the option (set in Preferences) to show the cost in code as opposed to digits. This is not a new feature and, FYI, you can double-click the cost-code to switch to digits (if you have security clearance.) Setting this feature on also hid the cost on the Extended Details page. Starting in this version, you can also double-click the extended costs in the right-most column of the Extended Details page to switch them to readable digits.
It should be vanishingly rare, but if you happen to end up with a repair that has no number, starting this version, if you try to retrieve such a job, you will be prompted to assign it a repair number at that time. (In previous versions such a job could not be retrieved.)
On the customer profile (name and address) screen there is a box called Mailing Label Name (aka Salutation). Typically, youwant to leave it empty and any receipt or label will use the first and last name (and spouse). But if you fill in Mailing Label Name, that will supersede. Because this box is frequently not needed, and because accidentally filling it in with the address is an easy mistake to make, you can disable this box in Preferences. The change in this update is that if you disable it the box will remain *visible* but not accessible. If you need to correct a mistake, you can temporarily re-enable it by double-clicking this box. In previous areas, disabling this box make it completely invisible so you could not access it to correct any mistakes.
A minor Credit Card Processing improvement helps avoid problems for those rare cases where the customer name includes digits or non-alphabet characters (such as /'s slashes ) which can cause problems with processing.
The 40-column (roll of paper) layouts for the repair tickets have been modified so that they do *not* print $0.00 for the estimate amount when the estimate has been left blank. This matches the other formats such as the 3-part tickets.
In Version 2.552 choosing the "Reset to Default" option in Customize Menu could result in menus with just one or two items. This update restores that feature to its normal setting.
Version 2.552 09/28/2013 ===============================================================
The Simple Layaway Report now has the option to select a certain date range for the Date of Last Payment (e.g. to be able to run a smaller report of just those who have not made a payment in over, say, two months.)
When you un-attach a repair from a sales ticket, VJS needs to assign a temporary ticket number which is a random set of characters to be unique. Starting in this version, this temporary number is removed once you re-bill it to another sales ticket - resulting in a "cleaner" looking repair screen. Also, when you remove a ticket and later re-bill it, the original billing Sku number is now retained where in previous versions it was not.
[ret-mem-itype2-warn-optn; clncondsarecrelat; invckperf; addinvcapexh; repenvpx4]
Version 2.550 09/17/2013 ===============================================================
The Word Search option within the purple Inventory Search screen previously did not work if you used lower-case descriptions. Starting with this update, the word search is not-case sensitive.
During inventory entry, the maximum length of the invoice number is 11 characters (as before). However, in previous versions when you entered an 11-character (the maximum) invoice or memo number, the "Add/Edit Inventory" button did not activate immediately - it required re-clicking in the invoice number box and pressing <Enter> Starting with this version, this extra step is not needed for the "Add/Edit Inventory button" to activate.
For the Inventory Status page there are security options which can prevent the cost from showing at all, or which can make the cost show in code instead of digits. Starting with this version, the preference to show the cost in code on the inventory status screen, or the security option to not show the cost there at all will also apply to the add inventory screen that appears when you add a special order during a sale.
I.e., you may not want the cost to show up at that point because the customer may be with you.
The Pandora Sales Analysis upload feature (see 2.530) below has been updated to work with Secure FTP so now you can both create and send the files in one step, where with previous versions you would have had to upload manually.
Version 2.543 09/13/2013 ===============================================================
Corrections and adjustments have been made to the GemWhere RFID program.
Changes have been made so that the social security box in the charge account extended details page is compatible between JS-Classic and VJS.
The Equifax export utility is available now in VJS.
Version 2.542 09/10/2013 ===============================================================
Adjustments to the Activity page of the Inventory Status screen to correct the interstore transfer list which would display incorrectly in some previous versions.
Version 2.541 09/09/2013 ===============================================================
In previous versions, applying a credit slip payment to an outstanding layaway would not automatically bring the date of the layaway forward. Starting with this version the date will be automatically updated if you don't change it yourself.
After adding a credit, the Gift Certificate and Credit Slip screen will now return back to the XTra-Search screen (if XTra-Search is set in Preferences) instead of to the simple customer search box.
Version 2.540 09/04/2013 ===============================================================
The Appraisal screen and the Notes page of the Inventory Status screen each have a spell check button. Starting with this update you can now choose to have VJS use the spell-checker of Microsoft Word. The advantage is that the Word spell- checker is significantly more sophisticated than the built-in spell checker. Also, sharing the spell-check with word means that any of your jewelry-specific words or abbreviations that you add to the dictionary in Word will also be referenced when you use VJS.
To activate this feature, check the box "Use Microsoft Word Spell Check" on the "Local Defaults" page of Preferences. Note that this feature is only possible if your computer has Microsoft Word Installed. In the same vein, changing this option on Computer A, does not change this option on Computer B (other computers.)
This is not guaranteed to work with all installations of Microsoft Word.
In previous versions, on the "Notes" page of the Inventory Status screen the values for the Reorder Levels didn't always immediately 'refresh' so they might show zero even though they were actually saved. They would appear if you clicked in those boxes, but n this update those values will show immediately and this will avoid puzzlement.
In the Inventory Status screen, the "Print a Tag" button now appears only on the "Main" page because the other pages do not all leave enough room for it to show and in previous versions there was overlap.
The "Price-Point" markup is used to suggest selling prices when neither the major class code nor the vendor have a markup formula. In previous versions VJS allowed you to enter cents as dollars which would result in unexpected retail prices. This is resolved in this update.
The repair entry screen has additional verifications to detect any (very unlikely ) case of a job being saved without a job number.
Changes on the Activity page of Inventory Status may prevent extra lines showing on the Store Transfers list.
Version 2.530 08/15/2013 ===============================================================
The Sales Report by Clerk and Commissions has a new sort option that can sort by sale number within clerk name. This takes the place of the date within clerk name sort option. However, the date within clerk initials sort is still available and is still the default sort option.
A new Preference for the sales screen allows you to automatically fill in the Dept code for any new sale with a pre-defined choice. E.g. you may want all sales to be assigned a Dept code of "REG" by default (unless explicitly overruled and changed.)
Another new Preference for the sales screen allows you to choose that the sales screen first stops on the Dept code box for new sales.
The Detailed Layaway Report has a new option to allow you to select by (or exclude by) the Dept code added to the sale.
A new utility is available for reporting Pandora sales and inventory to your Pandora rep. [ask for details if this is needed.]
Version 2.520 08/09/2013 ===============================================================
The tag printing area also has the option to print "Product Cards" such as business-card sized hint cards. What's new in this area in this update is a new format to print four product cards per letter page. This is designed for Avery four-per page post-card size laser printer sheets. These could serve as inventory index cards, or you could print onto regular paper stock for a larger format inventory report.
The repair pages of Preferences let you specify whether or not you want to require that repair tickets have a clerk, a location and a due date. In some previous versions, these rules were not always enforce on new tickets. That has been corrected in this update.
When using the Repair screen directly (not via a sales ticket) after you save or clear the current repair and are returned to the Customer X-Tra Search screen, previous versions did not immediately highlight the most recently used customer (and didn't show the associated sales and repairs.) In this version, the most recent customer will be highlighted and her transactions shown. This is more consistent with the behavior from the sales screen and is convenient when reviewing several transactions in a row from the same customer
In the Inventory Report screen, when change the Itemized or Summarized option to "Snapshot Summary" a new addition is that simultaneously, VJS will create an Excel XLS file containing the inventory aging for each vendor. This XLS file, "InvSnapShotVen.xls" is put in the VJS Reports folder. The standard overall summary report continues to be shown on-screen or printed.
The Detailed Layaway Reports and Statements reporting screen by default excludes special orders and repairs, which is different than the Simple Layaway Reports which include them all. In this version the option to include them all has been moved from the Full Selection page to the Quick Selection page to make this fact more obvious and also quicker to change.
This same Detailed Layaway Reports and Statements previously systematically excluded sales tickets which contained any repair Sku's. Now this will not be the case unless you specifically choose Layaways only.
The Purchase Order reports in previous versions could not show totals over $1M and that limitation is removed in this version.
Entering a credit or debit memo against an in-house charge account does not have an option to print that memo. However, the adjustment goes into the payment file and it is possible to retrieve the "payment" entry and print a payment receipt. What is new in this version is that debit/credit memos printed this way will now show "Cr.Memo" so that it's clearer that they are not regular payments.
The Compare Two Date Ranges sales report now includes figures for Average price paid for each item.
The performance increase of Drop/lookup lists in version 2.51 had a side effect such that if you typed a word very fast that could at times prevent the lookup list from dropping-down. The lookup list at that point has been restored in this version - even with fast typing.
Version 2.510 07/24/2013 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the new inventory list for Fall, Winter, Black Friday 2013. (Drops 5 & 6) This will add about 200 new item styles to your inventory file along with the associated pictures. A new access code is required (no charge if you have the Maintenance Plan.)
From the Vendors X-tra Search screen, you can now double-click an invoice number to pop-up the invoice entry screen with that invoice selected.
The performance of Drop/lookup lists has been optimized. In some areas, such as vendor invoice lookup this change can be very noticeable (especially on slower networks and where the data files are large.)
When entering inventory a new option allows you to cause VJS to not verify the manufacturer code that you enter. (this does not refer to the vendor code) This is for very special cases where you may use the Manufacturer code for purposes other than its intended use. To enable this option, add the keyword NOMFGCK anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences.
Version 2.501 07/17/2013 ===============================================================
The previous version 2.50 introduced an erroneous message relating to removing repair items from a sale when you exited a sale (with repair items) by clicking the red Close / [X] button at the top right corner of the sales screen. This update removes that message under those circumstances.
Version 2.500 07/16/2013 ===============================================================
In some previous versions, the additional pages "Notes", "Extended Details" and "Stone Details" of the Inventory Status screen did not always immediately refresh for the current item and you may have had to click the boxes for them to refresh. From this version, the updating occurs immediately.
For users with very large data files, the "Activity" page of the Inventory Status screen could be slow in previous versions. This page has been optimized to work much faster.
In the Security area of Preferences is a setting called View Other Clerks' Profile which can restrict clerk AA opening the Clerk screen and viewing clerk BB's profile and sales. Starting in this version this setting will now restrict clerk AA to running the Commission Report for only her own sales. So, where previously you may have had to disallow access to the commission report screen, you can now allow it without granting access to everyone's sales results.
In previous versions, one layout of the GMROI report had the wrong margin calculation on the grand total line. This was the version by major class code, sorted by class (not group) This has been corrected in this update.
The version of the Commission report which subtotals by major code in previous versions had a problem with the subtotal lines even though the total was ok. That has been corrected in this update.
APG brand USB cash drawers (554 series) are now supported. (In addition to the previously supported brands: MS Cash Drawer and MF Cash Drawer.)
When running the GMROI report, if any items have 'problem' cost or retail values, that can cause certain lines on the report to show as asterisks (****'s). Starting in this version if any such items are encountered a list of suspect Sku numbers is presented so that you can check or correct them.
In previous versions, when retrieving a Memo via the Inventory Entry screen and exiting without saving changes, under certain conditions the date box of the memo could be blanked out. This problem has been solved.
When you add (bill) unbilled repair jobs to a sale, you have the option (in Preferences) of having the repair instructions transfer to the description line of the sales screen. In previous versions, you would sometimes seen odd characters in the sale description in place of where there were line-breaks in the repair instructions. In this versions those stray line-break marks are no longer copied.
When you add (bill) unbilled repair jobs to a sale, the price estimate and cost estimate from the repair screen are usually transferred from the repair screen to the sales screen. A new change in this version is that if the unbilled job did not have a Sku number pre-assigned and if the unbilled job did not have an estimate, then when you bill it, the price and cost associated with the Sku number that you select (while adding the job to the sale) will be assigned to the sales line.
Similar to the above, a new option has been added to the Repairs section of Preferences for when you add (bill) unbilled repair jobs to a sale. The option allows you to apply the price and cost of the repair Sku added during billing to *override* the price and cost estimate on the repair screen even if they are non-zero. This option, of course, is not active by default. On the Repair Defaults Cont. page of Preferences, locate the option "When billing unbilled jobs, override estimate with Sku Price and Cost?"
Some changes when deleting sales which have repair items attached: You may create a sale and add repair lines to it - each with a repair ticket screen, and then decide to delete the sale before saving it - by choosing Delete in the top tool bar. At that point you are asked what to do with the related repair detail: leave it unbilled r delete it. In previous versions in either case only the first repair line was being deleted or unbilled. In this update, if there are several such repair detail lines, they are all either unbilled or deleted (according to your choice.)
Similar to the above case where you start to add a sale with repair lines attached. If you exit the sale ambiguously by clicking the red [X] at the top right corner, you are asked if you want to Save or Delete or Ignore. If you choose Delete, in previous versions, you were not asked what to do with the related repair lines, so they would remain in the repair file but with an ambiguous state [they would seem to be billed, but the related sale would have been deleted.] In this version you are asked what to do with the related repair items with the same choices and results as when you explicitly click the Delete sale button at the top of the sales screen.
These changes should reduce the number of puzzling, orphaned repair lines.
[ tjsnojavafx]
Version 2.490 06/25/2013 ===============================================================
Webcam imaging-taking now defaults to a newer method which has access to higher camera resolutions. However, ii case of incompatibility with certain computers / camera combinations, add the keyword ALTWEBCAM1 anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in the Preferences screen to return to the previous, simpler method.
The general ledger account names can now be entered in mixed upper-lower case which can help to keep the chart of accounts matched with QuickBooks.
The email message box (e.g. accessed via the customer profile screen previously would switch to upper-case only if you had selected upper-case only for customer names and addresses. Starting in this version the email message may always be mixed-case.
The sales receipts can now have access to the Alternative /Web- Description and to the Style Notes. [if needed, request instructions from Compulink as these do *not* show automatically.]
Support has been added for APG brand USB cash drawers.
[ cleanup err 39 classes; recordstamp-off-zmisc, tjsnojava, zoverpmt]
Version 2.480 06/10/2013 ===============================================================
When you use more than one webcam to capture images VJS will now remember your resolution preferences for each one separately. In addition the list of available resolutions is now 'cleaner' in that only the resolutions applicable to the currently selected webcam will show - instead of the list for all of the webcams.
An optional 'preview delay' option is now available for webcam image capture. This may help for certain computers / combinations of webcams. To enable this, add the key word OCXSTARTPREVIEWDELAY 500 anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences for a 1/2 second delay.
Another change in the internet search of customers by phone has been added to match the change in results of the 411 website. The First/Last name position were being switched but now that is resolved.
If you remain on the Activity page of the Inventory Status screen while selecting different Sku numbers, the activity logs now update immediately. In previous versions, the sales logs would update immediately, but the other logs such as adjustments would not update until you clicked on the Main tab and then returned to the Activity page.
The Itemized sales report sorted by date has a Markup % column but previously this reported only for individual items, not for the daily subtotals or the report subtotals. In this update, those subtotal and total Markup values are calculated and reported.
A change prevents a (benign) error message that could appear, under certain circumstances, after entering a payment on account on A/R accounts.
A change prevents a (benign) error #3 message that could appear, under certain circumstances, when running a cleanup.
Version 2.470 05/20/2013 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the new inventory list for Summer 2013. (Drops 3 & 4) This will add about 100 new item styles to your inventory file along with the associated pictures. (A new access code is required only if you have *not* already entered a Valentines or Spring 2013 code.)
Several itemized inventory report layouts were not optimized in previous versions for the save-as-pdf output option and some columns of figures would not appear in the pdf file. Those reports have now been updated.
Additional information is now available when exporting customer lists from the Customer Reports and Labels screen. When you choose purchase criteria and when you choose the Large export file option, the export file now adds columns including details of the most recent item purchased including date, Sku, description, price, style and manufacturer.
To prevent accidental over-payment entries, previous versions did not accept over-payments on cash sales. However, this prevented you from accepting over-payment by check were you give cash-back. This version adds a new option on the Sales Cont. page of Preferences "Permit Over-Payment on Sales" This still doesn't permit a cash sale to actually have an over-payment as you will be prompted for the negative payment before you can save the sale.
Version 2.462 05/17/2013 ===============================================================
Includes the fix for a sales screen problem earlier today in V 2.461
Version 2.461 05/17/2013 ===============================================================
In previous versions, the Style / Alt Job Number box was pre-filled in with the same number as the ticket number. Starting this version, this alternative number box will *not* be filled in by default.
[If needed, there exists an option to re-activate filling it in: Add FILLALTJOBB to Miscellaneous Options in Preferences to fill it in for Billed jobs, FILLALTJOBU for unbilled jobs.]
In previous versions, retrieving an existing sale and changing the sale type (e.g. from Cash to Layaway) would change the default sale type to Layaway (in this example) until you exited the sales screen. That is no longer the behavior, i.e. the next new sale will revert to the preferred default sale type.
This update includes a fix for the "Save and Clear Vendor" option from the Update Multiple Repairs screen. That particular option had a problem after the SMS/Texting feature was added in a recent update.
FYI, you'll see additional small "list" icons on some of the buttons on the Main Menu. They don't do anything other than help you more quickly identify the buttons which take you to other menus.
[graphics]
Version 2.460 05/13/2013 ===============================================================
When you run the Entire Customer History report, you now have the choice to limit the report to a date range that you select. This is useful when you need only a certain year of a for a customer with many years of activity.
Another addition to the customer history is that it simultaneously creates a (very simplified) Excel version of the history in the VJS Reports folder on the Windows Desktop in the file Custhist.xls
On the repairs page of Preferences you can record your usual lead-time in days to help estimate the due date of repairs. You can also mark which days are not to be suggested as due dates so you don't accidentally print, onto the customer's stub, a due date when you're closed. Those are not new, but the change in this version is that you have to option to increase the lead-time by the skipped days. E.g. If you're lead-time is three days and you accept a job on Saturday, but Sunday is a skipped day, previous versions would always suggest Tuesday as the due date. Now you can optionally choose to extend by any skipped days - e.g. in this case Wednesday could be pre-calculated.
Version 2.42 added the ability to add vendor-specific messages to sales receipts (see below for more details) An unwanted side-effect was that if, for some reason, you had two vendor records with the same vendor code then the sales receipt could print the item twice. Of course, in such a case you'd want to erase the duplicate vendor entry, but this update, in the meantime, at least stops the items printing twice on the receipts
Changing the name on a sales ticket in previous versions could leave repairs or appraisals previously linked to that sales ticket in the name of the original customer. This has been corrected in this version.
Normally, the Assemble Disassemble screen is used to create a brand new Sku number from component Sku's that are already in stock - in which case Shopkeeper will add the component costs and retails and suggest them for the new Sku. In the new update, if you start with an existing (non-assembled) Sku and add a further Sku to it, you will be asked if you want to increase the cost and retail of the main Sku by the amount of the additions - not by the sum of the components alone.
[commerr]
Version 2.451 05/07/2013 ===============================================================
It is important to bring inventory and sales analyses to tradeshows such as the upcoming JCK Show because this can help you retain focus on how much and where to invest among different lines and price-points.
In the latest version of VJS (v2.451 or higher) a feature has been added to let Shopkeeper users anonymously combine their sales information with other participating Shopkeeper users.
About a week before the JCK Show, Compulink will provide, only to participating jewelers, three different analyses of the merged data.
The PDF documents will be different versions of the "Return on Investment by price-point within vendor" report. - One report will show the combined totals of all participating stores. - The second will be only stores that share your store's approximate sales volume. - The third will be combined by region (Northeast, South, Midwest & West)
Here's how you can participate: At the VJS Main menu choose Options and select Utilities. Select the "On Web Site" tab. Select "Refresh List". Select "Share GMROI Info" and click Download. This utility may be updated from time to time so if you re-run it check the date of the Already Downloaded version before running it.
Now select the Already Downloaded tab. Highlight SHARE_GMROI_INFO and click Run.
Within about a day you should receive a confirmation e-mail that your uploaded file was received correctly. - If you don't participate you won't be eligible to receive the results. - This service is for jewelers with the Maintenance Plan. - Even if you don't plan to go to JCK this year, you can still participate. - The vendor phone numbers are used to identify vendors. If your vendor list doesn't have an identifiable vendor phone, the sales information for that vendor won't be included (regular, toll free, fax numbers are compared against a master list) - No identifiable store information is included in the reports.
Version 2.450 05/06/2013 ===============================================================
The Repair Reports have a new option to either exclude the unbilled jobs or to show only the unbilled jobs (jobs not yet attached to a sale.) Choose Full Selection from Repair Reports to see this choice.
The repair envelopes have been changed so that if you have filed in the "Mailing Label Name" box on the customer profile screen, that name will be printed instead of the usual First, Spouse, Last format. (E.g. you might want the envelope to show John Smith and Mary Adams instead of the usual John and Mary Smith.) This change will not affect a your envelope layout if you are using a customized layout that you adjusted yourself.
On the tag printing screen if you select a vendor code of just one letter or digit, in previous versions all items with all vendor codes starting with that character would be selected. Now only that one vendor code will be selected. [however, in general it is not recommended that vendor codes be just one character - three is preferred.]
In version 2.40 the address area (zone 2) of the sales screen was changed to show the spouse's name (if present). For certain customers the Spouse wouldn't show if there was too much other information such as a charge accounts and many phone numbers. That has been reformatted in this update.
[utils, sappv, sys2450, inexe]
Version 2.441 04/18/2013 ===============================================================
The web export option of the Inventory Report by Style now adds the Web Status and Web Category fields as available fields to be included in the export file. These fields are visible on the "Style Det." page of Inventory Status
The Internet phone search, updated in version 2.440 has been further adjusted because in a number of results the street address line could not be extracted and in this version the street address can be identified in many more cases.
Some problems with the texting of multiple customers via the Update Multiple Repairs screen have been resolved.
The formatting for the pick list of SMS-Text messages has been adjusted to make it easier to read - (especially the one on the customer notes screen which was the most awkward before.) This change will take effect after the first cleanup done with this version.
Version 2.440 04/12/2013 ===============================================================
You can now send Text / SMS messages to repair customers. From the Notes page of repairs, you can pick a message and send it if the customer has a mobile phone number.
You can also send texts to multiple repair customers simultaneously via the Repair Status Quick Update screen. I.e. you might enter a list of 10 jobs and simultaneously mark them all as complete and send the customers a text. The "Txt" column shows a check-mark by customers who have a mobile number.
You can also send Text / SMS messages to customers unrelated to repairs. This is from the Notes page of the customer profile screen.
Currently the SMS feature requires you to create an SMS account with Red Oxygen (www.redoxygen.com) and you enter your user-id and password and email into Shopkeeper via Preferences, Security, Web Service Settings, Configure Accounts. You can start with a test account at first to test the service. After that you can choose the level of account that you need. (i.e. number of SMS's per month.) Messages sent with trial account will have Red Oxygen publicity that non-trial accounts will not add.
You create a list of pre-made messages for repairs and customers by right-clicking the SMS message box and then you choose Edit Selections. There, you can add entries with a short name in the Selections column and the message at the bottom in the Text to Add box. Note that the message can contain merge codes that will be personalized for the customer. E.g. [First] becomes the customer's first name. [Job] becomes the repair number. Do include the [Square Brackets] Other merge codes are available, though less likely for SMS because the message should be short. [FullName] [Address1] [Address2] [City] [State] [Zip] [Country] [Phone1] [Spouse] [First+Spouse] [Last] ( These other merge codes may be used in the email part of VJS )
- - - - -
The feature to search the Internet to find customers and vendors by phone number has been updated again due to a further change in the format returned by www.411.com which was causing the address and phone number to *not* be found. [As a reminder, if you search for a customer or vendor by phone number, first Shopkeeper will check your own list and then if it is not found, will do an on-line search for that phone number. If found, the new customer or vendor's name and address will be automatically filled in. This option can be enabled or disabled via the Customer page of Preferences.]
From the Vendor Profile screen you can print mailing labels, envelopes and shipping labels [via 'Options' at the top] What is new in this version are additional formats which allow you to select from the three addresses of the vendor. Regular, Remittance and Service address.
A new option allows you to search for customers by social security number. This feature only applies to customers with in-house charge accounts. It can be useful when you open a new account to first check if that SSN has previously been used in a customer record.
The 'reconciliation' option of the checkbook report previously showed items that were already cleared so the report was not very useful. This has been corrected in the latest update.
[Genius/MWsecure autoswitch ]
Version 2.431 04/09/2013 ===============================================================
The Physical Inventory by Location option (added in v 2.420) previously did not show items that you scanned as being in a certain location if those Sku's had no record of ever being in those locations. Starting this version, those extra items will show as exceptions along with the other exceptions.
Fix for a problem introduced in last update that can prevent the Add to Existing Sku screen from closing. (also the Return to Vendor Screen and some others.)
Fix for an error message in the physical inventory exception report (the regular version, not the by-location version.)
Fix for a problem that could stop the new image web export option (see v 2.430 notes) with certain export configurations.
A progress indicator has been added to the new image export option added in version 2.430. If your export has a large number of image files to copy this step could take a long time and without the indicator it might have seemed that the program had frozen.
Added a "look-out" for Merchant Warehouse transactions processed if you have (accidently or otherwise) turned on their Demo Mode. If so, VJS will report NOT authorized.
Version 2.430 04/01/2013 ===============================================================
The inventory web export feature has a new optional choice to copy all the related images to a specific folder. For example if you were to create an export list of 100 items, just the related images would be put into the image-export folder. This would make it easier for your web person to copy those images to your website.
The inventory web export feature is accessed from the Full Selection screen of the Inventory Reports by Style. The copies of the image files are put in the Image-Export folder which is inside the VJS Reports folder located on the Windows Desktop. This picture copy option is *off* by default.
The Add to Existing Sku numbers feature which allows you to bump up the quantity of existing sku numbers now allows you to simultaneously change the cost and the retail. (This screen is sometimes used for low-value items that are not tagged. The normal received inventory sequence assigns new sku numbers for repeat styles.) You change the cost or retail in the grid/list of items at the bottom of the screen. (Access to the Cost is subject to security settings from Preferences.)
The security settings area of Preferences has a new security setting which can restrict access to editing closed repairs ( ones that have already been picked up.) Look for "Make Changes to Picked-Up Repairs" on the Sales Security page in Preferences.
Resolved an error message which could affect the Payment Spreadsheet Report under a rare combination of circumstances.
If you retrieve a pending layaway and manually change the date then any payments you apply to that sale (at this time) will get the manually typed sale date. This can be useful for people retroactively entering layaway payments from previous days.
Correction for the expense code registration with non-merchandise payables. In previous versions non-merchandise payables could result in checks not assigned to expense codes. (however, he official accrual reports were still correct in previous versions.)
Version 2.420 03/22/2013 ===============================================================
The Physical inventory exception report can now be run by location. For each count you enter you can enter a location and then you can run the report either for a single location or for all locations at once. From the physical inventory screen, click the "by location" box before running the report. (This option will not appear if you have not checked the Ask for Location When Entering Inventory - within Preferences.) You can also access this report via the Inventory Report by Location screen where you change the Report Organization to "Physical Inv Exceptions." This report shows just the exceptions, i.e. only the problems where the physical count does not match the Shopkeeper count.
As with the non-location exception report you can also run a Physical Inventory Comparison report. This has the same format, but instead of showing *only* the exceptions it shows all items in a particular location whether or not there are exceptions.
Selecting *any* of the "summary" options on the Sort By line will cause the exception report to summarize by location.
You can now make particular messages print on sales receipts for merchandise from certain vendors. In the vendor profile screen, add to the notes <<RCTMSG: Message Here >>, including the angle-brackets. The words you substitute for Message Here part will print. You can use this to remind customers of special vendor-specific warrantees, instructions, promotions, etc. If this feature becomes popular this message area may be moved to a dedicated sales receipt message are on the vendor screen.
(Note that there is a similar option using <<MSG: Message Here >> which shows an on-screen message for the sales clerk when you sell items from vendors. See Version 1.700 notes further below. )
[ccgeniusccmwvoid3]
Version 2.410 03/19/2013 ===============================================================
On the Vendor Maintenance screen, the vendor's markup information has been moved to the payment information page/tab. This way if the vendor screen appears while you record a special order, there is less chance of the customer seeing your markup policy.
In previous versions, the Payment Spreadsheet report did not show cash register paid-outs if they didn't have a reference. Starting this version such paid-outs (and receiveds) will show on this report.
The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report (introduced in version 2.360) has a version which shows Percent Change. Mathematically, an increase from selling zero of a category for zero dollars to selling 1 or 2 at $600 or $,200 is an undefined (infinite) percentage increase. However, it is common to "sense" these as 100% or 200% increases so this report now represents such increases from zero in this way.
Pictures should be added via drag and drop or the Picture Manager but sometimes users create pictures and manually name them and save them in the picture folder. Even though that's not the recommended approach, the current version and beyond will officially link that picture if the Sku is retrieved in the Inventory Status page. This also makes it easier to remove/delete pictures that have been inadvertently created.
[tageltchr13]
Version 2.402 03/12/2013 ===============================================================
The repair report with the "Brief" description previously also printed with a limit of 8 characters of the name. Now it can print more characters. (but long names may still be shortened unless you choose the Limited or Full Description.)
[webservcredoxygen] [laystate security]
Version 2.401 03/05/2013 ===============================================================
The Pandora Import program for Spring 2013 now has image files.
[dummy *** sku removed]
Version 2.400 03/04/2013 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the new inventory list for Spring 2013 including rings and dangles and charms. Note. The image files are expected to be available within a week but are not in this update. You can import the new catalog now so you can inventory your items and re-run the import when the update with pictures it released. Or, if you haven't yet received any spring 2013 items you might wait and choose to update once later on. (A new access code is required if you have *not* already entered a Valentines 2013 code.)
The address area (zone 2) of the sales screen now shows the spouse's name if there is one.
The option to re-run a recap of Z-Reports for a range of dates will now simultaneously create an Excel XLS version of the report in the VJS Reports folder.
If a dummy service/repair Sku has a standard image attached in previous versions adding a repair ticket (without an image) to that line would cause the sales receipt to not print an images. Starting this version the original picture will print if there isn't one with the repair record.
In the "Major Class Summary" version of the inventory report previous versions would not exclude the value of layaway items when the Exclude option was selected. (All the other versions of the report would exclude them)_ Starting with this update the major class summary version will also exclude them when requested.
Some areas of the sales screen have been optimized for improved speed. The degree of improvement will be more or less depending on the size of your files and the speed of your network.
For Eltron printers (i.e. certain Zebra brand printers that 'Speak Eltron Printer Language) a change in this update will avoid an extra tag which could have printed under certain conditions.
[improved detection of disconnected network drives and temporary reconnection option.]
Version 2.390 02/21/2013 ===============================================================
A new option in the Sales Defaults page of Preferences allows you program the cash tendered and cash change screen to round the change to the nearest 5 cents (or other coin such as 10 cents, etc) This is useful in Canada, and states which permit or encourage rounding - reducing the need for pennies. This does not affect credit-card or check payments and it also does not affect the officially recorded sale totals or payment amounts - it simply suggests a rounding for the customer change. This rounds both down and up, it is not a purely round-up option for the change.
Markup formulas can be entered by Major Code and by Vendor and by price-point. In previous versions the vendor profile screen did not let you correctly enter the number of cents for rounding the price and now it does.
Some previous versions would report an (inconsequential) error during the Cleanup, and this has been removed now.
VJS now tracks how long it has been since you have done a Cleanup and will prompt you to run a cleanup if it has been over a week. Similarly, there is a prompt if it has been over two weeks since the last "condense." Running these steps helps keeps the files correctly sorted and empties some "garbage,"
Version 2.380 02/19/2013 ===============================================================
The Repair Defaults Continued page in preferences has options to allow you to remove a number of fields from the repair screen in order to simplify it. While this page existed in previous versions, the options were not active for VJS - they were only active for JS-Classic.
Important note. If you suddenly are missing some boxes from your repair screen, visit this defaults page in Preferences to activate those fields.
The Repair Defaults page in Preferences has a new option to transfer the entire sales total to the estimate box in the repair details screen. If you activate this option then when you pop up the repair detail screen from the sales screen, the entire sale total for all lines and tax will be copied to the Estimate box of that repair ticket. You would only activate this option if you typically add several repair Sku's to a single sale but add just one repair envelope.
The suggested markup formula previously had a problem that could surface in cases where the major code description started with a number such as 14K. Even if that were not major code number 14 it would use the major code 14 markup formula. This problem is resolved in this version.
The Repair Reports have several sorting options, a new one starting this version is to sort in order of the date they were logged in.
The Time Cards Report feature now automatically creates an Excel XLS version of the results in the VJS Reports folder.
The inventory report has always has always defaulted to not showing zero-quantity items and has had the option to include or only show zero-quantity options. This update adds the options to show only items with a negative quantity or to exclude items with a negative quantity. This can help either find problems or to specifically show non-received special order items.
The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report introduced in version 2.360 previously did not allocate enough space to display sales totals over $1M and that has been increased starting in this update.
The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report introduced in version 2.360 has a new option to allow you to require that the archived sales file be included. The default Auto option searches archives sales only when sales over two years old are requested because by default sales under three years are in the current file. Skipping the review of archives sales speeds up the report. However, if you have manually purged more recent sales, you may want to force this report to also search the archive sales.
The Inventory Adjustments report has an option to filter based on the explanation wording. Previous versions had limitations here if the explanation was not in all capitals and with this update the case doesn't matter. Previous versions were limited to filtering based on matching the first words. This is still the default, but if your search words(s) start with an asterisk, the report will search anywhere in the explanation, not just at the beginning.
The itemized sales report can now include the vendor's invoice/memo number next to each item. This can help when handling memo billing discussions. This extra column appears when you choose to sort by Vendor.
Version 2.370 02/11/2013 ===============================================================
Two financial reports, Income Statement and Balance sheet are now available via the Accounting Menu. This is only applicable if you have the accounting module and use the checkbook within Shopkeeper.
The Two Date Range Sales Comparison report introduced in version 2.360 has a new option to allow you to sort by the highest performing vendor. Using the "Organize By" line you can now sort the vendors by sales, profit or units.
The Itemized Sales Report has an option to let you filter the report by department code. Previously it would only filter (include or exclude) for one department code even if you listed more than one. This update will now let filter by all the department codes you list.
The customer Excel export XLS files now include the spouse's/secondary email address in addition to the primary email address. This occurs when you choose either the Small or the Large Export option from the Customer Reports and Labels screen.
The Inventory Status screen previously would not exit if you changed the Quantity Received. This update solves that problem
In case of a cash payment with change due, the cash drawer is opened before the receipt is printed. This can help you make change while the change amount is still showing on the screen. If you do *not* want this "early" open, add the keyword NOPOPONCHANGE anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences.
[*msgdmyskusadd/uppclscod/spdtestV2]
Version 2.360 02/04/2013 ===============================================================
VJS has a new report option: Sales Summary Comparing Two Date Ranges. This report lets you report side-by-side comparisons of different date ranges. At every run, you can choose any two ranges, e.g. current month of this year vs. last year, or week before Valentine's this year vs. Last year. Unlike a similar report in JS-Classic, this version allows you to summarize by both Vendor and Major Class. Also it has a Percent Change version to calculate the increase or decrease per each line. There are also additional selection options such as Minor Code range, Exclude Memo, Exclude Special Orders.
The inventory Status Activity page has a new option to let you see the wish-list / quote items. This way you can select a specific Sku number and see who is interested in it.
* Misc. Correction to formatting of Cash Requirements Report and Sales Summary Report by Dept for the version sent to a PDF file.
[bta.mwgenius]
Version 2.350 01/25/2013 ===============================================================
The sales screen will now open the cash drawer when you choose No Receipt. Previously it would open only when you printed a receipt. [As before, set up your cash drawer either in Maintenance/ Preferences or in your Epson printer's Windows printer driver.]
When you issue a refund as a credit slip, the payment spreadsheet report previously put that amount as a negative in the Credit Slip used column. Starting this version, it puts it in the Issued Gift / Credit Slip column.
A new security setting allows you to restrict access to the Merge Customer Records feature. You can find this security setting on the Main Menu Security page of options within Preferences.
Another new security setting allows you to restrict access to the Customize Menu feature. You can find this setting on the More Security Settings page within Preferences. Note that even if users have access to Customize Menu, they still cannot select options that they are not supposed to have access to.
Under certain circumstances in previous versions the activity page of Inventory Status could get 'stuck' on a certain name when scrolling the sales list with the mouse-wheel. That has been resolved in this update. [ this situation would have been encountered very rarely - only with Sku's with many, many sales.]
The Main Menu was previously limited to 1600 pixels in width. This has been expanded to 2300 so that it can be expanded to cover the entire surface of today's larger monitors.
The Return to Vendor screen now makes it easier to locate a previous return ticket. Now you can type a vendor code and when you drop the list of returns, the list will be limited to that one vendor. Further, the most recent returns will show at the top of the list.
[storeidlen2]
Version 2.340 01/11/2013 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the inventory list and pictures for the 2013 Valentines Gift Sets, Language of Love Charms and Animal Dangles (An access code is required.)
[add lspn,lcmb,ledt,capnexch / xmlsubst]
Version 2.338 01/08/2013 ===============================================================
From the Buying History page of Vendor Maintenance, the list of invoices now includes columns for the invoice description / comments. This can help you locate invoices faster when they special comments.
Customizable access and customizable hiding of data fields, not just labels. [Also top-secret / ini ]
[error trapping when running utilities]
Version 2.337 12/26/2012 ===============================================================
Customizable on-screen labels. [top-secret; need-to-know basis. / ini]
[wish list duplicate check during cleanup.]
Version 2.336 12/20/2012 ===============================================================
Further improvements to the sales screen in terms of handling wish-list sales and actual sales when switching between different tickets. (This is related to and further to the changes in version 2.335, see below.)
Further Additions to Options, About from the VJS File Center.
Version 2.335 12/19/2012 ===============================================================
In previous versions there were sequences users could run to inadvertently remove Wish-list/ Quotes. One could also cause an actual sale to appear in the wish list. This update addresses all known such sequences to minimize these risks
[Changes for TJS / Java] [Addition of "About" option to the File Center]
Version 2.330 12/14/2012 ===============================================================
In the sales screen, once you have typed the first part of the Sku number (the major code) but have not yet selected a Sku number, previous versions would not allow you to make a correction. You had to delete the line by clicking the trash can and start again. Starting this version, provided you have not yet selected a complete Sku number you can make a change without having to delete the entire line.
The Month-End warning previously popped up on the morning of the last day of the month. Now it will wait until the afternoon![The month-end procedure from the Accounting Menu is quite quick and you typically do just step 1 and step 3.]
On the Notes page of Inventory Status is a new Search option with which you can search for items with certain words in the extended notes box. Click the Search Binoculars icon and then enter one or more words. The next item containing all of the words is sought. If you want to search for an exact phrase including spaces, enter that in quotes such as "Yellow Diamond" [but enter no other words outside the quotes.]
At the bottom of the sales screen is a Payment box which is designed to for the net payment amount you are accepting, e.g. enter or leave it as $157.20 if that's the amount you are paying. In case of a cash payment you are subsequently asked how much is tendered - where you could enter $160.
For cash sales, this initial payment box in previous versions has understood that an 'over payment' entered here most likely represented the cash tendered amount and transferred that to the cash tendered box. This feature is only activated when the amount is both 'too much' and a multiple of $10. (If you want change calculated for other tendered amounts, enter the Payment amount normally, and then enter the tendered amount in the Amount Tendered screen.
For Layaway Sales, this is not the case and a too-large figure is assumed to be an 'over payment' as perhaps more items are expected to be added to the sale.
This is all old behavior, what is new in this version is that if you specifically want an 'over-payment' for a layaway entered in this net payment box to be assumed to be the tender add the keyword ALLOWEARLYTENDER in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
With a recent change to the inventory entry screen, changing the manufacturer code on a new line did not make subsequent lines default to that alternative manufacturer code. Now that will apply to subsequent lines.
[TJS RFID change for Desktop Scanner]
Version 2.321 11/29/2012 ===============================================================
The last update could cause an error message during inventory entry. It's safe to ignore and continue - but was awkward. This update prevents that error message.
Version 2.320 11/28/2012 ===============================================================
Among other screens, the Inventory Status screen and the Repair tracking details screen show the first picture for the item or job. Double-clicking the picture takes you to the Picture Manager where you can see any other pictures for that item.
New in this update is a button that appears in the main inventory and repair screens to indicate if there are additional pictures. This way you don't have to open the picture manager just to see whether or not there are other pictures.
A recent version update added more safeguards against retrieving the same sale at two different computers simultaneously. but one of the side effects of those changes was that you could no longer retrieve a wish-list/quote sale directly by typing a sale number. This update reinstates that ability.
The email option from the customer screen now allows more than one attachment per email message. Separate each full filename with a comma or a semi-colon. (primarily this is for cases where you use the CDO direct II sending method.)
From the VJS File Center, if you have a stray (or temporary) set of books in the list of Last Used Company Files, you ca remove it by choosing More, then Remove Company From List. Previously you could also remove an entry by right-clicking in the list. The right-click method was too often done by mistake so it has been removed. ( you have to use the button now.)
A fix for a fairly rare error when saving an inventory report as an Excel XLS file.
The Mercury Payment Systems daily credit card batch report now includes a total.
In Preferences you can select logo files for receipts, appraisals etc. Some computers encountered errors when clicking the Browse button. This update has some changes expected to help those computers.
Version 2.311 11/16/2012 ===============================================================
Further needed adjustments to the Split Inventory change made in version 2.310 below
Version 2.310 11/15/2012 ===============================================================
In previous versions when running a customer report and exporting the list to a 'Medium' Excel file, VJS could export only up to 65,000 names and now that limit has been lifted. Note, however, that many spreadsheet programs are unable to open files with more than 65,000 names. VJS now shows you a warning when exporting such a large list that you may have to use Excel 2010 or higher to read such a long list.
Editing the same sale at two different computers is problematic so VJS doesn't usually allow that. A certain combination *did* allow that in previous versions but that combination now correctly prevents that in this update.
Inventory screens such as Return to Vendor, Deduct from Inventory, Add to Existing Sku's have a Print a List button. However, you need to Save the list before printing. In previous versions the warning messages weren't very clear as to why you got an empty report if you printed before saving. In this version, the message is more clear that you have to save before printing.
As you receive inventory where individual Sku's have a quantity of more than one, there is a Split button to let you distribute the quantity among several locations. In previous versions, certain situations would prevent the Split button working immediately after receiving an item (though they could be split later.) In this update, the immediate Split feature will work for all items.
The web site export option for inventory (via the inventory by style reports area) now creates up to six separate picture file columns, from two in earlier versions. [the combined column 'AllImages' with all picture references still exists.]
The invoices payable list on the buying history page of the vendor maintenance screen previously didn't reflect discounts taken and that has been corrected in this update.
Improved workflow when adding a new clerk in the Clerk Maintenance screen. (In previous versions, the Clerk box didn't show the new clerk initials immediately making it possibly unclear whether the new clerk had actually been added.)
Miscellaneous fix for when editing a return to vendor slip where some of the items have subsequently been removed from the inventory file.
Version 2.300 10/29/2012 ===============================================================
In some (rare) cases in previous versions, editing a previously saved sale and applying a minus number to change the discount and choosing to replace the old discount, could result in the wrong calculation. This has been resolved in this update.
In the sales screen the Dept Code box is generally not used on a majority of sales, so to speed data entry, after you press Enter or Tab from the Clerk box, the next box selected is the Sku Number box. A new option in Preferences, "Jump to Dept Code After Clerk", allows you to make the sales screen always stop at that box before the Sku box when you use the Enter or Tab key. A separate preference (available in previous versions) allows you to decide whether the Dept Code box must be filled in before a sale can be saved.
A new version of the Repair Report includes a new column showing the number of days a job was out a vendor along with an overall average number of days. To get this new version, choose to Sort By Vendor, do not include pictures, and do choose More Details/Columns. Note that to have this "productivity" column make sense you ought to choose only jobs sent "And Received Back", otherwise the figure would understate the number of days for jobs still out - because they'll take more days by the time they return.
When printing layaway statements, previous versions would print the date that you last aged for the month-end. That has been corrected to print the actual date that you specify on the layaway printing report screen (which you'd normally set to the current day.)
By default, the instructions and description boxes of the repair ticket screen accept only capitals - and those boxes may temporarily activate the Caps Lock button. If this behavior is bothersome, add the keyword NOCAPSLOCK anywhere in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences.
Version 2.291 10/13/2012 ===============================================================
Fixes a Sku lookup problem from the previous version in which, when you type a partial Sku number, the Sku lookup list doesn't jump to the right part of the Sku list - making it harder to browse.
Version 2.290 10/11/2012 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the inventory list and pictures for the October / Holiday 2012 Collection. This includes about 50 new items along with their images. (An access code is required. No extra charge if you have subscribed to the Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan. If you have Fall 2012 access code it will work for Holiday 2012 too.)
The "Text" version of the Cash Register Hourly Activity report was previously not organized by time; now it is sorted by hour of day
Version 2.285 10/09/2012 ===============================================================
In Preferences, there is an option "Transfer Repair Screen Estimates and Cost to Sales Screen." This is not a particularly new option - but if checked, then for a un-finalized sale only, changes to the estimate on the repair screen will change the price charged on the sales ticket. In previous versions there were certain cases where, if this option were *not* checked then the estimate could still transfer back to the sale (but still only for unfinalized sales.) In this update, unchecking that box will prevent the transfer in all cases. Either way, you need to consider which preference you want because some jewelers really do want an estimate change on the repair details screen to be the price charged, where other jewelers consider this just an estimate and only the priced specifically entered on the sales screen is the price to be charged to the customer.
[RF, Refck, xz, sales_pos, MWS4KeyMsg] Version 2.280 09/30/2012 ===============================================================
On the "Other" page of the Customer Maintenance screen there is a box for Clerk. If that is filled-in, then starting in this version any sale for that customer will automatically be assigned to that clerk. If you have turn on the option Automatically Fill In Clerk from Preferences, then *both* the customer-assigned clerk and the user who is logged-in will be assigned to the sale.
When printing receipts where you used integrated credit card processing, VJS allows you to add authorization and signature lines to the receipts. Previously there were four lines available, now there are six. These are set in the payments / credit card processing screen in Preferences
When you add a repair via the sales screen, the short description on the sales line normally transfers to the Instructions box on the repair detail screen. A new option will let you prevent that. To activate this new option add the keyword NOSALEDESCTOREP in Miscellaneous Options (note that a similar option has been available in VJS for years. The keyword REPDESCTODESC will send the sales line description to the repair Description box instead of to the Instructions box.)
If the Month-End Age and Month-End Reset steps have not been done before the beginning of the new month, a warning now prompts you to close the month.
[Checkbook Setup Tidy-Up; MW Report by Date Tidy-Up; Mems Daily Save]
Version 2.270 09/18/2012 ===============================================================
The Accounting Menu now has the Checkbook Setup Screen to allow you set the bank names and next check number and view balances. Security settings in Preferences allow you to control access to viewing and making changes.
The Inventory Adjustment Report now allows you to select the adjustment explanation starting word(s) If, for example, you do *not* want to record eBay sales in VJS but need to adjust the inventory, you could use Deduct from Inventory and start all such adjustments with the word eBay or Ebay Sales. You might use an explanation of Physical Inventory for adjustments following a physical. Then you would be able to run reports by any of those key words - along with date criteria.
Under certain rare circumstances, new appraisals could be given the same number as a previous appraisal. That has been addressed in this update.
Version 2.260 09/14/2012 ===============================================================
Finally! Customer merge is available in VJS. This combines the entire customer histories of two customer records into one. By default, this is located on the Maintenance Menu.
The spell check previously skipped over the first mis-spelled word and that has been prevented in this update. Note that there is a small side-effect of this which is that on the first mis-spelled word, moving the mouse over the spell-check area can make some of the buttons hidden until you move the mouse around. This effect disappears for the second and subsequent words.
Repair envelopes have a new option to allow you to not print the insurance value. This also removes it from sales receipts (if you include the repair details on sales receipts.) This option is on the Repair Ticket page of Receipt Options in Preferences, from the Maintenance Menu. This would not affect any customized repair envelopes.
A small "loophole" has been closed on the Major Class Code Maintenance screen. Previously, a certain combination of clicks would fail to make a dummy Sku number when a new major code was added and that has been addressed in this update.
Version 2.250 08/31/2012 ===============================================================
There is an option to automatically show the cost of each item on the sales screen. Of course, this option is normally turned off. To activate it open the second Sales Screen Defaults page in Preferences and check or uncheck the box Automatically show cost on Sales screen. You can also choose to show it only in code.
A change in the backup program can now show a warning instead of an error message when certain temporary backup files cannot be deleted.
The Itemized Sales Reports can now let you show sales based on the customer type codes recorded on the customer profile screen. Choose Full Selection to see the customer type option.
In the email screen from the Customer Maintenance there is Signature page where you can record some standard email body text. In previous versions, if you had chosen (from Preferences) for customer names and addresses to always be upper-case, then the email message also would be converted to upper-case. Starting this version, the message can be mixed-case even if the customer are forced to be upper-case.
Version 2.24 08/20/2012 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the inventory list and pictures for the Fall 2012 Collection. This includes about 121 new items along with their images. (An access code is required. No extra charge if you have subscribed to the Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan.)
All sales lines added to a sale which is classified as Special Order are also classified as special order. This can be useful for various sales reports so you can include or exclude special order sales and so they are exported to QuickBooks as special order items. It can be important to be able to separate them because special order sales show extremely short turn which can affect the GMROI calculations.
However, in case you flag certain sales as special order so that they are not immediately finalized when paid off you might not want each item to be flagged as special order and that is now possible with this update
To activate this new option add the keyword DONTFLAGSO in Miscellaneous Options
Note that even with this behavior activated, any item that is an actual special order item - which is added to the sale by choosing Options, Add Special Order - will still be flagged as special order.
If you use X-Charge / Accelerated Payments processing now when you run a charge, you can change from credit card to debit card processing. Once the X-Charge processing screen appears, choose Transaction, Credit/Debit then Debit Purchase or the shortcut (currently F4) You will need to check with your X-charge rep to verify you have the correct debit card reader.
After you send (successfully) an email within VJS The email screen previously waited for you to click the Exit button to close the form. Now it will close automatically and return you to the customer profile screen - unless you click somewhere in the email form or press a keyboard key within 2 seconds.
Version 2.231 08/14/2012 ===============================================================
In Version 2.20 and 2.30 there were some reports of payments on account (for In-House Charge Accounts) not correctly reducing the customer account balance.
That appears resolved in this update. If you have in-house charge accounts and have posted payments this month, it is suggested that you run the account audit utility in JS-Classic.
Choose File, Miscellaneous Options, Utility Programs, CHGBAL. This utility checks all accounts and shows you if any are out of balance.
Version 2.23 08/10/2012 ===============================================================
There is now an option to reassign a sale to a different customer if it was recorded under the wrong name. (In previous versions, there was a combination which could appear to do this but it did not actually change the name on a sale)
Choose Options at the top of the Sales screen then Assign to a Different Customer to see the steps.
On a related note, there is a new security setting in Preferences which can disallow changing the customer on a sale - based on the login security level.
From the Repair Reports (Full Selection page) there has been a Keywords option which would search the repair Notes page for certain words. Starting in this version it will search the instructions and description boxes in addition to the Notes.
The inventory report summarized by major code previously was not compatible with the option to show the replacement cost. I.e. that version could only show the actual cost.
Starting in this version, the summary inventory report by major code can show the replacement cost if you choose that option. (this version of the report still cannot show the cost in code.)
The Accounts Payable report has always had the options to: Show Rebates (Y/N) and Show Checks Paid (Y/N). However, these options were previously mis-labeled so it would have been hard to use these features before.
When entering two invoices in a row via the Inventory Entry screen, on the second invoice, some recent previous versions would suggest the manufacturer code of the first invoice. This has been corrected in this version.
When dates are entered with an unexpected range (e.g. if you type 12 and end up with year 1212) VJS has always attempted to correct the date. However, it is not always possible to guess. Starting with this version, if a date is entered anywhere in the program with a obviously incorrect date (e.g. a date more than a year in the future) you will be prompted to confirm. This can help reduce incorrect dates - but it can't prevent all incorrect dates.
In previous versions, when you retrieved a Wish list/Quote sale the date would appear to be blank. The actual date saved with the sale was correct, but this confusing display has been correct in this version.
The customer history report in JS-Classic previously would not show the clerk initials from sales entered via VJS but will now starting in this update.
The JS-Classic utility CHGLOC now has the option to NOT change the location of items which have zero quantity.
Version 2.221 07/27/2012 ===============================================================
When you run the Itemized Sales Report, an Excel XLS version of the report is put in the VJS Reports folder on the Windows Desktop. That feature has been available for a long time, but what is new is that if you change the Report Organization to the Sales Tax or Tax Summary version, the resulting XLS file will include additional columns with the customer address and state and zip. This may help you with your sales tax returns. These additional columns will also be included when you choose to include or exclude a state.
When you choose to include or exclude a particular state from the Itemized Sales Report you can now add an asterisk after the state name. This changes how the report interprets customers with an empty state box.
If you choose to Exclude NY* this means don't show sales with a customer address of NY and also don't show sales with a blank state. I.e. you may want to infer that blank states are *not* out-of-state.
If you choose to Include NY* this means only show sales with a customer address of NY and also included those with a blank state.
Version 2.22 07/26/2012 ===============================================================
The Pandora Catalog Import program adds the Sku's and pictures for the July 2012 additions of National Icons beads.
The Entire Customer History report has an additional new layout which shows a tax-inclusive total for each sale and for the entire customer history. From the Print Options dialog, change the report layout to "Customer History - Sales (w/Tax)" In addition, this version is more brief in that it does not include details for repairs, appraisals, etc.
The Outstanding Purchase Order Report was not previously very helpful because the value received tally was not being updated as items were received.
In the current version the received value will be updated as you receive items. Also, to help with previous purchase orders, there is a Recalculate button in the Purchase Order Entry screen. This can recalculate a single Purchase Order or the entire collection of purchase orders.
In the Sales area of Preferences, you can specify the allowable date range for sales. E.g. you can prevent sales being dated later than today or more than x days ago. Previously this was enforced for new sales only, not when editing a sale but with this update, the date is also checked when editing a sale.
In Preferences you can set an option so that the Inventory Status screen normally shows the cost in code. If you show a sku in inventory status you can double-click the cost code to switch (temporarily) to digits. However, in previous versions this combination would limit you to entering costs up to $10,000. Now this combination will not have that limit (i.e. the cost can be entered up to $10,000,000)
A new option allows you to require that the clerk box on the repairs screen be filled in. You can find this option in the Repairs screen of Preferences.
In previous versions, if you retrieved a repair by first opening the Customer screen, sometimes the repair image would not show unless you went to the Picture Manager. This extra step is no longer needed from this update on.
When you retrieve a repair that already has extra details on the "Notes" page, an asterisk appears on the "Notes" tab at the bottom of the screen to alert you to this.
On the Accounts Receivable Payments on Account screen, the "minimum payment" box previously showed just the new minimum payment due for this month. Starting in this version that box will add in any past due amounts and will subtract any payments already made this month. This can help to request the correct payment from a customer.
In the cleanup screen, some options which should not generally be run unless requested by Compulink have been hidden (although you can un-hide them.)
In previous versions, correcting the date on a credit slip payment wasn't, alone, enough to save that change. (i.e. you would have had to make other changes) Starting this version, you can change the payment date and exiting will save the change.
A small numbers of users' computers would play the extended VJS sound effects even when that option was turned off in Preferences. That should be solved with this update.
Some VJS warning sounds will continue to sound regardless. If you want even those turned off, add the keyword FEWERSOUNDS anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box of Preferences.
Note that certain warning message boxes may still play a beep sound. This is a computer-wide choice (for all programs) beyond the control of VJS. You can override via the sounds area of the Windows Control panel. E.g. you can find the "Critical Stop" entry and choose "(none)" for the sound.
[weas]
Version 2.212 07/02/2012 ===============================================================
Correction of a display problem introduced in version 2.210 in the appraisals area of the Customer X-Tra Search screen.
A change has been added which can help the font options of certain tag printers with imperfect Zebra compatibility/
[voidmanualmsg]
Version 2.21 06/30/2012 ===============================================================
You can now widen the Customer X-Tra Search screen and each computer will remember the preferred width. This can let you see more columns of customer information. The repair list and appraisal list at the bottom right have been reorganized to take advantage of this to show you more details.
Retrieving several previous sales in succession without clearing the screen first, could, in previous versions cause a copy of that previous sale to be kept in the quote/wish list file, which could hinder your ability to edit it later on.
With this update the previous sale will either auto-clear if no changes have been made, or a warning will stop and ask you to either save changes or discard changes.
A new security option can restrict the ability to make delete payments on previously recorded sales. See the Sales Security Page in Preferences. If this security setting is invoked, the user will still be able to delete a payment on a sale that is in the processing of being entered where the sale has not been saved or printed yet.
The Pandora Catalog Import program adds the Sku's and pictures for the summer 2012 additions of Murano Glass Beads.
The Relocate Major Code feature (choose Options from the Major Class Code screen now creates an Excel file of the results when the trailing five digits of the Sku Numbers are changed. The Excel file includes the quantity and the items with zero quantity are placed at the end of the list so that the items to be retagged are at the top.
A slowness in the Relocate Major Code feature has been resolved.
Version 2.20 06/18/2012 ===============================================================
The inventory report with the picture option active was previously available only when sorting by Brand or Sku. Now you can include pictures when sorting by Cost, Price, Description, Date.
Sorting by Part Number is also a new option on the inventory report is also a new option and is also available with the picture option.
Some computers had a problem with the "File Selector" - such as when browsing for an image file to import or a physical inventory file of Sku numbers to import.
This update includes an alternative File Selector option. If you have experienced this problem you can activate this option by adding the keyword GETFILE2 anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box of Preferences.
In the Repair Quick Update screen there is now a Remove button at the top of the screen to remove a job from the update list. This does not remove the job from the live repair list - only from the list of jobs to be updated.
In the Repair Quick Update screen, next to each job is the sale "line number." For jobs attached to a sales ticket, you may have several jobs with the same repair number on different lines and this change can clarify things.
In JS-Classic, the 40-column repair ticket will print more lines of the instructions or description. Previous versions were limited to 5 lines each.
In JS-Classic a certain combination of options could result in an error message which has been fixed in this update.
In JS-Classic, the accounts receivable payments screen will now show you a list of some recent payments.
Version 2.190 06/05/2012 ===============================================================
Repair (and sales) numbers are limited to nine characters. In previous versions you could sometimes not retrieve jobs with all nine characters used when you typed the number. (though you were able to pick them off the list.) That has been resolved in this version.
A difficulty in retrieving previous sales may have appeared in the last update. This is resolved in this update.
When pressing Enter or Tab on the customer screen, there are some boxes which did not highlight in the expected order (the email boxes for example.) This has been cleaned up to make that screen easier to navigate.
When entering new sales, the first box to be active/highlighted is usually the Sku Number box. For a long time, there has been an option to make the Clerk the first active box. This version adds the option for the Date box to be the first box active. This would mainly be used by people who are entering the tickets for several days after-the-fact. To turn on this option, check the box "Jump To Date First For New Sales?" on the Sales page of Preferences.
When you send an Email to a customer (from the Customer profile screen) you may have entered a standard message. This message may now include "Merge Codes" which are replaced by information from the customer screen. For example, adding any of these codes (including the square brackets) [FullName], [First] [Spouse] [First+Spouse] [Address1] [Address2] [City] [State] [Zip] [Phone1]anywhere in your message - will fill in the appropriate words from the customer screen for that customer.
Version 2.180 05/24/2012 ===============================================================
The commission report now calculates how many sales tickets per clerk had more than one item; i.e. how many sales tickets had add-on items. This is on the version which itemizes each sold item.
The QuickSale option in previous versions sometimes repeated the previous customer - when you might have wanted to use the generic Cash Sale customer. This has been fixed in this version
The Inventory by Location Report now has the option to show the Replacement Cost instead of the purchase cost.
When running Inventory by Location reports, previous versions would show related locations to that requested. For example, selecting A would show locations A, A1, A15, etc. Starting in this version, selecting A1 will show just A1. To select All A's you can type A* or to show all locations starting with A1 you can type A1*
The image import feature will now accept image files with the extension .jpeg. However, those pictures will be saved with the more standard .jpg extension. [You can import images either by dragging them onto the No Image Saved icon on any inventory item.]
When you choose "Company Check" as the payment method for negative payments this means you're issuing the customer a refund check. What's new in this update when you choose that option is that the Windows clipboard is filled with the customer name, address and refund amount in numbers and words. You may be able to paste this into a check program or word processor to print the check.
If you need to change a customer name, you Ctrl-Click the last name from the customer maintenance screen. In previous versions if you had the unusual case of a last name starting with a space, this change customer tool would not recognize the removal of the leading space, but starting with this version it will.
For the pop-up calendars for date fields, typically Sunday or Monday is the first column - which day can be affected by settings in your copy of Windows. Starting in this version you can chose which day to be the first column by adding the keyword FDOW anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences. Follow FDOW with a number, EG FDOW1 or FDOW2 or FDOW7, etc. The best selection can depend on your Windows settings and whether you have CALENDARV2 activated (see below) [This stands for First Day Of Week]
Not new, but on the same subject, if you add the keyword CALENDARV2 in Miscellaneous Options you'll get a different calendar - one with two months at a time.
Version 2.170 05/08/2012 ===============================================================
A new security option can restrict the ability to make changes to pending (non-finalized) layaways. See the Sales Security Page in Preferences. If this security setting is invoked, the user will still be able to receive a payment.
Add the minor code description to the export file for the itemized sales report [often used by BIG buying group.]
You can now print on sales receipts the data-entry time of each payment. To activate this option add the keyword PAYMENTTIME anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box of Preferences.
The Hot Seller / Reorder report would previously show some items that were still in stock even if you chose to show only zero-quantity items. That has been fixed in this version.
In some versions the Hot Seller / Reorder report would not show the sales retail total. This has been fixed in this version.
The invoice "drill-down" from the Inventory Status Screen which was introduced in version 2.130 did not initially work for memo-type invoices, but now memos are supported for this feature.
Version 2.161 05/01/2012 ===============================================================
Prevent an unnecessary error message when backing up images.
Version 2.16 04/28/2012 ===============================================================
The Simple Layaway Report can now let you select only the special order sales - or to exclude them. Similarly, you can choose to show only those sales with zero balances. This is a report you can review to see if there are any paid-up special order sales that need to be finalized.
The Assemble Disassemble screen now refers to the same security setting needed to delete inventory as does the Inventory Status screen; i.e. the Delete Inventory Items security setting in Preferences. This also applies to removing an item (or the entire invoice) via the Inventory Entry screen.
The appraisals now include the $ sign in the value area. (This won't apply to any custom layouts you have previously created.)
You can now reset the number sequence for the return to vendor memos simply by adding a new return memo with a manually entered number. Subsequent memos will continue on from the following number.
Users of Mercury Payment Processing previously had to use the Mercury on-line screens in order to process a negative (return) credit card charge. Now, negative charges can be processed via VJS. Note that when you process a return, you can use only a previously used credit card. A list of previous payments for that customer are shown so you can pick the card to credit.
The backup option previously did not backup images and that feature has now been activated. If you have a large volume of images files and backup to memory sticks, verify that your memory sticks have sufficient free space.
Version 2.15 04/19/2012 ===============================================================
When you receive an invoice of merchandise from Vendor XXX, the Manufacturer Code for each item defaults to XXX which you can change in case the seller of the item is not the same as the brand. In the current update if you change the Manufacturer Code for the first item to YYY (i.e., not the Vendor Code), the subsequent lines will assume YYY - instead of reverting back to the vendor code XXX. One area where this is especially useful is where you are invoiced by a buying group where you want all the items to have a different manufacturer than the vendor and would prefer to not have to manually change each line.
The price code option previously did not accept the option for decimals and it now does. In addition, it allows the same option to put the decimal code *after* the price code if the character for the decimal is a non-letter and a non-digit (e.g. !@#%^, etc.)
Sales can be assigned a "Department Code" so that you can run reports based on "something interesting" about the sale - other than the merchandise major or minor codes or the clerk, because reports based on those are already available. Some uses could be a bride's initials (so you could report all sales for that bride) or a Code representing response to a certain promotion, or a Wholesale code so you can separate those sales, etc.
This feature has been in VJS all along. What is new is the option to automatically fill in the Dept Code on each sale where you can set a different code for each computer. If wanted, this feature can be activated on the "Local Defaults Cont." page of "Preferences."
The Itemized Sales Report has a new "Qty Left" option. This is a type of audit report such that it shows only sold items that have a remaining quantity in stock. I.e., for most sold items you'd expect zero remaining, so these are items you may want to check. Of course, there are valid reasons to have a remaining quantity such as adjustments, or offsetting return sales, but these items are worth a look. Choose Full Selection from the Itemized Sales Report screen to see this option. ( Sort by Sku not vendor, etc.)
[wpf]
Version 2.14 04/05/2012 ===============================================================
For those with the Maintenance Plan, the newest, second- quarter 2012 Chamilia catalog update is available. This time it includes the Chamilia UPC barcode numbers so you can scan the baggies when you receive them. Also this time, the entire picture catalog is downloaded and integrated. [email us to request this catalog]
Addition of the Cash Register Journal Report to the Sales Report Menu. This is a simple list of payment activity shown in the order they were typed in.
In the sales screen price box, if you changed the price and pressed Tab in the previous versions the price would not change - you needed to press Enter or click elsewhere. Now, you can press Tab or Enter and the change is saved.
Most side-by-side receipts now print a zero price in red on the right-hand copy now. Previously zero prices were not printed on the right-hand copy.
Version 2.13 03/30/2012 ===============================================================
From the Inventory Status Screen you can now "drill-down" into the invoice on which that item was received. Click the new green arrow to the right of the invoice number box which will take you to the inventory receive (or edit) an invoice screen.
Similarly, from the Vendor Maintenance screen, on the Buying History tab is a list of invoices. There you can double-click an invoice to drill-down into that invoice entry/edit screen.
If you use integrated credit card processing at point of sale you can now choose to print an additional copy of the receipt - but only for those sales which include a credit card charge. From the Credit Card Defaults section of Payment Options in Preferences, there is a new line at the bottom "Print Extra Receipts After Credit Card Authorization"
Version 2.12 03/19/2012 ===============================================================
Addition of the Inventory Adjustment Report on the Reports Menu. You can select by vendor, date, adjustment type and you can choose whether or not to include pictures, costs and explanations.
The "small blue" Add Inventory Screen adds a single item at a time - typically for adding a single special order at a time. Normally this needs to request the cost so that the retail can be established. Now the cost box will be unavailable if security settings disallow access to the cost.
The Credit Slip Report has long had the option to show only the slips which are not cleared. Now this version of the report will also omit slips with zero balances. This can result in a "cleaner" report [Of course, such slips should also be flagged as cleared, but some users zero slips out but don't clear them.]
In some versions of JS-Classic, the Mid-Month accounts receivable statement would not itemize the payments. This has been corrected.
An unnecessary SSL security notice previously appeared when processing via Mercury. This has been removed.
Fixed an error message that could occur under certain conditions when exiting the Enter Existing Inventory screen.
Version 2.11 03/13/2012 ===============================================================
Added CC and BCC support when sending email using the "Direct II - CDO" sending method - both within VJS and in the standalone E-Mail Merge program version 2.2
VJS creates XLS versions of many reports. Previously it used a very old version 2 of XLS (for widest compatibility.) However that file type didn't correctly support 4-digit years so now VJS uses a more current version of XLS, which does.
The Commission/Sales By Clerk report has a new version which summarizes to one line per month per clerk. To run this version, choose Clerk Monthly for the Sort-By option.
Running a standard inventory report by Sku number has always automatically created an XLS file. With this update the XLS file will include the image name. This can be useful if you prefer to send your inventory list to your web site by Sku number instead of by the more usual style number method.
From the Major Class Code screen you can specify a G/L code to be used when sales are transferred to QuickBooks In many cases you do not want to specify a G/L code per each major code (because you'd use the standard settings in QuickBooks Link.) But, before it could be difficult to not specify a G/L code. Now it is easy to leave that blank.
Version 2.10 03/01/2012 ===============================================================
Improved support for USB point-of-sale pole displays.
Improved network handling in the physical inventory exception report. (i.e. when two users have the inventory file open.)
Similar improved network handling when updating the style number on existing Sku numbers.
A formatting change on the accounts receivable can help identify charge customers without a full customer profile in the customer file.
Version 2.00 02/29/2012 ===============================================================
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the inventory list and pictures for the March 2012 Collection. This includes about 250 new items and about 400 cost and price changes which are mostly decreases. (An access code is required. No extra charge if you have subscribed to the Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan.)
In the Report Center, the list of reports in the drop-list at the top (Zone1) is now sorted alphabetically to make it easier to navigate.
In previous versions, retrieving a old sale from the archive file and printing it could put a copy of that sale in the quote/wish list. There was a another (somewhat convoluted) way that you could previously retrieve an old sale and have a copy save in the quote/wish-list file. This has been stopped with this update.
Some users were accidentally saving actual sales with payments as quotes and so they would not post to the actual sales files. With this update if you try to save a sale which has payments as a quote there will be a difficult to ignore prompt warning you that that is unusual and asking for confirmation.
When processing credit cards via X-Charge, the sales screen is now "locked." This is to prevent accidental typing there or misdirection of the credit card reader card information into the sale screen.
In the Interstore Transfer feature of JS-Classic, previous versions would send the inventory weight information only for items which were valued by weight. Now, the weight for non-weight-valued items will be sent. Because this is "descriptive" this weight will not *add* to the weight at the receiving store, but will replace the previous value.
Version 1.99 02/18/2012 ===============================================================
In the Sales Security Settings area of Preferences is the selection "Change Sales Clerk." Previously this pertained to the clerk setting on the customer profile screen. Now this same setting can prevent changing the clerk on an existing sale. In case changes are legitimately needed, see below for information on the Manager Override feature.
The Hot Seller Report has not previously included sales figures for pending layaway items. Now it will include those pending layaway items if you choose to exclude from the inventory figures the layaway items (i.e. if you include the layaway items in the inventory count then you can't include the same item in sales.)
When you record a cash payment and specify an amount tendered, both the amount tendered and the change are stored in the payment history and the cash register reports. If you prefer, you can now choose for the amount show as a single net amount figure. To activate this option add the keyword COMBINECHANGE anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box of Preferences. On-screen, however, you will continue to see the change amount as you make the payment.
The X and Z Reports can now optionally *not* show the to-date (previous) sales figures. If you want to omit that line you can set the security option 'X/Z-Report To-Date Figures' to a higher number. This is set in the security settings area of Preferences. If you don't want that information to print even for a manager-level user, set this security requirement to 11.
[js2vjs]
Version 1.985 02/06/2012 ===============================================================
The commissions report / sales report by clerk now includes the calculations for number of sales tickets per clerk (not just number of items) and the average number of items per ticket and the average total sales amount per ticket. This information can be used to gauge add-ons and and effort per sale. These calculations are included if you choose the version sorted by Clerk Initials & Date and the Clerk Summary
When you run a customer report and choose the "Large" export list option, the mobile/cell phone column is now included (along with the Home and Work numbers, which were previously already included.)
When you use "Add to Existing Sku Numbers" the report that you can print previously used a notation of negative numbers for additions. (This was because it shared the same layout as the deduction report.) However, that notation could be confusing so in this update positive numbers are used for the additions. (And the inventory deduction report still uses positive numbers to imply deductions.)
In the Inventory Status screen it is now harder to accidentally change the valuation, by weight vs. by piece) of price and cost. Previously you could <Enter> or <Tab> into that box, but now you have to specifically click in that box to make a change.
Version 1.981 02/03/2012 ===============================================================
Some further adjustments to the option to enter inventory by cost code. In places, certain cost values were being shown in digits and now they are hidden - including the invoice total which was previously visible in some areas.
The new decimal option for cost codes has been added to JS-Classic
A problem printing an interstore transfer report in JS-Classic has been addressed.
Version 1.98 02/03/2012 ===============================================================
The inventory by location report where each Sku item is shown now includes the cents for retail and cost. The more summarized versions are as before and are more succinct, showing just whole dollars.
You can now enter cost codes for new items in the Enter Inventory screens. This feature is active if the user's security level doesn't allow viewing the cost. This feature requires that the cost code mnemonic in Preferences have 11 characters so it can handle cents.
Separate from the above, but related, the cost codes have a new option for handling decimals. Frequently the cost code mnemonic is entered as a 10-character code therefore the cost code on the tag is shown for the rounded whole-dollar value. If you have an 11-character code, the 11th character takes the place of the decimal point. [So far, this is as before] What is new is that if your 11th character is a non-digit and a non-letter, such as: * @ ) ] ; , / etc then every cost code will be the cost value in cents followed by this 11th character. E.g. for a mnemonic of TOURMALINE* then $123.45 becomes a cost code of TOURM*
This new optional format might be more presentable. This feature is related to the above new feature because entering inventory with cost codes requires cents and requires and 11-character cost code mnemonic.
You can now enter cost codes for new items in the Enter Inventory screens. This feature is active if the user's security level doesn't allow viewing the cost.
[memrel] Version 1.975 01/27/2012 ===============================================================
The Itemized Sales report where you choose to Sort By Date and where you also choose the Summary version has been reformatted to take fewer lines so that it is tidier and easier to read.
In Preferences there is the option "Ask for customers' mailing label salutation". Previously this worked only for JS-Classic, but now if you uncheck it the mailing label name box on the customer profile screen will not be available. (It's often a good idea to turn off this feature as a special mailing label name format is rarely needed.)
Version 1.974 01/16/2012 ===============================================================
The Repair Reports screen adds the option to print 3-across mailing labels for customers. E.g., you might want to select all repair jobs that have been completed for more than two weeks but which are not yet picked up and print mailing labels for those customers to add to a reminder postcard.
Version 1.972 01/10/2012 ===============================================================
Some of the lines of the Snapshot Inventory Aging Report were repeating "24 Months" in previous versions and this is resolved in this update.
The commission/clerk sales report allows you to specify a price range in case you want to highlight the higher-end items. Previously this selection was limited to 100,000 now you can specify up to 10,000,000.
[MW Open Batch Report Layout]
Version 1.97 01/04/2012 ===============================================================
A problem in deleting the old physical inventory counts has been resolved with this update. (Prior to starting a new physical count you need to erase the old counts.)
It is now easier to correct the month-end tracking dates from the month-end screen. In previous versions, security options could cause this to not save.
The time card entry screen can save a short comment of up to 15 characters. Previous versions allowed you to type more than 15 characters even though they couldn't all be saved. The update now restricts the typing to 15 to prevent confusion.
Miscellaneous Update for Mercury Credit Card Processing.
[traceunlock]
Version 1.96 12/29/2011 ===============================================================
A new report option is available. You can now run reports on purchase orders via the Reports Menu. You can select by date, buyer, vendor and you can select either pending or fulfilled orders.
On the Time Card screen you can normally change the time in case you couldn't clock in at the start-work or end-work time. However, the time card reports will show any adjustment. In this version, if you want to disallow any changing of the time, you can find the security setting "Able to change time on time-card entries:" in the Main Menu Security II page in Preferences.
In case a non-related repair and a sale end up with the same number a change in this update will prevent the repair details from showing on the non-related sale.
[xy118, mwrpt, myfx]
Version 1.95 12/28/2011 ===============================================================
The GMROI sales reports previously would only report sales from the Current sales file which is normally the past 2 to 3 years. Now you have the choice to run either on the current sales file or the Archives sales file (for older sales.) Choose Full Selection on the GMROI report screen to see the choice "Archived Data" (this choice may have appeared before but was not active.)
The Commission Report(or Sales Reports by Clerk) now allows you to run the report for an individual customer. Choose Full Selection to see the choice "Customer Number." (this choice may have appeared before but was not active.) Note that you may need to look up the customer number form the Customer Maintenance screen before using this option.
In the sales screen where you want to record a returned item you choose either Options (in-line) then Return to Stock. Or you can manually type negative-one in the quantity. Previously, if you typed -1 and then clicked directly on the Payment box at the bottom the -1 would not "take", i.e. you had to tab and press OK or click OK. In the new version the -1 will register even if you do skip the OK and click directly in the payments box.
When you save a cash sale where the payments don't match the total, you are warned and prompted to either "Go Back" so you can record the payment or to convert the sale to a Layaway. Previously the default response (if you were to simply press <Enter>) was to convert to a Layaway. In the new version the default response is to "Go Back." This can help prevent accidentally recording ' Layaway sales. It can also help prevent accidentally saving a Wish-List/Quote sale as a committed Layaway.
On the Extended Detail page of Inventory status, the cost box for the center and side stones were previously limited to $9,999. This has not been changed to a maximum of $999,000.
Version 1.94 12/10/2011 ===============================================================
A new 3-part receipt layout has been added. Certain combinations of detail on multi-part receipts can cause the last page to (inexplicably) not print. If you use the 3-part receipt and have this pagination problem you can try this new receipt layout "42 3-Part Receipt - Letter-Size - Raised Summary"
The "Activity" page of the Inventory Status screen shows the adjustments for each item. If the wording of the adjustment includes the word "Cost" the new version will not show that wording for users who do not have access to the cost.
Applying a payment to a layaway or special-order sale always brings the date of the overall sale forward. This is quite important for sales dating. However, if you have a special need for this to NOT occur, the current version has a way to override this which we don't recommend in most cases. To activate this option, go to Preferences and add the keyword DONTUPDATESALEDATE anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box. You can, of course, change the sale date manually,' as needed.
The inventory Web Export feature can now create export files where the inventory details lines are created as multi-line fields. Note that many web systems cannot accept such data so the default behavior remains the creation of a separate field for each line of detail text. To activate this option, go to Preferences and add the keyword MULTILINEINVEXPORT anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box. You can also choose a special line-break marker instead of the usual carriage return/line-feed - by adding an extra character after the keyword. For example using a keyword MULTILINEINVEXPORT^ would make the ^ (caret) character the line-break marker.
In previous versions, when running the Sales Payment Spreadsheet to cover a time greater than one day layaway sales with certain combinations of payment dates could appear as un-finalized even though they were finalized in that date range. This has been addressed in this update.
The inventory Web Export feature can now export up to 30 lines of inventory detail - up from 10 in previous versions. (see notes in V 1.79 to 1.83 below for more information on that feature.)
The portion of an in-house charge sale "paid" with an addition to the in-house account does not normally show as a payment on sales receipts. If you would like to be able to show that amount on a specific line on the receipt, that is now possible. To activate this option, go to Preferences and add the keyword PRINTONACCT anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box.
A new option allows you to turn off the warning when you select from the sales screen a Sku number with zero quantity. This can be set by major code - perhaps for a category of items that you have decided to not track accurately and which you leave at zero. Open the Major Class Code maintenance screen and go to the "Other" page and type Z for the Alternative Type. Note that even without this setting, Shopkeeper does not give you a Zero Quantity warning when you select a repair Sku.
It is now possible to add a repair tracking screen / envelope to a non-repair item. For major class codes that need this behavior, open the Major Class Code maintenance screen and go to the "Other" page and type R for the Alternative Type. This way, the sales screen will present a "Repair" button on sales lines for items in that class code instead of the usual "Appraisal button."
Corrected an error message in the Relocate Inventory screen which appeared during a previous recent update.
From the Picture Manager screen, the option to make a certain image the first-shown picture has been clarified visually to make it easier to see. The wording has also changed from "Default" to "Primary Image." Also, previously, when you clicked the thumbnails at the top left corner the Default checkbox didn't change to reflect the currently selected picture - but now does.
Version 1.93 11/29/2011 ===============================================================
You can now disable any payment type from the payment options list. I.e. you could disable gift cards, personal check or even cash. You might do this in order to reduce the chance of selecting unsupported payment methods. In previous versions only credit cards could be disabled. This option is set from the Payment Types page in Preferences on the Maintenance Menu.
If you create a new sale and add repair details or appraisal details, then, *before* ever having saved it you Delete the sale, previous versions would not delete the repair or appraisal details. In the current version you are asked if these related details should be deleted or not.
Previous versions could allow you to retrieve the same sale at different computers on the network at the same time. This sometimes led to problems so the current version now prevents a second person from retrieving the same sale at the same time.
Changes have been made to the receive inventory screen when unwanted items are deleted as you log in inventory. There was some 'odd' behavior in certain cases which has been improved.
The Sales Report by Clerk / Commission Report can now create an XML file along with the XLS file when you choose the Export option and when you sort by Clerk and Customer. In addition to sales details, these export files contain customer details which could be imported into a shipping program or email program, for example.
When printing repair envelopes, it is now possible to print the trade shop/vendor's address and phone number. At this time, none of the pre-made layouts include this information but you can request from Compulink the needed steps to add this to one of your custom layouts.
From the Inventory Status screen you can add one or several different Sku's to a mini-list of items for which to print tags by clicking on the "Print a Tag" icon at the bottom right corner. For the past few versions, this list appeared to show many copies of the item you clicked (but it didn't actually cause multiple extras to print). This visual anomaly has been corrected in this update.
Version 1.92 11/15/2011 ===============================================================
When retrieving a layaway with a balance due, the cursor now jumps directly to the payment box. This can save some keystrokes or mouse clicks.
The sales screen performs additional verification to prevent a blank sales date being allowed. On the same tack, the payment spreadsheet report will issue a warning if it detects any blank dates.
Fixed is an error message that could occur when printing credit slips for customer returns.
Managed lookup lists have a further change such that when users review a preview record (sale, repair, etc) which contains an entry that is no longer on the official list and where the user doesn't have Add privileges, the old item will not be added to the list. [see version 1.91 for more details on Lookup Lists.]
The Customer Reports and Labels Report screen has the choice "Prices." Previously this wasn't very clear that it meant that while scouring the customer buying history, only consider items which were individually priced over a certain amount. The prompt now reads "Prices Over" and a mouse-over tool-tip explains this.
[ftpsnd]
Version 1.916 11/04/2011 ===============================================================
The ability to change the date of a payment on a sale or on a gift certificate or on a payment on in-house charge account is now back. This used to be available, but disappeared in a previous update.
Version 1.915 11/02/2011 ===============================================================
* As with update 1.911 this update also requires a "Data Structure Update" - see 1.91 notes below for more details ------------
The version of the Zip Code Report of customer purchases has been updated a) because previously the grouping was not correct b) to print in three columns for a more succinct report.
Additional capabilities have been added to the Bonus Points feature. If you use Bonus Points email Compulink to request more details.
Changes necessary for inter-store inventory transfer following the changes in version 1.91
Version 1.91 (1.86 - 1.91) 11/01/2011 ===============================================================
** Important Note For Users of Shopkeeper QuickBooks Link ** After running this update you will also need to update QB-Link to Version 3.50. You can find the 20MB update (not the full installer) at this page: http://www.jewelryshopkeeper.com/qblink.htm
* Note For All Users Unlike most updates, this update will require a "Data Structure Update" which means that a backup will be requested first. For those running a network version of VJS, all computers will need to be out of VJS while the first computer runs this backup and Structure Update. After this first computer runs the update, all additional stations must also run the update. However, they can run the update while others are in VJS.
------------
Many data boxes in VJS are "Managed Drop-Down Lookup Lists." which allow you to create pre-made lists of choices. For example, customer types, repair locations, etc. You can manage the list by right-clicking the box and choosing Edit Selections.
The important change in this area is that you can now prevent users from adding new entries to the list of available choices. Previously users found that they could end up with many unwanted variations of, say, customer types, repair locations, etc.
To add restrictions, right-click any managed lookup list and choose Edit Selections, then enter a high required security level to the Add New Entries box and Make Changes to the List. You can even prevent yourself (the manager) from accidentally adding new entries by setting the required level to 11. However, you could still make changes when needed by either choosing Edit Selections or by choosing Lookup Lists in Preferences from the Maintenance Menu. The Make Changes to List security option refers to the ability to right-click and choose Edit Selections.
Manager, deleting multiple lines (e.g. unnecessary duplications) is now more intuitive. [right-click any managed lookup list and choose Edit Selections, or choose Look-Up Lists from Preferences.)
When using the Add to Existing Sku Numbers feature, at the top is a box to enter an inventory location which is optional. If it is left empty, then by default items are assigned to the existing location code of each item. If this is filled in, then this is where each added item will go without regard to where the Sku was previously (or still is.) If receiving a shipment of items destined for a particular location this will save time and increase accuracy over typing the location for each item.
The notes/comments area on the vendor screen was previously limited in length to l50 characters. Now the vendor notes length is unlimited. As before, when you run vendor reports, you can choose to see only those vendors with certain key words in the notes/comments. E.g. you might choose to show only the vendors with the keyword DIAMOND-DEALER.
The vendor screen has a new box on the Other Addresses page where you can record the service address. I.e. returns may need to be sent to an address other than the accounting offices. For now this is for on-screen use only; it doesn't print on labels.
The commission report can simultaneously create an Excel file version with additional columns beyond those shown in the report - including the date the items were received and the number of days it took to sell. In previous versions the date received column was not always accurate and this has been fixed in this update.
VJS's X-Charge credit card processing now supports "Partial Approval." This occurs where a customer uses a card with a strict limit which may permit say, a $205 charge on a sale of $300. In this case you can accept the $205 on the card and the remainder by another means. Before "Partial Approval" VJS and X-Charge would simply issue a decline for a charge request over the limit.
Related to this, note that the processing of certain pre-paid "credit" cards may return a card balance and it is required to print on the receipt so the customer knows how much joy is left on the card. This capability is in the new version.
Together, the above confer certification to VJS for the "MasterCard Partial Approval Mandate" with X-Charge.
Previously a single in-house credit slip or gift card could not be used twice on the same sale (e.g. a layaway.) This need should be very uncommon, but it is now possible for those rare cases.
If you have selected "reduced graphics" the Main Menu will now appear more quickly and will "flash" less when it starts. This is applies principally for remote access connections and where the graphics setting is "Fewer" or "Lower".
[bpv2]
Version 1.85 10/4/2011 ===============================================================
When you choose to Add a New Sale from the Customer X-Tra Search screen you usually are prompted for a sale number. If you choose Cancel at this point, the new version will remain in the X-Tra search screen whereas previous versions closed the X-Tra search screen. This also applies to adding Repairs and Credit Slips
When you run the Itemized Sales report and choose to sort by Sku Number with the Summary option, the individual Sku's are not shown - just the totals for each major code. That's not new, but what is new is that now there are also subtotals by each group of major codes (e.g. a total for all Diamond major codes; a total for all ring major codes, etc.) Major code groups are set up on the Major Class Code maintenance screen.
In the Entire Customer History report in previous versions in many cases, payments that were by Cash or Credit Slip were shown as Check. This has been corrected.
In the Accounts Receivable payment screen, an extra warning shows if you try to make a payment of zero but enter tendered amounts of more than zero. (Just a warning, not a prohibition as it's possible that you're recording a payment type correction that balances to zero.)
The narrow (roll of paper) version of the X and Z Reports have been adjusted because on some printers the first letter of each line could be cut off.
Version 1.84 9/28/2011 ===============================================================
When editing old (archived) appraisals of customers' own items (items they didn't purchase from you), you can now add pictures to them. This is useful when updating old appraisal records.
Adjustment to the position of the separator lines in one of the customer reports.
[ref: xcpartv1]
Version 1.832 9/16/2011 ===============================================================
Correction of a side-effect tag printing problem introduced with version 1.83.
The 6,2,G Sales Comparison reports in JS-Classic now create an Excel file simultaneously while the report is run. The filename is SALECOMP.XLS in the JSREPORT folder on the Windows desktop. (The column heading names are terse. To decipher them, compare to the displayed report version.)
The 6,2,G Sales Comparison reports in JS-Classic now works when grouping by Manufacturer. In addition, when running this report for past 12 months sales the partial current month does not include the figures from the completed same month of last year.
Version 1.83 09/13/2011 ===============================================================
This What's New button will now show you the What's New List of the newest update version posted to the website. I.e. it will show you what is available even before you have downloaded an update. Previously, this would show you the What's New list only of what you had already installed.
The Inventory Reports have a check-box option to include the retail price on the report. In previous versions un-checking this option removed the retail column from some, but not all versions of the report. In this update all variations of the report can have the retail price column removed.
The Inventory Report by Style web Export option added in version 1.79 (see below) now creates a Tab Delimited version. This is in addition to the previously available XLS (Excel) and XML (web database) export files. This increases the number of web platforms that may be able to import your inventory file.
Quicker access to tag printing. From the Inventory Status screen if you press the Ctrl key while you click the Print-a-Tag button at the bottom right corner, VJS goes to the last confirmation step to print tags, skipping several intermediate steps. You can do this with just a single item or you could add several items to the temporary list with a regular click and Ctrl-click on the last item.
The JS-Classic utility "period" was deactivated in August. It has been revised and is now reactivated. (This utility is only for use in special circumstances when advised by Compulink.)
[ref: libhpdf,iploc]
Version 1.82 08/31/2011 ===============================================================
The checkbook report ("Register" version) previously didn't correctly report checks with multiple subpayments where some of those were credits. This is corrected in this update.
The inventory web export file and the inventory report by style can now select only those items which have an Alternative Description. The Alternative Description and the Alternative Notes are on the Style Det. page of the Inventory Status form. These are often used to phrase the description in a way that is suited for a web page - i.e. more so than the basic tag description. From the Inventory By Style report screen choose Full Selection and choose Only w/Alt.Desc. You can also run the report excluding those items in case you need to see which items do *not* yet have such a web description.
The Hot Seller Report is often run to show you only those styles which have more than a certain number of repeat sales, e.g. more than 3 or 10. A new option allows you to show only those items which have zero sales ( i.e. a Not-Seller Report!) Enter -1 (minus 1) for the sales greater than line to show the no-sellers. As before, entering 0 (zero) means show items whether or not they have had a certain number of sales.
Previously the itemized sales reports and commission reports wrapped very long sale numbers onto a second line. Now such long sale numbers will fit on one line.
Version 1.81 08/19/2011 ===============================================================
The report reprinting previous Z-Reports now has a recap version which shows one day per line so you can see several weeks per page instead of just the one-day-per-page version previously available. At the Print Options box that appears before the preview/print change the layout to Z-Report Multi-Day Recap.
The optional Pandora Import program has been updated with the inventory list and pictures for the Fall 2011 Collection. (no extra charge if you have subscribed to the Shopkeeper Maintenance Plan.)
In previous versions the inventory entry screen could sometimes be impeded if another user were adjusting an item on the Inventory Status screen. This version resolves that possible conflict.
Version 1.80 08/11/2011 ===============================================================
The Layaway Statements area has a new report option which yields a more standard *report* of layaways. Unlike the statements which have one customer per page and are designed for mailings, the new report shows multiple customers per page. Unlike the Simple Layaway Report, this one includes all the details of the sale including the items and the payments. [when you access the Print Options box for the Layaway Statements, change the Report type to Layaway Report (not Statements.)
Further, the Layaway Statements (and reports now) area can now allow you to select Layaways Only, Special Orders Only, Repairs Only, or all types together. Previously Layaways and Repairs together were the only choices. This means the statements can now exclude repairs and you can run more detailed reports to follow-up on special orders. Note that Repairs are identified by whether you choose Repair type at the top of the sales screen - not based on whether you specifically add repair details to a sale.
The inventory report by style web export option added in version 1.79 (see below) now creates an XML (web database format.) This is in addition to the previously available XLS (Excel) export file. This increases the number of web platforms that may be able to import your inventory file.
Version 1.79 08/9/2011 ===============================================================
VJS adds the new, Inventory Report by Style from the Reports Menu. This report combines different Sku numbers which share the same style into one line. Previously you were able to able to get a similar report by choosing the Hot Seller report. However, the new report is more succinct and faster because it does not include sales information.
In addition it offers a customizable Web Site export file option. Using the Web Export Configuration option, you can select the inventory columns you want to export and you can change the export file column names used in the resulting Excel XLS file. You can choose to select only those styles that you have recently received or sold so you can create a small file of just those items recently received or updated.
In JS-Classic when you merge two customers together, the sales quotes / wish list sale items of both customers will be merged together. In previous versions the quotes of the deleted customer name were not kept.
Version 1.78 08/02/2011 ===============================================================
On the Gift & Credit Certificates screen you can now specify / change the next default slip number. From the top of this form choose Options, Set Next Slip Number.
The commission report XLS export file will no longer report negative discounts for items sold at higher than the regular price.
The appraisal print-outs can now include the appraisal number. By default most appraisal formats do not include the number; only the layout called "Appraisal with No Template, Smaller Picture" will include it. However, it is possible to use the designer to customize any of the other formats and add a text box with the expression AppNumber. [Customizing is an optional feature for advance users who can ask us for a guide.]
In JS-Classic the Equifx utility is now active. [only relevant to those users who have subscribed to this optional feature.]
In JS-Classic, from the Edit Customer profile screen (8,1,2) there is an option to press PageUp for References if the customer has a charge account. The first page of References shows the previous month's balances and previous versions had no security restriction on that page. This page is now linked to the same security setting for Edit Charge Account Balances (8,1,4)
In JS-Classic when you merge two customers together, the longer / extended notes area of both customers will be merged and together. Previously the extended notes of the deleted customer name was not kept. The shorter notes were merged in previous versions and they still are in this update.
Version 1.775 07/21/2011 ===============================================================
If you select a QuickSale code from the Sales screen previous versions created a brand new sales ticket with a new number. With this update, if you have already selected a customer and a sales ticket number, VJS will add the items from the QuickSale code to the sales ticket on the screen. [QuickSale codes are set up in Quick Sale Maintenance from the Maintenance Menu. They allow you to 'pre-package' several Sku's, or just one, into a two-letter code.]
In previous versions if you restricted access to view the cost, the Inventory Status screen would show the cost in code. In this update, you can make the cost nor cost code show at all with a new security option in Preferences "View Cost Code on Inventory Status Screen."
Some suppliers provide image files for their items where the image file names are the same as the style number except that the image filenames contain underscores in place of dots. The current update will match up those picture files for you when you run the Picture Check option from Cleanup. E.g. If you have a style 1.2.3 and your supplier gave you a picture file 1_2_3.jpg, this will now match up. [See notes under Version 0.948 below for basic folder and image file naming requirements.]
Version 1.77 07/13/2011 ===============================================================
The "Entire Customer History" Reports now add an extra entry next to each sold item to show you the clerks for that sale. There are four versions of this report and the Standard version and the version with Pictures include the clerks.
If you have a point-of-sale cash drawer, you can now make it pop open only when you have just received a cash payment. Some people have cash drawers with slots for credit card slips and checks and prefer that the drawer pop open as little as possible. To activate this option, go to Preferences and add the keyword POP4CASHONLY anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box.
The data verification option in Cleanup will now *not* consider 頡 problem letter so that pav鬠for example, will not show as a potential problem.
Version 1.74 added the option allows you to update the retail price and description of many related items quickly using the Inventory Search screen. This version adds the ability to additionally update the cost of many items, but only for level 10 users. See the Version 1.74 notes below for more details.
Version 1.762 06/30/2011 ===============================================================
The Tag Printing area now allows you to select tag to print by Par Number. From Tag Printing, choose Full Selection then you can type a range of Part Numbers to include.
When you re-stock styles that you have had before you might need to enter a cost different than the suggested cost (the previous most recent cost). In such cases VJS will prompt you about the possible need for a new price and a suggested price is offered. Generally, this is an important warning to consider but if your particular situation is such that a warning is unhelpful, you can remove the warning by adding the keyword NONEWRETAILWARN anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box of Preferences. If you'd like the warning but not a suggested retail use the keyword NONEWRETAIL
One figure in the summary area of the Payment Spreadsheet report is the total of the new layaway deposits. In certain cases where two separate deposits are received on a layaway on one day, the total might not reflect the second one. This has been corrected. [in previous versions the total of the sales and the total of each money received was correct; the problem was only with this particular "new layaway" deposits recap.]
RapNet allows you to list your diamonds on the Rapaport website. A program is being developed for Visual Jewelry Shopkeeper to help automate the posting of your diamond inventory. Email us if you are interested in this. Let us know if you currently use RapNet, how you use it, how many items you might expect to upload and how frequently.
[ref: sahchk;salecommtoreal,pmtssopenlay]
Version 1.76 06/23/2011 ===============================================================
When backing up data from the VJS File Center, the new version now backs up your image files to help prevent them being lost after a hard drive problem. Note that if you have many thousands of pictures you should verify that your backup memory stick has enough space. The first time you backup to any individual backup stick it will take extra time. Subsequent backups to any individual memory stick will be quicker as only the new pictures will be added. If needed, you can disable this option from the backup screen.
In Customer X-Tra Search if you type a 10-digit phone number VJS will now show you all customers with that phone number - and only those matching customers. This whether it's a home, work or mobile phone number. In previous versions just the first match was shown so you might not know if there are duplicate records with that same phone number.
The data verification ignores some accented characters to avoid unneeded warnings.
New Inventory Sku's can be added directly from the Inventory Status screen. This would not be used for the addition of standard inventory (which should be added via Inventory Entry) but may be useful for "dummy" repair or service Sku numbers.
[ref: ipcity; jsrepairnotes;locqty1]
Version 1.75 06/13/2011 ===============================================================
The Inventory Aging Snapshot Summary report has been added. This report gives you a concise summary of your inventory separated into six-lines aged by 3, 6, 12, 18, 24 months and older. Not only does this report give you the shortest report to get your inventory totals, it gives you an important overview of how old your inventory is. This may prompt you to act on shedding too-old stock. [Select Inventory Reports and change the Itemized or Summarized line to Snapshot Aging Summary.]
Version 1.742 05/31/2011 ===============================================================
The feature to search the Internet to find customers and vendors by phone number has been updated again due to a further change in the format returned by www.whitepages.com which was causing the address and phone number to be somewhat scrambled.
Version 1.741 05/27/2011 ===============================================================
If you choose "Canadian Options" in Preferences the clerk profile screen will no longer show State and Zip, but instead will show Province and Post Code.
The option to allow lower-case inventory descriptions (see 1.73 below for more details) has been refined so that you can allow lower case inventory descriptions even if you require upper-case customer names and addresses.
If you accidentally enter a number of blank lines in an inventory description or a receipt extra message (e.g. for the class code) the current version will do a better job removing unnecessary blank lines printed on the sales receipt.
Version 1.74 05/25/2011 ===============================================================
The feature to search the Internet to find customers and vendors by phone number has been re-enabled. (This is an old feature, but has not been available for some time because the Internet search systems change periodically requiring reprogramming) If you're not familiar with this, when you search for a customer by their 10-digit phone number, VJS will search your existing customer list first, but if not found it will search www.whitepages.com
A new option allows you to update the retail price and description of many related items more quickly - such as updating all items from one vendor or from one major code. From the inventory status screen you can click the drop-arrow of the Sku number box to see the Inventory Search box. In this list you can check the box to allow editing. If you choose to Search by style and typed in a vendor code you would see all the items for that vendor and you could adjust the prices and descriptions to match the new catalog. By default this feature is available only when logged in at level 10. You can adjust the required security setting by choosing Preferences form the Maintenance Menu, then select Enable Editing Price and Description in Inventory Search Screen.
Version 1.73 05/20/2011 ===============================================================
Previously, inventory descriptions were always upper-case only. Now there is the new option "Require Upper-Case Inventory Description?" in the Inventory Defaults area of Preferences. Especially for the longer appraisal- type of inventory notes, allowing mixed upper and lower-case can be more presentable for appraisals, receipts or web-pages.
In the Vendor X-Tra Search screen, the list of items at the bottom right (inventory items, returns, etc) previously did not always refresh quickly when you typed or select a different vendor name. This area has been improved in this update.
Each major class code can have an additional message that will print on the sales screen. That part isn't new, but a change in the new update is that this message will print on receipts even for items sold with a quantity of -1 (returns or trade-ins or credits) This may be important if you have a particular gold trade-in Sku or a special coupon Sku in certain major codes and you need additional wording to print when they are added to sales. [You can add this message from the Major Class code screen from the Maintenance Menu.]
The Inventory Status screen has a page called Style History. This page shows other Sku's that you have received for the same style of item. (This part isn't new) The change in this version is that now this page will no longer show the cost of the other Sku's if the access to cost has been turned off from the Security Preferences, where in previous versions it did.
When you run inventory reports you can select a range of prices or costs to be included on the report. Previous versions allowed a selection value of up to $99,999, but now you can select based on the full range to $9,999,999.
The Simple Layaway Report adds the new option to sort the list by the original take-in date.
When you receive inventory the items are assigned to your default inventory location code (which you can change, of course.) New in this version is the option for VJS to check if that style was previously stocked and to use the same location that was most recently used. That way if different lines are usually stocked in different locations they will automatically be remembered. To activate this option go to Preferences and add the keyword USELASTLOC anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box. This applies to both JS-Classic and VJS.
If you don't need to enter a location code when adding inventory go to Preferences and on the inventory defaults page uncheck the box Ask for Location Code. Note: If you *do* need to enter location codes but no longer see the location option, check this option in Preferences. Previous versions may have shown you the location box even if this option were unchecked.
The Vendor Profile screen has a page showing activity such as invoices and checks. A new security option allows you to restrict access to this page. In the Preferences choose More Security Settings and set the required level for 'View Vendor Profile Activity Page.'
In version 1.541 a new option was added such that when a change in the estimate on the repair screen would be copied to the sales ticket. In the case where the sales screen line for that job had a quantity of 2 or more, the result could be a doubling of the sales price. This has been corrected in this version.
Improvements for two-across barcode tags. Resolves a problem that could occur under some circumstances where selecting a Join-With didn't work correctly.
Version 1.72 03/28/2011 ===============================================================
Various changes to help with the new requirements of Merchant Warehouse in processing negative credit card charges / returns. If you use Merchant Warehouse please contact us for details on what to look for and what to look out for.
Version 1.71 03/23/2011 ===============================================================
If you right-click a picture in the Picture manager (for inventory, repairs, customers, or clerks) VJS will now pass the picture to Windows view. This can help with viewing large pictures such as scanned documents, certificates, etc. Note that VJS will not decide which program opens the picture; Windows will select its default viewer.
Improved correction of mis-entered dates. For example if you change a date 03/01/2011 by typing 032511 it will show as 03/25/1120. The current version will correct that to 03/25/2011.
In Js-Classic, when you edit a previous repair detail screen via the sales screen the first box to edit will now be the location box as this is more likely to be updated than the description. In addition this yields easier access to extended custom job tracking detail screen by pressing PgUp.
In version 1.541 a new option was added such that when a change in the estimate on the repair screen would be copied to the sales ticket. In this update an extra warning is given to the salesperson when the final receipt is printed that the price has changed. This is helpful where different people are entering revised estimates from those who are collecting payments and printing receipts.
The Physical Inventory screen allows you to add items to the physical count list by typing a Sku, scanning a Sku or importing a text file list of Sku Numbers. A new feature is that the when using a text file list, the new version accepts a quantity next to each Sku. [E.g. a line could read 01510007, 5 which would be imported as quantity 5 of Sku 15-10007. The quantity can be separated from the Sku by a comma or a space or a tab.] [If there is *not* a quantity included, then each line will be assumed to be one.] [This same capability also applies to the features: "Add to Existing Sku Numbers", "Deduct from Inventory", "Relocate Inventory", "Return Inventory to Vendors"]
The repair screen has been slightly enlarged in order to add room to show the customer's phone number(s) in the address box near the top right corner.
In the sales and repairs screens, when you hover the mouse over the customer address the customer number will appear.
[ref: viscom]
Version 1.703 03/07/2011 ===============================================================
JS-Classic now includes the 10K utility which will give you a list of customers who spent more than $10,000 in cash within a year.
A change in the VJS update routine that will help for future updates. Most VJS updates can be downloaded and installed even while other users are running VJS. Also, while other computers on the network *should* run the same update quite soon in order that everyone have the same version, it is not required immediately.
However, on rare occasions an update might require that all users on the network be out of Shopkeeper after you download the update (so that the data files can be updated)
However, previously you wouldn't have known until after you ran the update and then you might have found it was an inconvenient time. With 1.703 and above, when such an update is available you will be informed *before* starting it.
[ref: iploc]
Version 1.700 03/03/2011 ===============================================================
The Hot-Seller / Reorder report is the report which summarizes inventory (and optionally sales) to one line per style even if there are multiple Sku numbers for certain styles. what's new in this update is that you can select a single invoice number. Choose Full Selection to access this choice.
In previous versions, adding an appraisal via the sales screen in JS-Classic (DOS Shopkeeper V.10) could result in the picture file not being linked to the appraisal when the appraisal is viewed or printed from VJS. This limitation has been removed in the new version.
You can now make particular messages appear when you sell merchandise from certain vendors. In the vendor profile screen, add to the notes <<MSG: Message Here >>, including the angle-brackets, and the "Message Here" words will appear on screen. You can use this to remind staff about special carry bags, freebies such as polishing cloths, promotions, etc. If this feature becomes popular this message area may be moved to a dedicated sales area message.
The Physical Inventory screen was previously sharing the security access level of the Return to Vendor screen, but now it uses its own separate security setting which is in Preferences.
In the Drop-Down Pick-List Manager, deleting multiple lines (e.g. unnecessary duplications) is now more intuitive. [right-click any managed lookup list and choose Edit Selections, or choose Look-Up Lists from Preferences.)
The White Pages customer lookup by phone number previously could indicated Found! even when the result was an empty name. This has been corrected in this version.
Previously the last few letters of very long style numbers previously were not visible in the Inventory Status Screen. This is corrected in this updated.
If you have repair Sku Numbers, you can add text to the Notes area of Inventory Status. This creates a template that is automatically transferred to the Description and Repairs boxes on the repairs detail screen. The first five lines of notes are transferred to the Description box and the next five lines are transferred to the Instructions box.
For the particular repair Sku's with such notes this supersedes the overall Repair Template that you can record in Preferences.
When printing layaway statements you can now select by customer number. When printing a statement for a single customer, in cases where a large customer list has many similar names the customer number approach can be quicker / more precise. (This option was visible before but not active) Access Layaway statements from the Sales Reports Menu.
When printing archived (several years old) receipts for sales with repair detail attached, previous versions didn't print the repair details, but starting with this version those details will appear. As with current file sales, you can choose to *not* print repair details on sales receipts if you prefer that they be printed only on the actual repair envelope / ticket.
In Preferences, on the Inventory pages, you can set a standard (store-wide) markup for the MSRP value. This is separate from the markup options that are normally entered separately for each major class code. These values were visible in previous versions but they were not active before. Now they will be used to fill in the MSRP as you receive merchandise.'
When you make a quantity (or price etc) adjustment in the inventory status screen then immediately go and check the adjustment history, previous versions would show only the most recent adjustment and you'd have to exit the status screen before it would refresh. Now the inventory adjustments will all show immediately.
When receiving a new merchandise invoice VJS sometimes would show an erroneous error message indicating that the invoice was a non-inventory payable or a return credit payable. The message would disappear but it has been removed in this update.
A problem in JS-Classic with the Physical Inventory by location report has been resolved.
The Bonus / Loyalty Points Report in JS-Classic now automatically creates an Excel file as the report is run. Beyond the report, it also includes the mailing address fields, telephone numbers and the customer type.
[ref: z_*; download util delfxp]
Version 1.693 02/02/2011 ===============================================================
A needed change/fix was for the Pandora Catalog Update for Shopkeeper DOS 9.x
Version 1.692 01/28/2011 ===============================================================
Miscellaneous Repair re-finalizing prompt removed Better avoidance of negative quantity items from the inventory search window. Removed delay of Sales Notes appearing in Zone 7 of the Sales screen. Change in Inventory Audit Report (of JS-Classic) to better handle Adjustments. Easier viewing of sales notes, Zone 7 of sales screen.
Version 1.691 01/24/2011 ===============================================================
Some computers were unable to use the new White Pages reverse lookup by customer phone number. (see Version 1.680 below.) This minor update add some Windows support files which some computers were missing, which should help in those cases. [msvcp71.dll]
Version 1.690 01/21/2011 ===============================================================
A new Pandora Jewelry program has been added to address the overhaul of 1000's of items in the catalog effective February 1, 2011. Most items have new costs and prices, and 1000's of the rings have new styles, barcode numbers and descriptions. In addition there are many brand new styles. The updated program retroactively makes all the changes in the inventory file, and previous sales ( style numbers only for previous sales). In addition the new pictures are also imported. You can request an access code from Compulink for this program (free if you have a Maintenance Plan.)
The Itemized Sales Report feature to either include or exclude sales by the state in the address field of the customer has been activated. This can help when running sales tax reports or other analysis by state.
Speed increase when importing large files into the Physical Inventory count screen.
The Physical Inventory Exception Reporting area has a new comparison option by Part Number. Since the Part No. in Shopkeeper is often used to store the manufacturer's UPS or EAN barcode this is effectively a comparison by Manufacturer's Barcode. You can import a text file of manufacturer Barcodes by right-clicking the Import a List Button. When you have finished the addition of items and continue to the report screen, you will select the option "Physical Inv Except by Part No" on the "Itemized or Summarized Line." The results will be sent to an Excel File
Speed increase showing the Repair Billing screen from the sales screen. (perhaps only noticeable for customers with huge numbers of repairs.)
Improved verification that you *not* retrieve an existing non-inventory invoice (a regular payable) in the inventory invoice screen (which can cause a duplicate and confusion.)
Added ability to manually assign a sales period number to a sale. Press Ctrl-Click in the period number box near the top right corner of the sales screen to enable changing of that. This is not recommended in most cases and it is available only to users logged in at level 10.
(ref: Utility call; Picture Re-Link by Sku.)
Version 1.680 01/10/2011 ===============================================================
When you search for a customer by phone number and that customer is not found in your existing customer list VJS will search the internet and create a new customer record with the name and address. The previous search method used Google - which has now reduced its search results. So recently this feature has not been working. VJS now uses www.whitepages.com which results in many more matches.
The same thing applies to vendor lookups by phone and adding new vendors.
When you run the inventory report summarized by major class code the figures are rounded to whole dollars - for an easier to read report. A new option allows you to show cents. On the Inventory Reports screen change the line "Itemized or Summarized" to read "Major Summary w/Decimals."
If there are any declines for Merchant Warehouse or X-Charge charges more details on those transactions are now stored in a log file in the CCAUTH folder in case further review is needed.
Version 1.672 12/27/2010 ===============================================================
Miscellaneous: Some changes were made to the year-end steps to reduce the chance of network traffic/weakness causing errors while old sales are purged - which is a sensitive time to encounter network errors.
Version 1.671 12/21/2010 ===============================================================
In the Sales screen the Ctrl-R keyboard shortcut to pop up the repair billing screen is now available from almost anywhere in the sales screen instead of only from the Sku Number box. [for more details on this new option see the notes in 1.660 below]
In the sales screen an extra warning appears if you enter an an item with a non-zero price but the total amounts to zero. This is either if you leave the quantity as zero for items priced by the unit or if you leave the weight as zero for items priced by the weight.
When receiving inventory with no style where you use style N/A (not applicable) previous versions could inherit picture items from previous instances of N/A styles. Now such pictures, if they exist, will not be applied to the new inventory item.
The posting report column headings Credit Slips and Gift Certificates have been changed to better reflect what the column represents: Gift & Credit Slips Used (as payments) and Gift & Credit Slips Issued (to customers). The information and figures in the column have not changed.
The Interstore Transfer Reporting feature (in JS-Classic) adds a new Summarized option to produce shorter, summarized reports. The report also creates, in the JSREPORT folder, an Excel XLS file of the results of the report.
Version 1.660 12/16/2010 ===============================================================
Similar to the change in 1.650 below concerning intermittent pagination problems, most of the other sales receipts have been modified to reduce such printing problems - not just layout #11. If you encounter pagination problems on multi-page receipts but you have a custom layout, you would need to create a new custom layout based on the new *Original Version*
Note that in general, pagination problems are related to very long end-of-sale receipts so reducing that message can also help
Several restrictions (protections) have been activated regarding the dates on sales.
If you encounter any warnings or difficulties with dates on sales please see the options below and make any changes to Preference and security to customize VJS to your needs.
In the Sales Defaults page of Preferences there is a line "Restrict Sales Screen Dates to xx days before and yy days after entry date" For example, if you enter 2 days before and 0 days after, then when entering a sale on July 5 the sales screen will only allow dates of July 3,5 and 5. If you frequently enter sales from previous weeks or months then you should enter a larger number than 2 for the Before box.
When you edit a previously finalized sale you cannot change the date.
Both of the above protections can be overridden if you are logged in at a high-enough level. Within the Security section of Preferences there is a setting "Override Date Restrictions on Sales" If you set this at, say 9, then only level 9 or 10 users can override the date restrictions. If you set it to 11, then no-one can override the date restrictions.
If you are log in at a high enough level and also do not want to be warned about possible date problems go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword NOSALEDATEWARNING
Separate from the above, note that now when you edit a previous layaway and *without* making a payment (e.g. you reduce the sale total to match the down-payment) now the sale date is automatically brought forward to today. In previous versions without making a payment to finalize the layaway the sale date wasn't automatically brought forward.
When the Sales Screen is waiting for a Sku Number, a new keyboard shortcut is available, Ctrl-R which pops-up the Repair Billing screen. The usual methods of choosing Repair Billing from either of the Options list are still available. (Repair Billing is used only when you enter repairs.
Another new shortcut Ctrl-N (think N for Net price) in either the Price box or the first description line actives the Backout Tax option.
Version 1.650 12/08/2010 ===============================================================
Under certain circumstances a multi page sales receipt that almost fits on one page but the totals print on the second page could have this second page not print. One of the sales receipts layouts has been modified to prevent this. If you experience this you can select the layout "11 Side-By-Side Laser, Raised Summary" Note that this may not be exactly the same format you have used before but it should be a good format. Note that if you have already created a customized receipt layout and want to benefit from this change, then you will need to create a new custom layout based on the *Original Version* of this Layout No. 11.
If you have certain lines of merchandise that should always be assigned to a particular location code, add LOCATION=XXX anywhere in the notes box for the vendor in the vendor profile screen and then new merchandise for that vendor will default to that location. Change XXX to the preferred location code.
When you enter Physical Inventory counts and you specify a location for each item, the new version will assume that location for the subsequent items (unless you change it) That can save typing in the location for every single item in the physical count list.
The side-by-side layout of the Payment Received on Account receipt will now print the logo file - the same one selected within Preferences for sales receipts.
In previous versions when you create a Quote / Wish List sale in a certain month and then convert it to an actual sale in a subsequent month, the sales period number could remain as the previous sale period number. Now such a sale will have the sales period number changed to the period number of the month in which it was converted. This can help with the organization of certain reports.
In the customer profile screen when you tab through the entries for name and address, the cursor now lands on the Zip/Post Code box before that of the city. That way, if you fill in the zip code the City will be suggested (provided it is a zip code you have used before)
When you add inventory for a received invoice, if you delete a certain stock number line, that Sku number is zeroed out and removed from the invoice. However, the Sku number is not completely removed; you can look up that Sku from the Inventory Status screen and can view the history of the item. However, if you prefer such removed items to be permanently removed as if they had never been added, go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword PERMDELINV]
In a recent update, the appearance of the text entry fields/boxes was modified to be cleaner and flatter. If anyone preferred the old look which has a more defined 3D style border, you can revert to that [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword TEXTBORDER3] In addition, there are two other styles you can apply by adding either the keyword WHITEBEHINDTEXT which will make the backgrounds always white or BLACKTEXTBORDER which will make the edges black. The white background option is compatible with either of the edge styles.
Version 1.640 11/30/2010 ===============================================================
A Cash Register report graphing the activity by each hour of every day has been added to the Sales Reports Menu. This can help you plan staffing and opening hours. Choose Cash Register Hourly Activity Reports. If you have an Internet connection, the results can be graphed, otherwise a text report is available. Also, unlike the JS-Classic version the report with the number of transactions per hour can show the dollar figures per hour on the same report.
The Inventory Search box has an improved response when searching for a partial Sku number. For example if you type 900 to select a repair Sku and do not type the rest of the Sku, the previous version would jump to the top of the list where the new version will jump to the first Sku near 900.
Version 1.635 11/18/2010 ===============================================================
Miscellaneous A new option allows you to change the location of the VJS Reports folder. (Instructions on request.)
In case of difficulty for those computers with two or more webcams or other USB-connected cameras an alternative picture-capturing method has been added. [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword ALTWEBCAM]
Version 1.63 11/15/2010 ===============================================================
Improved behavior when you search for inventory items by brand and style or by part number or Pandora barcode. It is possible to have multiple Sku numbers for a single style and of those Sku's there may be various combinations of zero and non-zero quantities in stock. This update improves the selection logic to speed up finding the appropriate item.
Related to these changes is a new option in Preferences on the page Sales Screen Cont: FIFO - Sell Oldest Sku of Style Number If you turn this option on, then in the sales screen when you search by Style or Part Number the oldest matching item will be selected with fewer confirmation steps.
The Layaway Statements have been improved to omit layaways that have been paid off. Also, for those statements with multiple layaways, a Total line is added for the sum of the amount due on all layaways.
Miscellaneous On the Repair screen a newly available tab "More Details" has several new detail fields that you can fill in to classify the usage op Metals, Stones and findings. Currently these fields are not used in reporting.
When clicking on the down-arrow for the major code of a new item when entering inventory, sometimes the message "that class number does not exist" would appear unnecessarily. This has been addressed.
Version 1.62 11/10/2010 ===============================================================
The Repair Reports now allow you to search and filter report by keywords or numbers that you enter in the long Notes box. For example, if you have a number of different jobs that are all related in some fashion to job 1518 you could enter SEE1518 in the Notes box. On the repair reports screen choose Full Selection to find the Keyword option. Note that you can search for multiple different keywords for one report by entering them separated by a column, e.g.: SEE1518,SEE1213
For Zebra-language tag printers, VJS now adds control over the heat setting to control the density 30 the text. The range is 5 to 30. If you leave it blank then the printer's default setting is used. This setting is adjusted on the Tag Layouts screen.
Miscellaneous The previous version caused an (harmless) error message to appear when printing Sales Quotes and that has been resolved.
In a few situations, when creating a customer list export a message could erroneously indicate that the export file was already open in Excel. This has been resolved.
When you add a special order item to a sale, using the "Add an Inventory Item", a new option allows you to *require* printing the associated purchase at that time. This in order to prevent forgetting this step. [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword SPECIALORDERPRINTPO]
In JS-Classic, you can now change the vendor on an existing Purchase Order. Edit a purchase order, and on the Style line, press Enter and choose Vendor.
In JS-Classic, depending on your security settings, it could have been difficult to add a preferred clerk to a customer profile screen. This has been made less restrictive for a new customer while retaining the restriction on a pre-existing customer.
Version 1.61 10/22/2010 ===============================================================
A new "Add to Existing Sku Numbers" option has been added to the Inventory Menu. This is similar to editing Sku numbers individually and manually increasing the quantity on-hand, but this is much quicker when working with several items at once. In addition it allows you to print reports - with and without pictures. Note that this is *Not* the normal method or receiving inventory; it is typically used for low-value items where you don't want precise inventory tracking. E.g. this method does not fully track the dating of each item, the separate invoice numbers and different costs that you have for a new shipment. The normal method for receiving a shipment of inventory remains Enter Inventory which creates a new Sku number for the restocked existing style.
The A/R Past-Due Aging reports adds a new optional report layout with the mailing address. You can choose this layout from the Print Options box that appears just before the report prints. (NB, v.1.60 added the address option to the A/R Balance Aging report whereas this pertains to the A/R Past-Due Aging Report.)
The customer Special Events report now includes the spouse's first name.
The simple layaway report can now be set to exclude repair sales or to show only repair sales. Note that this criterion is based only on the type of sale shown in large letters at the top of the sale. (e.g. Cash Sale, Layaway, Repair, Special Order). This does *not* depend on whether or not the sale has a repair Sku or an attached repair tracking screen. Note that repair sales entered via JS-Classic would not be classified as repair sales for the purposes of this selection criterion. From the Simple Layaway Report screen choose Full Selection to find this selection criterion.
The Excel file created by the inventory report now includes a field with the full description of the minor class code. This is used by B.I.G. and you may find it useful yourself.
Sometimes the sales screen would show the message "Job Order No. 123 Has Disappeared." which could be annoying even though it was harmless. That message should mostly be eliminated now. (inform us if you encounter it in particular situations.)
The Take-In date on the repair screen was previously not editable. Now you can set a security preference to select which login access levels can change this date. This setting is on the Sales Security page in Preferences.
Version 1.607 10/20/2010 ===============================================================
The Pandora Fall 2010 catalog additions and changes are now available to be imported.
Version 1.605 10/15/2010 ===============================================================
Miscellaneous
You can now require that a sales dept code is entered for all new sales. This option is turned on or off from the Sales Screen Defaults page of Preferences from the Maintenance Menu.
Quicker refreshing of the list of options in the Drop Down Pick List Manager in Defaults. Also a clarification of the entry for "Repairs Vendor / Trade Shop" (previously "Outside Repair Shop")
If you add the keyword VERIFYCUSTOMERONREPAIR to Miscellaneous Settings in Preferences, then when you add a repair to a sales ticket the customer profile will appear so you can't forget to verify you have the current contact information.
The computer name is now marked in the backup.ini file to help identify which computer performed the last backup. This is useful in case data needs to be restored.
The inventory audit report (only in JS-Classic) has a correction to a mis-calculation that could have occurred with items having miscellaneous adjustments.
Version 1.60 10/08/2010 ===================================================
The A/R Aging reports adds a new optional report layout with the mailing address and some other columns. You can choose this layout from the Print Options box that appears just before the report prints.
The Itemized Sales Reports adds the option to run reports for a single location code. Choose Full Selection to see this choice. Note that if you select Location Code AA you will see just those sales from AA and not AA1, AA2 etc. If you want to see sales from all locations beginning with AA, enter location code AA*. Similarly if you want to see sales from all locations beginning with A (such as A and A2 and AA3, etc) select location code A**.
Miscellaneous In order that the Save & Clear Vendor function on the Repair Quick Update screen *not* clear the Rec'd back from vendor date, add the keyword RQUSAVERECD to the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.
When receiving merchandise and a zero cost is entered previous versions would not permit that. the new version issues a warning but will allow it if you confirm.
In the previous version when receiving merchandise, the drop list for the major and/or minor codes would sometimes not appear when clicking the drop arrow with the mouse. This has been corrected.
Version 1.59 10/01/2010 ===================================================
In Preferences there is an option to require that either the Vendor or the Location be filled in. Previously turning this option on required that both the location *and* the vendor be filled in but now it's just one or the other - although, of course both can be filled in.
From the sales screen a line-item linked to a repair ticket will show the repair picture if there is one. In the new version you can bring up the full-size image and the picture manager by clicking on this image. In previous versions you had to first pop-up the full repairs detail screen.
The Credit Slips and Gift Certificates Report has been added to the Reports Menu. This feature was previously available, but only by opening the Gift Certificate screen and then choosing Options, Gift Certificates Reports.
In previous versions, accounts receivable credit memos could adjust the layaway figures on the X and Z reports instead of the accounts receivable figures and that has now been corrected. (This did not previously affect any official accounts receivable or layaway figures or reports - just the X and Z reports.)
When making a new sale, the notes area (one of the options available in the bottom left corner) was sometimes in accessible until after the sale was saved and then re-edited. Those cases have been solved and it's always directly editable.
Adjustment to a possible problem in the discount / manager override feature added in Version 1.580
Additional verification steps for tag layouts case of some data problems.
Version 1.58 09/29/2010 ===================================================
The sales screen adds the Manager Override feature to let a manager temporarily login to allow, for example, a higher than normal discount. From the top of the sales screen choose Options, Manager Override. The override status stays in effect until you choose Options, END Manager override or until you close the sales screen. [Important Note: If you activate the manager override feature the manager capabilities apply to ALL screens in VJS. So if you enter your manager override password and walk away, the user could switch to a different screen in VJS and access higher-level functions. Be sure you choose END Manager Override or close the sales screen before you walk away.]
When you record a sale, a *copy* of the inventory information is added to the sales files so, for example, changing the retail price or description of a certain Sku does not change the price of an existing sale. The same was previously the case for the inventory cost. The new version adds a change so that if you change the cost of an inventory item, then that cost will automatically be updated in the sales files for any pending (unfinalized) sales. This commonly occurs when entering special order sales and the correct cost isn't know ahead of time. Also, if you change the cost on a Sku and there are finalized sales for that item, you will be asked if you want to retro- actively update the cost in those sales records. [if you do NOT want to update and do not want to be prompted for the update to the cost for finalized sales, you can prevent that by adding the key-word DONTUPDATEOLDSALESCOST to the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences.]
In the inventory entry screen there were certain combinations of keyboard, mouse entry and certain selections of major codes that would cause unnecessary warnings of invalid or empty major codes. Those combinations should mostly be better-handled now.
When entering new inventory items via the Purchase Order screen there were cases before where the new item would not inherit the picture from the previous time that same style had been stock. This sequence has been improved in this update.
The entry sequence when entering returns to vendor has been simplified. E.g. since you normally don't need to assign your own return number, if you type the vendor code and Enter or Tab it'll jump to the Ok - Edit List button which is normally the next step. This should make entry a bit faster and some errors can be avoided.
When editing a previously received invoice of incoming merchandise previous versions highlighted the last item on the list. With the update the first blank line is selected first which should feel smoother and more intuitive. Ditto for editing a previous sale where you Unlock the padlock to edit the sale.
Version 1.57 09/21/2010 ===================================================
The Repair Reports feature now creates an Excel XLS file of the report so you can review or reformat the results in different ways.
The Repair Reports now allows you to select the results by Including or Excluding lists of Customer Type. For example this could let you separate the repair list by Retail or Wholesale customers or you might have a customer type indicating a trade customer who picks up on Mondays, or VIP type customers, etc.
In previous versions on the Return to Vendor Report certain figures were not shown in the subtotal and grand total lines and those are now all included.
The inventory Excel XLS output file that gets created when you run an inventory report now includes an extra column for the purchase order number. [output XLS files are put in the VJS Reports folder on the Windows Desktop.]
When you change the major code of an existing item in inventory a new Sku number is assigned. What's new is that a reference to the old Sku number is added to the adjustments activity history of that item. [To change the major code of an item, open and unlock the Inventory Status screen, then Ctrl-Click the Major Code box. To see the adjustments history use the Activity page of this screen and choose Adjustments.]
When applying a miscellaneous credit memo to an in-house charge account, previous versions applied the credit to the Current aging bin. The new version applies the credit starting with the oldest aging bin followed by more recent bins as needed. Further, the on-screen confirmation message after saving the adjustment previously would in some cases show the incorrect balance in the message. (But the actual balance was actually updated correctly.) This has been corrected.
Miscellaneous: An occasional (inert) error message would appear in previous versions after a successful backup from the File Center. This message no longer appears.
The A/R credit-debit memo screen now has access to the Edit Customer Profile screen via the Options button at the top of the screen.
Version 1.56 09/16/2010 ===================================================
Some computer systems had conflicts with the new PA-DSS certified X-Charge. This version has a new X-Charge method which should help in those cases. [ in Preferences, Payment Options, Credit Card Defaults, change the Authorization Type to XCSECURE3 ]
The repair reports screen now lets you select by customer number. This can help if you have some clients who send in many jobs and you need a report for just that one client. [Choose Full Selection from the Repair Report screen to find the Customer Number option.]
The inventory status screen will show you which user originally entered a new inventory item. Currently this shows on the Picture tab (for space reasons) Note that this information will show only for items added after this version update.
The accounts receivable aging reports (introduced in 1.55) can now let you select customers by a date range for the last payment date.
Version 1.55 09/14/2010 ===================================================
This version has the addition of accounts receivable aging reports and past due aging reports. These are accessed via the Accounts Receivable Menu. Note that unlike JS-Classic, both the past-due aging report and the balance aging report are accessed from a single report screen; the selection between the two layouts is the first choice.
Previous versions would not print month-end accounts receivable statements for A/R accounts with negative balances. This is now possible in but it is not the standard setting. Choose For Balances Less Than Zero or Any Balance to include the negative balances
The B.I.G. (Buyers International Group) sales report export Excel files now include columns to identify memo and special order sales. This export file is created when you run the Itemized Sales Report.
Version 1.542 09/08/2010 ===================================================
Entering a payment on account now updates the Last Payment Amount field which previously was not updated.
The Major Class Code editing screen now allows you to make changes directly in the listing page. This can help speed up changes if you need to change many classes at once. E.g. you could copy and paste the Group name into many lines, and more quickly update markup rates on many major class code. Only the inventory type cannot be changed in the grid; That has to be changed in the first (Description) tab.
Miscellaneous The Repair relocation log (see notes in Version 1.54 and 1.461) now also stores with the update log the initials of the clerk who made the change.
Version 1.54 08/31/2010 ===================================================
A new option can sort the inventory reports by invoice number. This will sort primarily by vendor and within vendor by invoice number. Change the Sort By line to Invoice in the Inventory Reports screen.
The Return to Vendor reports now have an extra column: Original Cost. This is useful for items where the return cost value/credit amount is different than the original cost. It's especially useful for Memos which area always listed with a return credit of zero (so they don't add a credit slip in the payables.)
The Repair Status Quick Update screen now has the option to clear the Vendor/Trade Shop name and date and save it to the Notes area for future reference or for a job movement audits. (This is similar to the feature added in Version 1.461 below but for multiple jobs at a time.) In addition, when you choose this Clear and Save feature from either the Repair Status Quick Update screen or the individual job update screen, the date and time of each update is added to the notes.
When you enter a repair via the sales screen, the initial price entered on the sales screen is copied to the Estimate box on the repair screen. However, when you change the estimate or cost on the repair screen that has NOT previously updated the price or cost on the sales screen (in order to avoid corrupting sales figures.) However, for those who prefer to enter repair prices from the repair screen, there is a new option (in the Repairs screen of Preferences) to allow the repair screen cost and estimate to be copied to the sales screen. Even if you do activate this feature, it applies only to sales that have NOT yet been finalized. This feature works from both the individual repair update screen and the Repair Status Quick Update screen.
In previous versions when you add an appraisal to a sales receipt where you had discounted the item, in some cases the appraisal value would default to the discounted price. Now in such cases the higher of the regular selling price or the MSRP will be used as the value.
There has long been an option to 'stamp' sales activity with a cash register code. This can be used, for example, to run separate cash register reports for different workstations. [This can be entered from the Local Defaults Continued page within Preferences.] The new option is to present the option to type a Cash Register Code each time someone logs in. In addition, you could make it required - i.e. as a separate option you can disallow logging-in if a cash register code is not selected. [To do that, add the keyword REGISTERREQUESTED or REGISTERREQUIRED anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Maintenance/Preferences.]
The itemized inventory reports now allow you to show the Replacement Cost instead of the standard cost. From the Inventory Reports screen, select the Show Cost option and change it to Replacement.
In the Charge Account section of the customer profile screen, there are numerous tabs of information and some of them previously did not show the customer's information until you clicked the Edit Account Balances button. Now the information there will show without clicking that button.
Miscellaneous Removed have been some unnecessary security warning errors have could sometimes appear on some inventory screens such as Relocate Inventory Return Stock to Vendor, Physical Inventory, etc.
Version 1.53 08/16/2010 ===================================================
Miscellaneous Change relating to X-Charge credit card processing.
Correct error message that could sometimes appear when running the VJS Update button.
Version 1.52 08/12/2010 ===================================================
Improvements to the data-entry steps when adding customers via X-search. For example, if you type Smith, then see the name you want is not there and click Add, then Smith is added to the new customer record. Or if you type Smith, Tom and click Add or Press Enter (if there is no Tom yet) then both Smith and Tom are added to the new customer record. This (and other adjustments) help speed-up entry of new customers.
Version 1.51 08/10/2010 ===================================================
When opening a company file from the VJS File Center the data verification step can be a bit slow for some users with slower computers or slower networks. This step will now be done just once per day and not every time you start VJS which can save a lot of time.
Previous versions could have required that the Customer Type field be filled in on the customer profile screen for users logged in at lower sign-in levels. [if you clicked or tabbed into that box it wouldn't let you leave without assigning a customer type at levels 1 through 3] This requirement has been removed. [In a future version, it is expected that this will be a security setting that you can control.]
Version 1.50 08/05/2010 ===================================================
When entering repair jobs it is possible to enter an alternative repair number (which could be used to record the job number of jeweler who sent it to you.) There is also the possibility of a separate in-house repair number different from the final sale number. When you search for a repair by number on the sales screen, all three number sequences are searched. However, if you have duplicate numbers (because different jewelers sent you jobs with the same numbers) only the first match was retrieved. In the new version if you want to view all jobs with that number, open the Repair Browser by clicking the down-arrow in the Job Number box of the repair screen, then at the bottom type in the job number and press Enter and all matches will be shown from which you can select one.
In this same area, when in the Job Number box in the repair screen the keyboard shortcut, Alt-Down-Arrow, will replicate clicking the down-arrow to show the Repair Browser.
Version 1.49 08/04/2010 ===================================================
When entering inventory via the multiple-item grid of the Inventory Entry screen, there is now direct access to the extended inventory notes box which is often considered to be a pre-appraisal description. In the bottom left corner of the inventory entry screen choose the Notes button. [This Notes button was previously visible but was not an active feature.]
The inventory Excel file that is created when you run an inventory report has two extra columns, Replacement Cost and Minor Class Code. These columns are often used by B.I.G. - Buyers International Group.
In previous versions, editing a layaway sale and simply removing an item and making no other changes wouldn't always "take." This combination has been addressed in this update.
Credit card size (and other size) "Hint Cards" (aka Product Cards) can be printed from the Inventory Status screen by clicking the Print a Tag icon at the bottom-right corner, then you choose print, then from the tag printing screen choosing Product Card. This has been available for many versions, but what is new is that Right-Clicking the Print a Tag icon is a short-cut to more quickly print a single product card and avoid several steps.
Version 1.48 07/26/2010 ===================================================
When looking-up customers by phone number, if the customer is not already in your customer list, VJS can search Google for that number and in many cases the name can be added to your customer list without needing to type the name and address. This feature has been in VJS for years - it is an option in the Customer section of Preferences] However, periodically Google formatting changes and this feature has not worked for a while. This feature has been updated in Version 1.48
Miscellaneous
When you print a report or a sales receipt or a repair ticket, etc. you have the option to use the designer to customize the layout (reserved for users experienced with databases and/or design software) When you create a custom layout you give it a name and a change in Version 1.48 is that you can use spaces now which can help create more understandable names for the different layouts you might create. E.g. You might create one sales receipt called "No Discount" and another "Discount Option"
When taking physical inventory and you don't check the box to Ask for Location, when you scan an item in multiple locations the program will no longer stop to ask which of the multiple available locations to use. It will just pick the first location to make it easier to quickly scan the inventory without interruption. (In this case the location may not be correct, but in this case you're not wanting to verify separate locations - just the total count per Sku.)
Version 1.47 07/21/2010 ===================================================
Previous versions did not correctly handle using credit slips as payments on in-house charge accounts. The credit slips were not automatically marked as used. You had to edit the slips and manually mark them as used. This update corrects that.
Appraisal printing offers the ability to enter different profiles (different names, along with credentials, etc.) If you enter more than one name then when you print appraisals you can select the name to use for that particular appraisal. To enter different profiles, choose Options from the top of the Appraisal screen, then Appraisal Print Layout. If the Select Appraiser screen appears when you print appraisals but you do Not want that choice/prompt, then choose Appraisal Print Layout as above and delete the entries you don't want so that you have just one appraiser in the list.
Miscellaneous Changes to the option to change style of items via the Inventory Status screen.
Add the Weight column to the inventory Excel export file (created when you run an inventory report.)
The Hot Seller Report will now, by default, include in the remaining inventory the quantity on layaway.
USB-connected Cash drawers by MS Cash drawer are the primary supported draws and USB-connected MMF brand draws are the second choice. Some program changes have been made so that some other drawers may be accepted, such as those using serial ports. This feature is not guaranteed but may give some non-supported drawers an extra lease on life. [In Windows create a Generic/Text-Only printer driver associated with the serial port of the drawer. In VJS Preferences choose Local Settings, choose Other Drawer, select the Printer Driver and enter the ASCII code which opens the drawer -e.g. something like 007,007]
Version 1.461 07/13/2010 ===================================================
The Entire Customer History reports now include the appraisal value along with the appraisal text and date.
The Simple Layaway Report now includes the cents figure instead of rounding to a whole dollar figure.
The repair screen has a Notes page for unlimited miscellaneous notes separate from the Description and Instructions areas. Now you are able to drag and drop text into this box.
Also pertaining to this Notes page, there is now a button on the repair screen which will copy the vendor/trade shop name along with the date to and from this vendor to the notes area and will then clear this vendor box. This way you can maintain a history/audit trail of which vendors the job has been to and when. The button to click is the small green right-arrow just by the Vendor/Trade shop box.
Miscellaneous Changes to the backup routine error reporting.
Changes to the repair details page of the X-Tra Search screen.
Formatting improvements to the additional details pages of in-house charge-account customers.
Version 1.45 06/29/2010 ===================================================
Addition of support for the new Secure method of processing credit cards via Merchant Warehouse.
When entering purchase orders, there is a two-line area for description / notes. This box has been made a bit wider for ease of reading. In addition these notes now print on the purchase order printout, near the top . (note, that if you have made a customized version of the purchase order printout you would need to use the *original version* or create a new customized version based on the *original version* in order to print these notes. As before, the standard purchase order notes that apply to all purchase orders print at the bottom of the printout. These notes are entered via the Payables page in Preferences from the Maintenance Menu.
When entering physical inventory you can choose to enter items by Sku number or by manufacturer code and style number or by part number. When you choose by style, a new option will pre-fill in the manufacturer code so that you need only type the style number. This is for the case where you are taking physical inventory of a particular manufacturer and want to save time. Check the check-box Same Mfg to enable this option. This feature also works for the similar screens such as relocate inventory, deduct inventory, assemble- disassemble, etc.
Version 1.441 06/24/2010 ===================================================
Minor (but important) change for X-Charge credit card processing
Version 1.44 06/23/2010 ===================================================
A new Wish List / Quote report is available to show you all, or a subset of the Wish List or Quote sales. This report is available via the Sales Report by Clerk because it could be common to follow-up with customers by salesperson. Choose the Sales Report by Clerk, then Full Selection, then Change the Wish List or Sale option to Wish List. Note that it would be common, but not required, to change the Sort By option to Clerk and Customer so that you see the customer contact information.
The Return to Vendor reports now show the full vendor name in addition to just the abbreviated vendor code.
When you receive and invoice of merchandise and record it, there is a report available to print a copy of what you just entered. A fifth new layout has been added that includes, the cost price, the retail price and the pictures of the items.
Version 1.43 06/22/2010 ===================================================
Addition of another security setting for sales. The new option can disallow editing finalized sales with a prior date. You can separately allow editing finalized sales with the current date if that option is still needed even if you disallow it for older sales.
The Repair Reports now will include the Alternative Job Number in addition to the primary Job Number. (The Alternative Job Number is sometimes for the repair number of jobs sent to you from other jewelers.)
In JS-Classic the Archive (purge) checkbook feature previously would show error messages and those have been removed now. These didn't cause any problems nor stop the archiving from working but they were bothersome.
Miscellaneous Adjustments to the date column when receiving inventory from a purchase order - in the case where you use both JS-Classic and VJS.
Corrected a potential error message that could occur during month-end closing.
When selling an item priced by weight, previously when you changed the weight sold you had to press Tab after typing the weight or click Ok or fill the weight in with 3 decimal places - but Enter didn't work. Now the Enter key works there.
Version 1.42 06/17/2010 ===================================================
In previous versions the estimate did not print on the 40 column version of the repair tickets and that is fixed in this update.
The tag layout screen allows you to design more than one layout this could be because you print different information on the tags for different merchandise or because you have more than one printer each with a different type of tag. In this update, VJS now remembers the different printer selections you make for different printers. E.g. it can remember that Tag Layout A should go to Printer X and Tag Layout B should go to Printer Y.
Miscellaneous. Prevent an (innocuous) error message when retrieving customers who have an in-house A/R account and who have extremely long notes on the customer profile.
On-screen message when uploading an error report to Compulink that if the error if blocking you, that you'd want to email Compulink to look at the error then instead of at some later date.
Corrected an error when sorting a Cash Requirements payables report by vendor name (instead of by vendor code)
In the Inventory Entry screen you can type a vendor code and then click the down arrow next to the invoice number box to see a list of invoices for that vendor. The list now has the most recent invoices at the top which may make it easier to access them.
In JS-Classic, screen 3,4 to edit Archived repairs would often show you the Current file, instead of the Archive file. That has been corrected.
Version 1.411 06/07/2010 ===================================================
The sales screen and gift certifiate screens now show the account balance for any in-house charge account customer. [This is shown under the name and address in 'zone' 2]
Many reports (e.g. inventory and sales reports) automatically create an Excel spreadsheet file of the results at the same time the report is displayed or printed. A new option allows you to turn this off. Open Preferences from the Maintenance Menu, then find "Option to Save Reports to a File."
You can choose to print the cost-code on tags and to have some inventory screens and reports show the cost code. The cost code is a substitution of letters (or other numbers) for each digit. (This has always been available.) The update adds two options for the cost code. The cost can optionally be the month in two digits followed by the cost to the nearest dollar followed by the year as one digit. E.g. The cost code for an item costing 129.50 received in June 2009 would be 061309. The second option is the same as the first but with the cost part encoded in letters. E.g. the costcode could be 06ACJ9 if your cost code word were ABCDEFGHIJ [To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword CCMETHOD2 or CCMETHOD3]
In JS-Classic, the customer history feature (option 6,A or 4,9) has an option to restrict the customer history to a certain date range. Previously this option worked only with the older, archived sales. Now it works with both the archived and current sales.
Miscellaneous In the inventory and sales screen when you look up inventory by part number and then scan a Pandora EAN barcode you don't need to press Enter to complete the entry
In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the balance for Accounts Receivable shows in the Cust Details square at the bottom-right. Previously this figure wasn't correct for certain customers and this problem is fixed now. (The official balance and all other screens did not previously have a problem.)
Version 1.40 05/26/2010 ===================================================
The Pandora catalog import program has been updated with all the new items for Spring 2010, Summer 2010 and the White Gold LovePods. Includes pictures.
In the sales screen you can set the preferred default type of sale (Cash, Layaway, Special Order, etc.) Certain combinations in previous versions could make it revert to Cash Sale even if that was not the default. This update better enforces the preferred sale type in those cases.
Version 1.39 05/24/2010 ===================================================
A new appraisal format has been added which will print your logo file at the top. This is designed to print on plain paper where you specify a logo file that includes your business name, address and insignia - with dimensions up to 7 1/4" wide by 1 5/8" tall. You should save the logo file (normally jpg) in the CUSTOM folder which is inside your data folder (e.g. typically something like \VISUALJS\DATA\MAIN\CUSTOM) You specify your appraisal logo filename in Preferences in the same Half Page Receipt section where you specify your logo files for receipts and credit slips.
When you use the Inventory Status screen to search by style previous versions presented the first occurrence of that style (in those cases where there were multiple instances.) The current version will retrieve the instance which is still in stock. Or, if there are multiple Sku's of that style in stock, will show you a pick list.
Also in the Inventory Status screen, there are new keyboard shortcuts: Alt-S to search by Sku Alt-Y to search by Style Alt-P to search by Part Number.
When receiving an invoice of merchandise and you enter a restocked item - an item that was previously in the inventory list - the details from the previous item are copied to the new Sku (this has always been the case) A change in the new version is that the program will jump directly to the Quantity box, bypassing confirmation of the major, minor codes, description which saves keystrokes and time. If needed (if you usually received just 1) you can make the program wait directly on the OK box of that line to further speed things up. (to do this enter the keyword OKWHENRESTOCK in Miscellaneous Options in Preferences) In any situation, you can always adjust the description, cost, price and quantity by simply clicking in the appropriate box.
When you restock a previously received style, the picture is also inherited from the previous item. This has always been the case, however, previously the picture didn't immediately show for that item - it would show once you accepted the new item and if you went back to that line. Now the picture will appear immediately, which: a) can help immediately verify that you received the corect item or b) inform you immediately whether or not you already have a picture for that style and if he picture on file is correct.
If print a receipts including the integrated credit card authorization the message and lines you print can now be wider than in previous versions. (If nothign else you can print a longer underline on which the customer signs.) Previously the message lines were limited to just 38 letters. However, if you print receipts using the roll-of-paper 40-column reciepts, you should limit the message length to avoid wrapping around.
Miscellaneous In Preferences, you can now enter a standard expected repair turnaround of ten or more (nine being the previous upper limit.)
The Return to Vendor screen shows the current weight in stock of the item you are returning. (if it's an item which is valued by weight.)
Version 1.38 05/13/2010 ===================================================
A new security option is available in Maintenance, Preferences to restrict access to the Delete Sale option from the sales screen. This feature does not apply to sales that have not yet been saved, nor quotes nor wish list entries.
The additional gift receipt option (see notes from version 1.37 below) now has a side-by-side layout
Under certain situations, changing a report or a receipt layout style would not retrieve the preferred customized version in previous versions. That has now been addressed.
In JS-Classic the 6,2,1 Sales Comparison Report previously reported only on the current file so sales over two year old may not have been include. Now both the current and archived sales files are included so the report will go back further.
Version 1.37 05/07/2010 ===================================================
The sales screen has a further gift receipt option. If you use a 40-column printer it was previously a bit awkward to print gift receipts because it required printing a regular receipt, retrieving the sale, changing the receipt format to Gift then printing the new one, then changing the receipt format back to regular for the subsequent sale. The new option for 40 column receipts is much easier: from the sales screen choose Options at the top then Print Gift Receipt. In addition to the 40 column receipt this approach also supports the full-page receipt. (the other side-by-side receipt formats didn't need any such addition because there was already the option to print a regular receipt and a gift receipt side by side simultaneously.) As with the previously available gift receipts, this format does not print the customer name, date of purchase, price, etc. Note that you would want to check that you have a suitable gift receipt message which you can specify in Preferences from the Maintenance Menu.
The Pay Invoices Payable/Cut Checks screen has the option to sort the list by either Vendor Code or Vendor Name. Previously the Vendor Name option wasn't available but it is now.
For Accounts Receivable customers, the Charge Account Setup screen has the optional settings for special interest rates. Previously these values were entered as fractions - e.g. 0.12 which was confusing. Now these are entered as percentages - e.g. 12.00% [note that you should leave these special interest rates blank for most A/R customers so that they get the standard store rate. Only fill in these values for customers who must be charged a different rate than then usual rate.]
Miscellaneous In JS-Classic the sales summary report by vendor (6,2,2,Standard) previously showed the vendor code but not the vendor name. Now it shows both.
The Pandora catalog import program has a new option to more quickly assign Shopkeeper Class Codes to Pandora Class Codes.
Adjustment to the 1,7 layaway report in JS-Classic.
Version 1.36 04/28/2010 ===================================================
The sales screen expects to find items by Sku Number, but you can also search by Style Number or Part Number by clicking the down-arrow by the Sku box then selecting either Style No or Part No What's new here is that pressing keyboard shortcut Ctrl-P will directly switch to Part Number lookup mode.
This is particularly useful for Pandora where the 13-digit Pandora EAN barcode is stored in the Part Number. I.e., if you have a Pandora booklet containing a picture, description, price, style and barcode you can ring up sales by scanning the EAN barcode
(A similar shortcut Ctrl-S, for style, was added previously; see the 1.108 update information below)
A new 40-Column sales receipt format has been added. The new layout is "24 40-Column Gift Receipt" which contains no price, customer or date information which your customer can include when presenting the gift. The gift receipt can include a special Gift Message (exchange, sizing options, etc) which you can customize in Preferences from the Maintenance Menu.
The Layaway Statements now assume you want to see only those layaways with a balance over $1. Previously, if you didn't fill in a value there then you would have seen all layaways both with and without a balance which would have been far too long.
Miscellaneous In JS-Classic the Assemble & Disassemble Reports will create an Excel version in the JSREPORT folder.
Miscellaneous Z report changes in JS-Classic.
Version 1.35 04/22/2010 ===================================================
The Accounts Receivable Payment-on-Account screen has a new receipt format - for full-page, invoice style receipts.
An available option in Preferences it to NOT ask for a minor code when you receive new inventory (the minor code will default to 10. However, turning off this feature previously caused the inventory entry screen to show an unnecessary reminder/warning about the cost being zero. Now this extra prompt will not be there if you uncheck this option in Preferences, Inventory, Inventory Continued.
Miscellaneous In the list manager for customer types you can no longer add entries with more than two characters. (previously the lookup list allowed them, but the customer type could only accept two characters.)
The repair reports will now add to the job number the line number of the repair. This applies only to sales tickets which have multiple job tracking lines which all share the same job number. E.g. for job R888 the first line will show as R888 but the subsequent jobs will show as R888-2, R888-3, etc.
Version 1.34 04/08/2010 ===================================================
In the Customer X-Tra search screen, the payments list (bottom right corner) now has an extra column to show the initials of the clerk who was logged in when the payment was taken. This is independent of the initials assigned to the sale as the salesperson.
There is an option in Preferences to turn off the printing of pictures on sales receipts. Previously, unchecking this option did not remove the pictures (there was a different option which controlled it) but now unchecking it will remote the pictures. [So, if your pictures suddenly don't print, be sure to check this option in Preferences.]
When repair jobs are entered (or edited) you can now require that the Location box or the Vendor/Trade shop box be filled in. [Choose Maintenance, Preferences, Repairs, Repair Defaults Continued, Require that Repair Location or Vendor be Filled-in]
Miscellaneous In Preferences, in the Drop Down Pick List Manager it is now much quicker to remove many entries at once. Just check each item using the checkbox in the trash-can column. [previously available but slow for deleting multiple items at once]
The cash requirements report previously didn't always show all three letters of the vendor code in the subtotal lines for each vendor and now they should fit completely in all cases.
In the Inventory Status screen you can select the Style History tab to see other Sku's with the same style. From there you can double-click one of the other Sku's to retrieve that Sku. Previously the Activity Page was not being refreshed (for the new Sku) when you selected a new Sku in this way, but now it is updated.
JS-Classic index cards now saves its printing defaults.
Other misc.
Version 1.33 03/31/2010 ==================================================
In the Customer X-Tra Search screen, the summary profile of the customer (bottom right corner) now includes the e-mail address. This can alert you to missing e-mail addresses without having to retrieve the full profile screen.
Miscellaneous Adjustments to the rounding of prices when receiving items priced by weight with several decimal places of weight or cost. In JS-Classic, the vendor profile screen now has the website box available. (this was previously available only in VJS) Changes to index cards in Js-Classic Adjustments for particular cases in 4,9 sales & payments histories in JS-Classic. Adjustments for particular cases in month end statements in JS-Classic.
Version 1.32 03/24/2010 ==================================================
The Repair Status Quick Update form now adds the option to update the Due Date. As with the other updateable fields, you can either update them individually or in bulk.
+ Miscellaneous other additions, adjustments and fixes for both JS-Classic and VJS. Previously couldn't completely delete a layaway sale Vendor labels weren't available in JS-Classic Inventory Audit report changes for items which had been transferred in by interstore-transfer Posting report change for the unlikely case where a sale had a blank date. Improvements to the import from old DOS Shopkeeper to VJS. Improved on-screen help/wording when changing the style number of an item from the Inventory Status screen Etc.
Version 1.31 03/17/2010 ==================================================
When running the Z-Report to clear out the cash register figures for the shift it is now required for other copies of Shopkeeper to exit back to the VJS File Center (or, quite JS completely for JS-Classic) for the few moments it takes to run a Z report. This is to address issues that arose when others had sales activity in the sales screen while the Z report was run.
The printed return to vendor screen now makes it easier to type a longer message and the printed copy will print the entire message typed in instead of the abbreviated version that previous versions printed.
The option to select a date format other than American-standard Month/Day/Year was previously in Preferences, but didn't take effect. You can now select DD/MM/YY or DD-MM-YY, etc.
If you often print two different receipt formats for the same sale (e.g. printing to a printer, then printing to a PDF print driver) a new option makes that somewhat easier by showing the receipt Print Options dialog box twice for the same sale. To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword 2XRECEIPT. Note that if you activate this option you should NOT check the box Skip This Setup Box for this Printing Task for receipts - otherwise you won't be able to select the different layout.
The option to select a date format other than American-standard Month/Day/Year was previously in Preferences, but didn't take effect. You can now select DD/MM/YY or DD-MM-YY, etc.
When receiving inventory and you type a style number, Shopkeeper uses the most recent copy of that style to fill in the details for the new item. If you stock many styles where there are different variations (different description, picture, etc) for the same style number, then you may want to be able to pick a particular Sku to copy -not just the most recent. To activate this option go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword INVENTORYEXACTLINE
+ Miscellaneous
Version 1.30 - 1.301 03/11/2010 ==================================================
Further changes to the Pandora program. previously the Pandora program would just update and correct *existing* items in your inventory and sales files. You can now Import from the new catalog all the items you have not yet stocked. This way, when you next receive Pandora you can type the style or scan the barcode of the items received and all the information will be filled in for you.
+ Miscellaneous clarification of text and messages in the Hot Seller report screen.
Version 1.292 03/08/2010 ==================================================
Further change to the Pandora program so that you can save the results list (of your items which could not be found in the Pandora catalog) to an Excel file for further review.
Also, the results page shows an R next to each Retired item in the Pandora catalog (just for your information.)
Added the Barcode numbers to various Retired items which previously did not have this EAN /Part Number available. (you can choose Download Pandora Catalog and re-run the update if you had more un-matched results than expected the first time around.)
+ Miscellaneous Fix possible sales screen problem if you had turned off X-tra Search
Version 1.291 03/05/2010 ==================================================
A Further change to the Pandora program so that it will also verify and update if needed, items in your inventory list that already have the new Pandora style. The previous version would have skipped those items and so would not have assigned them the Pandora EAN / barcode number nor assigned them a picture.
I.e. this works better for the case where you have a mix of old and new Pandora styles.
Version 1.29 03/05/2010 ==================================================
Addition of a new program to update your Pandora inventory list to match the thousands of new style numbers, costs and prices. It corrects the style numbers for existing and prior inventory along with existing sales records.
In addition it adds the Pandora EAN (barcode) number to the inventory file to the Part Number entry in Shopkeeper inventory. With this barcode number filled in, when you receive new merchandise, instead of typing the style number, you can scan the barcode.
Further, this program has the option to download, install and link pictures for the entire catalog.
NOT included with this version is the option to add to your inventory list (with zero quantity) items which you have NOT previously stocked. That option will be available soon.
You access this program by choosing Options, Pandora from the initial File Center screen.
+ Miscellaneous
Version 1.28 02/25/2010 ==================================================
When receiving merchandise the vendor's style is one of the first entries after which Shopkeeper looks up that style. This helps when restocking inventory as all the previous details are pre-filled in for you on the new item. Entering a style is required. However, if you have a significant number of items without a style such as estate jewelry this look-up feature can be counterproductive because you might make up a style such as TIFFANY RING and you would not want the details from the previous item with that style to be added to the new item. For such cases, you can now type N/A, or any words beginning with N/A into the style and it will not be looked up. You can select a different prefix if you like via the Inventory defaults in Preferences.
The "Style Hist" page of the Inventory Status screen shows all the different Sku numbers with the same style number. This list has a new column showing the location of each of those Sku's. If any of those Sku's is split between locations it will read: Split and you can double-click Split to see the breakdown.
The end-of-day cash register report "Sales Payment Spreadsheet" has a new optional layout in a summarized format with one line per day with the total of each type of payment (cash, check, each card, etc.)
When you receive merchandise you can print a copy of the received shipment. A new optional layout includes both the retail price and the cost.
Miscellaneous (JS-Classic venchg utility has the option to not change manufacturer code)
+ Other
Version 1.27 02/19/2010 ==================================================
New option to run Checkbook Reports in Accrual basis in order to match the P&L (For this you need to choose All Accounts and GJ Entries, sort by Expense Code, choose Accrual option.)
This version does NOT include checks which were paid against invoices-payable, but it DOES include values of invoices- payable in full as of the date they were received, regardless of when, or whether, they were paid. This is the same approach taken by the P&L in JS-Classic.
The Simple Layaway Report has a new option to allow you to choose how it is sorted: Last Name, Customer Number, Balance Due, Date, Sale Number.
Version 1.262 02/18/2010 ==================================================
Remove benign error message when running the Accounts Payable report when sorted by vendor name.
Adjustments to Checkbook Reports when sorting by Expense Code.
Remove brief flashing on screen the inventory location selection box when a selection of an inventory location is not needed.
+ Miscellaneous other adjustments and fixes, including to importing text files in Physical Inventory
Version 1.26 02/18/2010 ==================================================
VJS has the addition of Checkbook Reports. This report screen also can report General Journal entries. As with any report screen, the first "Quick Selection" page of report criteria contains the most common options, but you will want to take a look at the "Full Selection" page to know what other selections you can make. Also as with any report screen, you can save certain combinations of selection criteria as Memorized Reports.
Version 1.25 02/16/2010 ==================================================
On any report screen there is a button "Clear Selections." In previous versions is cleared the selections so much so that the combination was sometimes not useful. Now this button clears back to the usual default settings. This is particularly useful if you have set up a preferred memorized report combination as a default (so all the selections are filled in with a pre-saved combination) - but if you want to run a more generic report you would have had to undo each of the pre-saved settings. The "Clear Selections" button will now save you the trouble in that case.
In JS-Classic you can override / more directly assign a particular image file for an inventory item from the 2,8,E Edit Inventory screen. [double-click on the Memo box next to the Picture File box. This will show you the list of image files associated with that item. VJS can show several pictures for one item but JS-Classic can only show the first. However, this list of picture files will be the entire list if there are more than one.] [However, it is best when possible to manage and view pictures via VJS instead of JS-Classic.]
In VJS and JS-Classic, negative payments (refunds) on A/R Account previously where showing on the X-report as a negative charge sale as well as a a negative payment on account. Now they will appear only on the negative payment on account line.
+ Miscellaneous other adjustments and fixes.
Version 1.241 02/12/2010 ==================================================
The Return-to-Vendor packing sheet will now exclude the cost columns for those whose password doesn't allow access to the cost information. [From the Inventory Menu you can add or retrieve a return-to-vendor list and from within that list you can print a sheet for just that one list.] [This option is distinct from the "Return to Vendor Reports" option available from the Reports Menu. That creates reports on all several returns over a time period.]
In JS-Classic the sales report 8,6,E "Cash Register Usage by Time & Day" now simultaneously creates an Excel copy of the results in the JSREPORT folder (on the Windows desktop)
In JS-Classic when printing sales receipts for a customer with in-house charge accounts sometimes the customer's outstanding balance did not print and with this update it always will. [ Provided you have turned on this option in page 15 of Store Information Defaults]
Normally the Current sales file is expected to contain the previous two years plus the current year. Sales older than two years old are automatically archived when you close December. If for some reason you have too many years in your Current file and want to move them to the Archive file, JS-Classic has a new option to make that easier. The Archive Sales option is menu choice 8,E,1 which is the same as before. However, before you could only purge one period for one year at a time. Now, if you choose period -1 you can purge an entire year at a time.
Version 1.24 02/10/2010 ==================================================
When looking up a Sku with the Inventory Search screen and its list of Sku's. By default it shows all inventory Sku's in stock and all repair Sku's. Under certain conditions it may not have shown all repair Sku's unless you choose Repairs or Zero Qty items. Those conditions have been identified and addressed.
An additional 3-part repair envelope layout has been added, "04 3-Part Repair Env. No-name on part 2, Msg Left & Right." The other repair envelopes do not print the repair message disclaimer on the in-house copy, but this one does. This can be useful if you have the customer sign the disclaimer and you want to keep a copy. Also, as with the others, the customer copy also has the same disclaimer.
For those who process credit cards via Merchant Warehouse, VJS has a "Merchant Warehouse Transaction Report." This report recently stopped working due to a software change at Merchant Warehouse. This VJS update re-enables those reports. (Those reports are also available directly via your on-line virtual terminal account with Merchant Warehouse.)
In Js-Classic the 6,2,G Report is "Sales Comparisons by Timeframe" Previously the option to group / Subtotal by Manufacturer didn't work and now it does.
Version 1.231 02/02/2010 ==================================================
When you start entering a sale and delete it or if you retrieve a wish-list/quote sale and delete it, the sale number is recycled. That's not new but what is new is that if you retrieve a fairly old wish-list/quote sale (one older than 25 sales tickets back) and delete it, now that number is NOT recycled. This is to avoid unnecessary and large jumps in sale number sequences.
Not actually a change, but an observation: If you have a very long sales receipt message, that can cause pagination problems on the printed receipts. What can work in some cases is to create a custom copy of the receipt and shrink the receipt message font to a very small size such as Arial Narrow 4pt or 5pt. As an example, the *Original Version* of the new 11 Side-By-Side Laser, Raised Summary receipt has the message printed at 5pt.
+ Miscellaneous other adjustments.
Version 1.23 01/28/2010 ==================================================
A new 2-part side-by-side sales receipt format for laser / inkjet printers has been added. The new layout positions the sales message / total area to just after the last item (not all the way at the bottom of the page.) This may help those jewelers where a long receipt message can intermittently cause formatting problems. [when printing sales receipts, the new format is: "11 Side-By-Side Laser, Raised Summary" ]
In Both Js-Classic and VJS, on the customer profile screen both the Assigned Clerk and the Notes / Comments areas can be password- protected even if access to the remainder of the profile is changeable. [for the clerks, the same security setting as Change the Clerk on a sale is used. For the Notes, use the setting Edit Customer Profile Notes ]
+ Miscellaneous other adjustments.
Version 1.22 - 1.221 01/21/2010 ==================================================
A (fairly rare) combination of events on the sales screen could cause a new sale to be given sale numbers with a different sequence number. That has been addressed.
Related: If you ended up with a new sale actually added to the Archive file, there's a utility to move it to the current file. [open Js-Classic and choose File, Misc, Utilities, SALUNA]
The inventory report XLS export file will now include a column with the vendor name. This is particularly useful for reports intended for the B.I.G. buying group. [When you run an itemized inventory report, an XLS copy is created simultaneously in the VJS Reports folder which is on the desktop.]
When opening the price tag layout designer with a non-standard tag shape, the tag proportions on-screen could have appeared incorrect temporarily until you clicked somewhere. This has been resolved.
Change to repairs in JS-Classic. When entering a repair via the sales screen the description in the sales line will now transfer to the Instructions box in the repair screen (similar to how previous DOS versions behaved)
The 'Half-Page' repair ticket in JS-Classic would previously not print all the description or instruction lines in certain case. This has been addressed
Version 1.213 01/18/2010 ==================================================
The Physical Inventory screen now makes it easier to enter quantities over 1000.
In Physical Inventory, the list of items normally displays in the order they were scanned in. You can sort the list by Sku by clicking the Sku No. column heading. If you sorted but then want to UN-sort, double-click the column heading.
In Physical Inventory the Auto-Add option is enabled by default to make entering the list quicker. You may turn if off if you often have quantities other than 1. Turning it OFF previously didn't work well - but that has been addressed.
Choosing the Picture-Check option when doing a cleanup previously could result an error message (there was no real problem but it showed an error message anyway) [this is the utility to re-scan the picture files and inventory list. Usually it's used when you copy the entire catalog of picture files for a particular vendor. e.g. see notes below under Version 0.948
Version 1.211 01/14/2010 ==================================================
Minor Adjustments Physical inventory process. Clarification on the report header. Change where previously it was possible that a few old physical counts were not cleared.
Miscellaneous other adjustments.
Version 1.21 01/13/2010 ==================================================
Addition of Physical Inventory entry and Reports. You can find the Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu.
You can enter physical counts by typing them, scanning them or by reading in a text file list of Sku numbers. You can enter counts from multiple computers at the same time and all counts go into the single physical counts list. You can enter physical counts in a single or multiple sittings. When you do your next physical inventory, down the road, you'll want to delete the previous physical count list.
You can do all inventory or focus on one major or vendor code.
When you run the report, there are two main versions: The Physical Inventory Exception Report shows just the problem items The Physical Inventory Comparison Report shows all inventory and compares the expected and physical values.
The Exception report has the option for showing pictures, but the comparison report does not. Both reports sort only by Sku number.
Currently the physical inventory reports are not organized by location codes - that option will be available later.
By default, the physical inventory reports assume you have not entered counts for layaway items - but you can override that.
Dummy Sku numbers are excluded (those ending in -0001)
These reports are based on quantities only, not weight. So, if there are some items valued by weights, the cost figures may not
Physical inventory entry or reports do not adjust your inventory. They just show possible problems that you may need to research or correct.
Version 1.207 01/12/2010 ==================================================
+ Minor Adjustments Previously it was difficult or not possible to remove payments on gift certificates / gift slips. That has been corrected.
Version 1.206 01/12/2010 ==================================================
Sales and repair numbers are usually numeric-only, but it's possible to add other letters or characters (e.g. 1001A, 1001/B, etc) You now have the option to allow *only* digits. This can avoid some unintended changes to sale numbers. mv.restore_public("Z_*") && formerly RESTORE FROM &zz_Path_DATA.SYS_VAR ADDITIVE [technically, if you already have a letter at the beginning of the repair number sequence, e.g. R1011, the exiting letter may stay, but the user may not add further letters.]
Version 1.205 01/11/2010 ==================================================
+ Minor Adjustments In the Inventory Entry form, on the Purchase Orders page when you click the drop down arrow to see the list of purchase orders, two additional columns show: Date and Notes. This extra information can help you more easily find the right P.O.
Further, when you add special order items via the sales screen and create a purchase order at the same time, the customer name and sale number will be copied to the Notes box of the purchase order.
Related: when you add special order items via the sales screen and create a purchase order at the same time, you have the option now to make the purchase order number the same as the sale number. (prefixed with the letter S) [To do that, add the keyword SALENO2PO anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Maintenance/Preferences.]
In Js-Classic, the 'Half-Page' format of the repair envelope and the Description and Instructions were previously mis-aligned and this has been corrected now.
Version 1.20 01/06/2010 ==================================================
Change to itemized sales tax report: previously, taxable items on even-exchange sales (zero total sales totalling to zero tax) would be included in the Non-Taxable-Only selection. Now, choosing non-tax will exclude those items. [affects both JS-Classic - option 6,2,3 and VJS - Itemized Sales Report ]
When adding sales, the next available sale number is suggested but you can select another number. You can now set a security level so that for some users the next available number will be assigned without the chance to change the sale number. [See the Sales Security page of Preferences - "Able to Select Next Sale Number"]
+ Various Adjustments When retrieving the repair details screen directly from the X-tra Search Screen that pops up from the sales screen (not via the line item of the sale and not from the repairs screen) the customer name didn't appear on-screen (though it would print on the ticket) This has been changed to show the customer name immediately.
An improved utility is available to link inventory items to a catalog of inventory pictures - if your vendors supply such a list of picture files to you. [If needed, ask us for details.]
Misc.
Version 1.19 01/04/2010 ==================================================
You can now make VJS notify you with an un-ignorable alert when you retrieve customers who have been assigned special customer types. [Customer Types are added to the customer on the name and address form. The list of customer types which should show the special alert is put in on the Custoer page of Maintenance, Preferences. Issue Warnings when Pulling up Customers with the Following Customer Types"] The Alert screen does not show you want teh customer type means - but it could be a 'good' alert (perhaps VIP) or a 'bad' alert - BC 'Bounced a Check.']
Changing the customer on a sale was previously problematic but is now reliable. [ To change the customer on a sale, while you're editing the sale either click on X-Search at the top, or select a new customer from the customer drop list in Zone 2]
The Accounts Payable report previously showed an error message when you selected to show just a single vendor. This has been fixed.
+ Various Adjustments An improved utility is available to link inventory items to a catalog of inventory pictures - if your vendors supply such a list of picture files to you. [If needed, ask us for details.]
The current Bonus / Loyalty Points level can be displayed on the customer lookup screen right as you record new sales or lookup old ones. [Add keyword SHOWBP to Miscellaneous Options in Prefereces. If needed, ask us for details.]
If you sometimes use a PDF print driver to print sales receipts to suggested PDF name will be slightly improved - by including the customer name and sale # as part of the PDF filename. [tested with PrimoPDF - but may also work with CutePDF]
The position of the buttons on the Main Menu (and other menu) can be adjusted by dragging them. You can now prevent those buttons from beeing dragged accidentally. To do that, add the keyword FREEZEMENU anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Maintenance/Preferences.
The Main Menu buttons are designed to be single-clicked. Double-clicking them can cause the selected form (sales, repairs, etc.) to be opened and then minimized. If you prefer to double-click the main menu buttons, add the keyword DBLCLICKMENU anywhere in the Miscellaneous Options box in Maintenance/Preferences. With this option on single-clicking will not effect a selection. [the choice to both single- and double-click is not currently possible.]
Version 1.180 12/16/2009 ==================================================
If an invoice was entered under the wrong vendor code or with the wrong invoice number you can correct it by retrieving the invoice on the Inventory Entry screen then clicking the padlock just to the right of the vendor code or invoice number. But... there were cases where that didn't work and a correction has been made in that area.
Fix for a problem that could have occurred if you edited a layaway sale and make a payment by credit slip (and made no other changes) and the payment might not have stuck.
Selection of a credit slip payment on a layaway or special order sale is now easier. Previously you used to have to select a payment amount before selecting the credit slip. Now you can leave the payment amount as zero and just click Credit Slip to bring up the list of credit slips. This helps because you might expect to use an entire credit slip as a deposit but might not know in advance the exact value of the slips.
An alternative technique of reading credit cards is available for those with occasional problems in swiping credit cards - such as the card swiping screen freezing up. [ask us for details if this concerns you]
A change in the sales tax report - which can help when you run reports for taxable sales only - and where you have taxable refund/return sales.
The sales total figure on the Sales page of the Clerk Maintenance is back. (it disappeared after a recent update.)
There had been a small number of cases where the payments details wouldn't print on the sales receipts - mostly if there was a sale number duplicated. This has been addressed.
A fifth format for printing Purchase Orders has been added. It shows the Sku Number, the picture and NOT the cost.
Version 1.178 - 1.179 12/04/2009 ==================================================
Correct a possible quirk in the inventory entry screen when you receive merchandise with a style similar to a previous style it could find the wrong item (instead of assuming an all-new never-before-stocked item)
If you like to often fill in the Dept Code box on the sales screen and don't want to click on that box with the mouse you can make the Dept box automatically be the next box highlighted after you enter the clerk. [You can activate this option by adding the key-word SALEDEPT anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Options" box in "Maintenance", "Preferences", "General" ]
Payments on Account (on in-house charge account balances) Correction to a problem in previous versions where entering a cash-payment and then using the cash-tendered feature to calculate change would cause an account balance problem by the amount of the change.
In previous versions on the Payment on Account screen, retrieving a previous payment and then deleting it would delete the payment but the account balance would not be changed. Now the balance will be adjusted.
On the Payment on Account screen there are two new shortcuts in the Payment Amount box You can press B (for Balance) or you can double-click the Payment Amount box to fill in the remaining outstanding balance.
+ Various Adjustments Adjustment to the 01 Side-by-Side receipt layout where previously printing both a clerk and a Dept code could cause text to overlap the next line.
A change to how items are found when searching by manufacturer code and style number. (only makes a difference for certain obscure combinations)
Version 1.177 12/02/2009 ==================================================
The Itemized Sales Report now allows you to select sales by Department code. You can include or exclude certain lists of department codes. These optional department codes are assigned to the sales screen and have nothing to do with the inventory major class codes. [this report choice was visible before but was not active.]
The behavior of the X-Tra Search screen for customers has been modified for those times when you type a name that is not found. Previously the list of customers would be positioned at the end of the list (sorted a particular way) and it might not have been clear to the user if the name was found or not. Now, large "Not Found" message is shown and the list of customers is positioned at the last "match". E.g. If you type BOBX, and BOB was not found but BOB had been, the list goes back to BOB. This should make the search for customers somewhat clearer.
When receiving merchandise from the Enter Inventory screen, typically the first box you fill in for each item is the Style number. If the style has been stocked before the remaining information is filled in for the new Sku. A change in this area is that you can now type in either the item's Style or the item's Part Number. This can be useful if you receive merchandise pre-tagged by the manufacturer with a number that's not the style. E.g. the tag could be the UPS or EAN number - which you can enter into each Sku's Part Number box. [think Pandora, Troll, Chamilia, watches, etc]
Important Note: If you type or scan into the style box a Part Number that has NOT previously been stocked then the inventory screen will continue to let you add the new item. However, it cannot know for sure if the number was the style or part number of the new item and it will assume that the number is the style. In this case you should erase the part number and type in the style number so that the style is correct. You should, later in the item entry process, enter the part number in the part number box so that it will be available for future restocking of that style.
+ Various Adjustments The ability to enter repair descriptions and instructions in both upper- and lower-case had been thought added previously in Version 1.171 - but wasn't actually available until 1.177. For details - see notes 1.171 below.
Version 1.176 11/30/2009 ==================================================
Accounts Payable Reports have been added. Find this option on the Reports Menu or the Accounting Menu. Note that there are currently three variations. Standard, 'Canadian' and 'Rebate'. You select the variation you want from the Print Options box (after you choose Start) The selection you make remains in effect for later runs of the A/P report - until you change it. The 'Canadian' version adds the Taxes column which is typically run to show the GST tax paid on incoming merchandise. The 'Rebate' version adds the columns to show the rebate points you earn when buying merchandise from certain vendors in your buying group [add the rebate percentage on the vendor profile screen.]
The Return Stock to Vendor screen allows negative quantities for the cases where items sent back to vendor for repairs are received back after repair or replacement.
The carrier Route box was added to the customer profile page - in the "Other" tab/page.
The Sales Tax Report was adjusted slightly for the rare case where you have a second sales tax applicable only over a certain amount. The sales tax report previous showed the items flagged as taxable for this second tax even if they were not over the required amount. Now those items will not show on the 'taxable only' report. [in either case the actual tax calculation is the same]
The Inventory Status screen has a page/tab showing various possible inventory activity including Assemble-Disassemble activity. The cost figure now does not show in the assemble- disassemble area for users without access to the cost and also if you have chosen (in preferences) to not show the cost on the Inventory Status screen. Also on the Activity Page of Inventory status, the sales activity grid now shows the sales clerk for each item sold.
Version 1.174-5 11/16/2009 ==================================================
The sales screen makes it easier to find open layaway sales with a balance due. From the sales number area at the top-right of the sales screen, click the Drop-down arrow to pop-up the sales search windows. There is a new option at the the bottom "Open Sales Only?" If checked only sales with a balance due will show. [This check-box is available if you choose the 'Current File' option or 'Quotes/Wish List' or 'Archived' selections, - but not yet with the 'Recently Viewed' selection.
The Hot-Seller reports previously had some problems on the grand total lines which is now fixed. (the subtotals for each vendor had always been ok.) Also in the Hot-seller / Reorder report area, if you choose zero for minimum quantity sold, that means you want to see your inventory and sales figures, summarized by each style within each vendor; ALL of your inventory, not just the items which had sales. Previously, if you chose zero for sales but did *not* modify the turnover speed criterion (i.e. left it 270 days), then you would have results more limited than you expected. Now, if you select zero for the minimum quantity sold the turnover speed criterion is implicitly ignored. (e.g. , before you would have had to explicitly indicate turnover speed better than 9999 to get the full results.)
The Credit-Card Payments Report now has the option to be run to match the X/Z report. Previously it was just a selection by date (which is still available.) That way, for example, if you Z-out the register at the end of a shift at 2pm, and then Z-out again at 6pm you can run a credit card detail report for just the afternoon.
Adjustments which can significantly speed up receipt printing for some users (with lower network performance.)
+ Various Adjustments Mostly related to easing the import of old Shopkeeper for DOS data, attaching workstations to an existing VJS network, etc.
Version 1.173 11/03/2009 ================================================== + Various Adjustments, including The minimum payment for accounts receivable statements was previously limited to 99% but now has room for 100% of the balance. The same applies to the interest rates, though that would rarely be needed. (These settings are found in the Accounts Receivable section of the Preferences screen found on the Maintenance Menu.)
Some users had seen a few sporadic instances of items receiving no commission. Some changes in that area should help to address that.
When you run a reorder report, an Excel file called INVSTYLE is added to the VJS Reports folder (this is not new) what is new is the additional column QtyOnOrder which has the remaining outstanding ordered quantity for each style.
The receipt formatting for some receipt layouts has been changed to reduce the chance of words being cut at line breaks. (this can make the receipt marginally taller, but is usually preferred.)
Version 1.172 10/30/2009 ===============================================================
The month-end closing steps can now be done in VJS (instead of having to use JS-Classic). Choose this from the Accounting Menu (or you can customized the Maintenance Menu and add it there.)
The Chart of Accounts Defaults section of Preferences is easier to fill in now because the list of accounts and account numbers is visible. [From Maintenance, choose Preferences, then Chart of Accounts, Assets, etc. You can select an account for any particular entry by double clicking the account in the list]
Related to the above, Chart of Accounts Defaults is now available as a standalone option from the Accounting Menu.
In the Chart of Accounts screen (not Chart of Accounts Defaults) when you are on the Balances screen, the figures for the current month are not normally up-to-date unless you've just run a balance sheet or P&L. The new version has a Recalculate button so you can see the current month figures without having to run those reports.
The Inventory Report by Location has a number of different layouts. The "Location Summary" version previously has problems in the cost column for each location which is now fixed. The "Class Summary" version has improved formatting now.
VJS now has the option to adjust the To-Date figures on the X / Z Reports without having to open JS-Classic. [Choose Sales Reports, X / Z Report then To-Date Figures]
When you enter the final payment on a layaway you need to type in the total balance due to close out the sale. Since the amount will not usually be a round figure (e.g. 192.17) VJS has always had the shortcut of double-clicking the Payment Amount box to fill in the balance due (or by clicking a small arrow by the words Balance Due.) One more shortcut has been added: you can press the letter B (for Balance) on the keyboard so you avoid using the mouse.
Some users occasionally encounter garbled reads of credit cards which hangs the credit card processing screen. Some changes *may* help in that area. Let us know if you still encounter that.
+ Various Adjustments, including The month-end accounts receivable statements can now print your preferred statement date. Previously they would always print the date the accounts were last aged.
Version 1.171 10/19/2009 ===============================================================
Some VJS users were not able to locate the Repair Reports feature. If you had that issue, then after the update open the Reports Menu, then choose Customize Menu, then Reset to Default.
If you have some vendor codes with just two characters then running an inventory report for just a single vendor code could have shown all items from all vendors which start with those two letters. e.g. choosing AB to AB could show AB and ABA and ABC etc. That will not happen now.
The commission report (or sales report by clerk even if you don't work with commissions) has an extra column for 'Profit' per clerk. There are many variations on the commisson report but the one where there was room to add this extra column is the one you get when you choose to Sort Report by Clerk Summary.
The Customer Details tab (bottom right corner) of the customer X-tra Search screen now includes a line showing year-to-date purchase and previous years' purchase totals. This gives you useful information at the point of sale witout having to retrive the full customer profile.
+ Various Adjustments, including The instructions and descriptions area of the repair screen were always intended to be upper-case only. There was a period of time where they allowed upper- and lower-case but that has now been fixed. But... In case you need mixed case, go to Preferences and anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box add the keyword MIXEDCASEREPAIRS
If you have a cash drawer connected and functioning with VJS it pops automatically when you print a sales receipt. If you want to leave it connected but don't want it to pop automatically add the keyword POPDRAWEROFF anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box in Preferences. You might not need it to open for checks or credit cards (using the slots) but you can choose to click on the No-Sale option when you have cash.
Adjustment to the layout of the 3-across mailing labels using 5160-Avery style labels (or equivalent). The positioning should be better now on the 2nd and 3rd columns.
The daily posting spreadsheet now shows the payment number for payments on account (on in-house charge accounts.) Previously it would show just PAYMENT.
Version 1.170 10/05/2009 ===============================================================
In the sales screen you can add detail to any line-item by clicking the "Apprais" or "Repair" button. Now, speedy POS users can also use the keyboard shortcut of Alt-R. (You'll see letter R in the button underlines to remind you that Alt-R is the shortcut.)
The Customer X-tra Search screen will now remember the last-used selection for the detail list at the bottom right. I.e. if you select the customer detail option, then the next time you open X-tra search, it will default to customer details. If you select sales items details, it will remember that, etc.
+ Various Adjustments, including The instructions and descriptions of repairs are now made to be all upper case. Previously these areas followed your selection for the customer profile: (whether you allowed customer names to be mixed-case or upper-case only) The inventory "web site" export file (from JS-Classic) now includes additional columns with the extended notes formatted in an alternative way. Instead of the notes being cut into sections of 50 letters the additional columns cut them into sections of 254 letters - so the formatting may be approved. [The original 50-letter sections still exist as well - in case your website depended on that formatting.]
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.169 09/30/2009 ===============================================================
Sales receipts can now print either the Sku number or the vendor's style number or both. [From the Maintenance Menu choose Preferences, then go to Receipts, then General, and find the option Print the Style instead of the Sku or Both. Previously this option was listed - but it applied only to the Full page receipt in VJS or to JS-Classic.] [If you have a customized version of any receipt and want this option, you would need to recreate it based on the *original version* to have this change take effect.]
+ Various Adjustments, including Remove the zero-quantity inventory warning on the sales screen when selling a special order item. The Return to Vendor report creates an Excel file (that's not new) - what's new is that the XLS file now includes the vendor style column. Z-Report adjustment in JS-Classic (previously under [unusual] circumstances early sales from the day could be skipped from the Z-report.) Backup adjustment. Previously the backup would not work if any of the data files was damaged. Now it'll give you a warning but will at least backup the other files. If you want the commission report to show sales both with and without Dept ZZ, choose !!! for the Dept Code. A few users have experienced unusual delays printing receipts. The current version can gather some clues on that, so if you have oddly slow receipts, let us know so we can look at the clues.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.168 09/24/2009 ===============================================================
When you run an Entire History for a customer account, there is a new report layout which includes the cost and profit figures for all sales and an account total. [From X-tra Search for customers, click on "Entire History" then from the Print Options dialog box change the Report Layout to Complete Customer History w/Cost & Profit. If you use passwords these figures will not appear for users who log in below the level needed to view cost.]
The Return Stock to Vendor reports now has a new column for the Vendor Style.
The Commmission Report / Sales Report by Clerk now has a column for Profit. Previous reports have shown both the selling price and the cost so the information was there before, but not it's more explicit. [Note that for space reasons, this column is available only on the version of the report Summarized by Clerk.]
+ Various Adjustments, including When several sales are entered in a row, successive sales no longer default to the clerk of the previous sale, but instead have no clerk initials pre-filled in. [Unless the Automatically Fill in Clerk option is set in Preferences, in which case the clerk for a new sale is pre-filled in with the initials of whomever is logged-in.]
Prevent warnings on in-house charge accounts being over the credit limit if you leave the credit limit as zero.
Adjust the colors on the "Cash Tendered" screen for easier reading.
Adjust the behavior on the Inventory Status screen when typing a new Sku; the previous Sku is completely cleared if you type a 3-digit major code or a 2-digit major code then dash or <Enter>.
The "Assembled-From" list on the Activity page of Inventory status has the added column for the retail value. [this may help if you need to quickly estimate a revised selling price of an assembled piece where the customer wants to switch a component.]
Etc.
Version 1.167 09/21/2009 ===============================================================
Receipts for on-account payments for in-house charge accounts now have a 3-part side-by-side receipt format (letter sized paper with two perforations)
+ Various Adjustments, including The Assembled-From list on the History page of the Inventory Status screen has the added column of Price. Possible error message on commission report. Hyphen possible in picture catalog files by manufacturer. [see catalog feature in 0.948 below] Remove quantity warning on sales screen if you select a sku with zero quantity in stock - IF you select Options, Return to stock before selecting the sku.
Version 1.166 09/18/2009 ===============================================================
The time-card report adds the day of week in words (Mon, Tue...) next to the date in numbers (05/05/2011)
JS-Classic has option "Report Payments Made on Invoices" (5,2,3 )fixed.
The sales screen will now warn you when trying to sell a Sku that is recorded with zero in stock. [This is mostly to give a warning which might appear after typing the wrong Sku. If you do NOT want a warning for all or some users, you can remove the warning by setting a higher level for the security question "Automatically Show Quantity Remaining" in the Sales Security page of Preferences.]
The month-end accounts-receivable statements can now be selected based on how past-due the accounts are. This can let you print and send your statements separately depending on deliquency. I.e. you might use different paper for the very past due accounts and add an extra insert. [ This option appeared previously, but was not active in VJS before.]
+ Various Adjustments, including The option to export the vendor list to an Excel file previously was problematic. It will now work ok on most computers. [Choose Reports Menu, Vendor Lists, Type of Export File.]
If you do NOT want credit limit warnings (added in 1.165) on A/R sales you can add the key word NOCLWARNING to Miscellaneous Options in Preferences. (of course, the warnings would not appear for customers without a limit. Also, for users with security settings the warning and block still appears.) From Zone 4 (the sale number area) of the sales screen you can click the down arrow to get lists of sales from which you can retrieve them. One of the lists is that of the Quote (wish-list) sales. Previously, you could not retrieve quotes sales by this method and then continue to convert them to a standard sale, but now you can. [previously it WAS possible to retrieve and convert to standard, a quote/wish sale from the X-search screen.]
Version 1.165 09/10/2009 ===============================================================
Fix a problem (introduced with ver. 1.164) with the description printing on sales receipts.
For in-house accounts-receivable sales, the sales screen will now enforce the credit limits when you save the sale. [A customer's credit limit is set on the Charge Acct page of the customer screen. In Preferences you can set the security level needed in order to override the credit limit warning. Below that security setting, users will have to go back to the sale and either reduce the sale total or increase the down-payment.]
The customer selection options for Layaway Statements (see v 1.164) to filter the customers by Zip, Customer Type and Last Name are now active. In addition you can filter customers by the total amount due on outstanding layaways. Further, the message at the bottom of layaway statements is active.
If you use gift-cards with pre-printed numbers you will likely want VJS to NOT automatically suggest the next credit slip number - so you can type or scan in the pre-assigned number. You can do this by adding the word NOAUTOCREDITNO anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Settings" box in "Preferences". This was added in version 0.998 - see below. What's *new* is that it is now easier to switch between pre-printed gift-cards and internally generated paper credit slips - which should have a completely different sequence. Now, with NOAUTOCREDITNO when you add a credit slip, if you leave the credit slip blank, the next internal sequence number will be suggested (and the sequence updated.) But, if you type or scan in the gift card number the internal sequence will not be affected. Make sure the internal/paper sequence number is significantly different from the gift-card sequence to avoid any possibility of overlap.
+ Various Adjustments, including a fix for printing pictures on appraisals for appraisals entered using a "dummy appraisal sku number"
Version 1.164 09/09/2009 ===============================================================
Addition of Layaway Statements. By printing and sending these official layaway statements you will speed-up the completion of layaway sales and increase turnover by reducing the time merchandise lies dormant. [Choose Sales Reports Menu, Layaway Statements. Select a date range to include too-old layaways and to exclude layaways where the customer made a payment recently.]
+ Various Adjustments, including a fix for the Js-Classic Assemble-Disassemble report.
Version 1.163 08/27/2009
===============================================================
The 3-part sales receipts can now print a Logo image file (jpg) at the top. [Other sales receipts have had this option for a while. If you want a logo file, save it in the CUSTOM folder which is usually inside the MAIN folder which is in the DATA folder in the VISUALJS folder on the drive where the VJS data is stored - i.e. \VISUALJS\DATA\MAIN\CUSTOM - then select the file by opening VJS then Maintenance Menu, Preferences, Receipt Options, Half & 40-Col Receipt options.] [If you have a customized version of the 3 part receipt, you would need to recreate it based on the *original version* to get the new option.]
+ Various Adjustments, including If you edit a sale in JS-Classic where the sales clerk is no longer in the system, previously you were prompted to change the clerk. That won't happen now when editing an old sale.
On the appraisal screen text area you can switch between the (usual) proportional font (Arial) and non-proportional font (Lucida Console) by right-clicking the font increase (A+) button. This also applies to the pre-appraisal (notes) area of the inventory status screen. [this may be useful if you try to align text on appraisals which is hard to do with proportional fonts. This would also imply that you customize your appraisal printing format to use a non-proportional font.]
Sales can now be ZZ'd by putting ZZ in the Dept code. (unlike JS-DOS you can't ZZ a sale by putting ZZ in the payment reference.)
Fix for a problem in JS-Classic when creating a mail merge file from the Customer Sales Reports [choice 6,2,5 ]
Version 1.161-2 08/24/2009 ===============================================================
Add Spell-Check to the Appraisal screen and the pre-appraisal screen (the Notes page of Inventory Status) [The spell checker will be refined at a later date.]
Version 1.160 08/14/2009 ===============================================================
Fix a (harmless) error message that occurs when running a cleanup with the "Condense Files" option. + Various Adjustments
Version 1.159 08/14/2009 ===============================================================
Addition of Return to Vendor Report. [Find this option under the Reports Menu.]
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.158 08/13/2009 ===============================================================
All the reports (and other print jobs such as Check-Printing Statements printing) now have customizable security settings. From the Maintentanace Menu choose Preferences, then go towards the bottom of the list of options on the left and choose Reports Security settings.
VJS has always allowed you to add or change the list of possible payment types that appears when you make a payment. You can also select the icon that appears for each type but you can't make your own icons. If you add a payment type for which there's no suitable icon - such as Wells Fargo, you can erase the icon and the name itself will apear. This option was sort of available before but the resulting text was not clearly readable; now it is. [These preferences are set in Maintenance Menu, Preferences, Payment Options, Payment Types.} [To remove an icon for any payment type, RIGHT-click the selected icon immediately to teh right of the name of the Payment Type in the Payment Types Preferences screen.]
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.157 08/07/2009 ===============================================================
You can change the major code of an existing Sku using the Inventory Status screen. Note that you'll get a new Sku and may have to retag. [ From Inventory Status you'll need to make sure the screen (padlock) is unlocked, then Ctrl-Click the Major Code box to the left of the picture. Then select a new major code. At this time only the exact Sku in question is changed - not all Sku's of the same style. ]
Appraisals in VJS have always allowed multiple pictures per item, but only one was available to print out. Now you can print out multiple pictures. All the appraisal layouts have been changed to have room for three pictures - except the layouts with the words "smaller picture" in the name. Note that if you are using a customized version of the appraisal then you your custom format won't have the 2nd or 3rd pictures. Only the *Original Version* will. If you want more pictures on your custom layout you can either create a new custom layout based on the *Original Version* and re-modify it or you can do a tricky cut and paste. To do that, create a new customized version based on the original (you'll erase this later). Go into the Report Designer and shift-click both the 2nd and the 3rd picture boxes to select them both. Then press Ctrl-C to copy them to the clipboard. Then exit, then go back and select your previous customized appraisal and bring up the Report Designer then press Ctrl-V to paste them. Then move & size them.
The GMROI Reports summarized by Vendor or Manufacturer have a (possible) formatting change. Previously, if there were sales or inventory items coded with a vendor or manufacturer code which was not in the official vendor list, all such items were grouped under one entry called "Vendor Not Found". Because this sometimes caused confusion and time trying to decipher, now in such cases a vendor is automatically added to the vendor list and a separate line is added to the report. [This change won't affect the report if your inventory and sales record are all already linked to a valid entry in the vendor list.]
When you add a new repair from the Repair screen (bypassing the sales screen) you can now choose whether or not the clerk box should be left empty or pre-filled-in with the initials of the user currently logged on. [See the Repair Defaults Cont. page of Preferences from the Maintenance Menu.)
+ Various Miscellaneous, including Some cosmetic changes for Canadian users. Obscure technical printing situation RB80.
Version 1.156 08/04/2009 ===============================================================
A further layout has been added for printing purchase orders: the new layout option includes pictures. [At the Print Options window when printing a purchase order, change the layout to # 04 - "W/ Pictures".]
Correct an issue that occurred under some circumstances with automatic discounts set up in the Major Class Code screen. [select a category from the Major Class Code maintenance screen and select the Pricing page.]
Correct an issue with integrated credit-card processing that could occur with certain non-standard American Express Cards.
Version 1.153 - 1.155 07/30/2009 - 07/31/2009 =============================================================================
When adding appraisals, the Value box was previously left empty. Now the Value will be filled in with either the MSRP or the usual selling price of the item being appraised.
When running commission reports with a cost column, Shopkeeper usually will show the Replacement Cost instead of the Standard Cost. (but, of course, if there is no Replacement cost - the majority of items - then the Standard cost is used. The replacement cost is a value you can fill in to represent the 'real' cost value of an item in case you bought it at considerably below market price) The change is that you can now select whether you want to use Replacement Cost or Standard Cost. (from the Commission Report screen, choose Full Selection then 'Cost to Use.')
The Major Class Codes maintenance screen now has a way to update the markup formula for many (or all) major codes at one time. [At the top of this screen choose Options, "Update markup formulas globally"]
The Major Class Codes maintenance screen now has a way to update the taxable status for many (or all) major codes at one time. [At the top of this screen choose Options, "Update taxable status globally"]
Deleting a payment on a sale is a bit easier. Previously it could take several clicks of the delete icon in the grid of payments before it responded with the Delete confirmation prompt. Now you click on the check-box in the payment list - in the column headed by a trash-can icon.
The Picture page of Inventory Status has a 'Picture Show' option which cycles through all your inventory and shows the picture of each one for a few seconds. You can adjust the time of each picture from 1 to 99 seconds. This isn't particularly useful; it's more like a screen-saver.
The sales screen has an option to temporarily prevent the customer X-tra search screen popping up after every sale. While there is an option in preferences to turn it off ALL the time, it's handy to keep X-tra search on usually, but then there are times, such as when you are looking up several invoices in a row by date or by invoice number, when you want to turn it off temporarily.
Ditto for the repairs screen.
Several adjustments to the Drop-Lists for looking up previous merchandise and non-merchandise accounts payables invoices. (sort order by date, more room for the date and value columns for non-merchandise invoices.)
+ Various Miscellaneous Minor code list on the Add Inventory screen (from sales) shows only the used minor code list (instead of both the used and not-assigned minor codes) Changing a sale type from layaway to repair previously could (under certain conditions) leave the sale-type set to layaway. A change to the live (webcam) method of adding pictures to inventory has been adjusted to make the use of Dino-Lite digital microscopes easier. Previously the first time you used them the preview screen was so large you couldn't see the controls. Now you'll be able to select 'Resolution' and select 640x480. Also - you should download from dino-lite.com drivers dated June 2009 or later. If you have two live (webcam) cameras attached and you switch between the two, the extra step of confirming the resolution for the new camera has been removed. This makes switching quicker - though if the two cameras don't work well at the same resolution then you'll have to click the 'Resolution' button after switching cameras. When a repair/layaway sale with repair tracking detail is paid in full usually you'd want to be prompted for the pick-up date and the name of the person picking it up. This is an option that you set in Preferences, Repair options. Previously, under some circumstances the prompt box for the pickup information didn't appear even with this preference set to Yes. That has been addressed. A change to entering inventory to reduce the (already low) chance that two invoices would be give the same pro-forma P.O. number (which isn't harmful but can make different invoices show together on a printout.) + others
Version 1.152 07/22/2009 =============================================================================
In the customer profile screen where you enter the dates for special- events (anniversary etc), you can now leave the year part of the dates blank (previously - if you left it blank it would have defaulted to 2000)
The repair envelopes now have the option to print a logo file at the top. Also, there is an option to print or not print the company name and address. You can print both either the logo or name or both [see Preferences, Receipt Options, Repair Ticket. Note that the changes would not be applicable if you have your own customized version. ]
* Also see these same preferences if f you have unwanted changes in terms of the logo or name at the top of the repair tickets.
In JS-Classic the feature where you can search for customers by phone numbers is much faster.
+ Various Adjustments, including: The statement date is on the quick-selection page of the statement-printing screen (instead of on the full-selection page.) Etc.
Version 1.151 07/10/2009 =============================================================================
Correction to a problem when running reports by date. Related to the change in dates on memorized reports - see v. 1.150 below.
Version 1.150 07/09/2009 =============================================================================
When you recall a memorized reports which has dates saved, those dates will now be re-evaluated based on today's date. For example, if you specify today's date for a sales report and save it, then when you retrieve that report tomorrow it will fill in tomorrow's date [the dates that will be 'dynamic' are Today, Yesterday, beginning and end of this month, beginning and end of last month, beginning and end of this year, beginning and end of last year. All other dates will be stored as-is.]
In the Inventory Search screen you can now search for certain words anywhere in the Description or Style. Anywhere you are prompted for a Sku Number (inventory status or sales or relocate, etc), you can click the Down-Arrow or press Ctrl-DownArrow to show the Inventory Search Box. There you can click the Word Search box to activate the search box. You can type more than one word separated by spaces. At each search only the very next item (down, not up) is located. You can repeat the search.
+ Various Adjustments, including: Security setting problem with the Time Card screen. Changes relating to the automatic discounts set up in the Major Class Code screen. There's a separate security setting for viewing an item's cost on the sales screen and changing an item's cost on the sales screen. See the sales security settings page in Preferences. Note that this is separate from the settings for access to the cost in the inventory file.
Version 1.149 07/02/2009 =============================================================================
This "What's New" log opens in a separate, easier to review window.
When running a GMROI report by Price-Point you will see the new prompt "Do you want to view or change the price-points levels?" which let you define the different price-point levels to be analyzed.
Some of the export files for the customer list contain the special-event dates (anniversaries, etc.) Previously the date was presented as 4-digits like 0701 for July 1. Now that data is presented with a slash like 07/01. We expect that to be more compatible with mailing houses. (If you have come to depend on the older format, let us know)
+ Various Adjustments, including: The Chart of Accounts screen will now follow the selection in Preferences "Do you want screens to start out Un-Locked?" Previously it was always starting out locked even if you'd set that choice to Yes. Addition of a utility in JS-Classic APTOT to check the invoice totals compared to the cost of each item The point-of-sale credit card integration now accommodates non-standard credit card readers which add an extra number at the beginning of the credit card number.
Version 1.148 06/26/2009 =============================================================================
On the Inventory Entry screen to locate a previous invoice or memo you would typically type the vendor code then an invoice/memo number or drop the pick-list. The pick-list has changed such that by default it is NOT sorted by invoice number. Instead it is shown in the order in which they were typed-in with the most recent at the bottom. Open the pick list by clicking the drop-down arrow, or by pressing Alt-DownArrow. But, note that if instead of dropping the pick-list, you start typing the first few characters of an invoice number, then the pick-list WILL be sorted alphabetically and/or numerically. Also note that there are more columns in the pick-list now. The Invoice pick-list includes the Notes. The Memo pick-lists adds the Date, Total, and Notes. These changes make it easier to retrieve invoices and memos.
On the sales screen you can change the type of sale (Cash, Layaway, etc.) by clicking the big sale type word / drop down at the top of the screen. You can also change the default sale type (the type you want all new sales to assume unless you choose otherwise) by clicking the check-box next to each selection. In this update, those check-boxes to change the default sale type will not appear unless you are logged in at level 10. This is to prevent unwanted changing of the default setting.
If you retrieve a previously recorded Quote / Wish List sale and make a payment on it, the date of that sale will be brought forward to today's date even if you don't manually change the date to today.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.146-1.147 06/25/2009 =============================================================================
The new Style History page (see 1.145) now lets you choose whether to hide or Sku's that are no longer in stock.
The Product-Cards / Credit Card sized "hint cards" now have the option of adding a message line such as "This is the Best!" or "Goes Well With the Pearl Necklace". You can make a list of several commonly used messages so you don't have to type them from scratch each time. From Inventory Status, choose Print a Tag at the bottom right of the screen, add one or more items to the mini-list, choose Print Tag Then from the Tag Printing screen, if you put the mouse over the button to print Product Cards, the message line box will appear. [Note: Most people who use the credit card size reminder cards have to create a "customized" version in order to set make the printer respect the paper size. Only the *Original Version* has this extra line added. If you have a customized version, either make a new customized version based on the Original Version, or add an extra field-line in your customized one with an expression of MESSAGELINE ]
The Activity page of Inventory Status adds a column to show the comments on any Return Stock to Vendor entries.
+ Various Adjustments, including: In the VJS Inventory Status screen after you delete a Sku number, previously the "ghost" of that sku would still appear immediately after confirming deletion. So, even though the item had already been deleted it might have appeared that it had *not* yet been deleted. JS-Classic Accounts Payable Cash Requirements report will now sort by date recorded within vendor instead of by invoice number within vendor. JS-Classic now has the utility COMDIS that previous versions of Shopkeeper for DOS had. + misc.
Version 1.145 06/19/2009 =============================================================================
The Inventory Status Screen has a new page which shows you a list of all Sku numbers associated with the style that you are looking at. When you restock a style numerous times you get a new Sku each time and this helps you get the bigger picture. [From the Inventory Status screen, locate any item and then click on the tag "Style Hist" at the bottom right. It doesn't matter if you locate the first item by Sku or stype or part number. You can double-click any Sku in the list to see all the details on that specific Sku.]
Repairs called "unbilled jobs are initially entered without a sales ticket, directly from the repair screen. Later you bill them by adding a sales ticket and choosing Options Repair Billing where unbilled repairs for that customer are listed. A change is that now you could type in the repair number of a job for someone else. I.e. you can charge a sale to Bob to pickup Mary's repair. Of course, you'd be given a warning in such case.
+ Various Adjustments, including: More space to enter the Merchant Warehouse "RPnum" account ID because they can now be longer than the previous limits + other.
Version 1.143 - 1.144 06/17/2009 =============================================================================
When adding new sales you are usually shown the next expected sale number to accept or change. If all your sales are retroactively typed in from hand-written sales slips you may prefer that the sale number NOT be presented pre-filled in - which is now an option. You can activate this option by adding the key-word NOAUTOSALENO anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Options" box in "Maintenance", "Preferences", "General"
A new Sales Report by Clerk / Commission report will automatically separate each clerk on to different pages. This way each clerk can easily get his or her own copy without having to run the report multiple times - once for each clerk. This is the format that also includes the customer contact information. [From the commission report choose 'Clerk and Customer w/Page Breaks.' from the Sort By option. This version does NOT have a grand gotal but it does have totals for each clerk.]
+ Various Adjustments, including: JS-Classic adds the Inventory Export option which creates an Excel file in a format suitable for web site importing or catalogs. Includes picture files. [From JS-Classic Main Menu choose 6,5 for inventory reports, then change line B to 'Export w/Pix' then Start. The resulting files will be put in the INV folder inside the JSREPORT folder from the Windows Desktop.]
Version 1.142 06/11/2009 =============================================================================
The Itemized Sales Report will now create the B.I.G. sales Excel spreadsheet with the vendor details columns. In addition to any date range you might select, change the Sort-By option to Vendor. [the resulting file, SALEREP2.XLS is put in the VJS Reports folder off the Windows Desktop.]
Repair ticket printing has a new format to print on two perforation letter-sized paper that has three equal sized sections. While this is slightly large to fit a normal repair envelope, you can fold an inch or two and fit in a clear poly envelope. This is useful for those of you who use the 3-part paper for sales receipts so you can use the same paper for repairs as well. [the 3-part sales receipt is handy as it has a store copy, a customer copy and a gift copy all printed on one sheet - with easy tear perforations.]
When you open the repair screen from the Main Menu, you can make the Job Number box the first active spot. This could be useful if you frequently use this screen to look up job tickets by number. [This option is on the Repair Defaults Continued page of Preferences.]
Related to the above, you can now make the repair screen NOT immediately open the Customer X-tra Search screen. Previously this option was the same as that for the sales screen, now you can make the sales screen default to X-tra Search and the Repair screen not (or vice-versa) [This option is on the Customer Defaults page of Preferences.]
Repair ticket printing has a new format to print on two perforation letter-sized paper that has three equal sized sections. While this is slightly large to fit a normal repair envelope, you can fold an inch or two and fit in a clear poly envelope. This is useful for those of you who use the 3-part paper for sales receipts so you can use the same paper for repairs as well. [the 3-part sales receipt is handy as it has a store copy, a customer copy and a gift copy all printed on one sheet - with easy tear perforations.]
A further repair ticket - almost identical to the above using the same 2-perf paper has been added but this one uses the full height; i.e. it's not designed to be folded to put in the poly bags.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.140, 1.141 06/05/2009 =============================================================================
The commission reports (or sales report grouped by sales clerk if you don't need commissions ) now include the customer phone numbers to help clerks follow up on their customers.
The repair screen now shows the customer address and phone number so you can verify if you have the correct address without having to check the customer profile page. [with a small font, of course, as there isn't much room on that form.]
Both the repair screen and the sales screen can show the customer notes without having to view the customer profile screen. [Move the mouse over the address - under the customer name - to pop up a window with the notes. This will be the larger notes box from the second tab of the customer profile screen - not the shorter comments from the first page.]
The date an item was received can be coded and put on price tags. Normally the date is coded in letters using the price-code word (in Preferences) but there have been options to simply abbreviate it. E.g. for the date 01/31/94 can become 1049 or 0194 or just 94. The last one with just the year is the newest option there. To use these options, add the keyword DATECODE2 or DATECODE3 or DATECODE4 in the Miscellaneous Options box in Preferences. Of course, you also have to format the price tags so that the date-code is on the tag.
The drag n drop method of adding pictures (to inventory, repairs, etc.) has been improved and some steps have been removed. (for more on drag n drop, see Version 1.127 and 0.991 notes below.)
Shopkeeper remembers which printer you use for each type of print-job, but the first time you print a particular report (or ticket) combination it used to default to the blank printer. That was by-design so you specifically had to select the desired printer. That's changed so that any not-yet printed combination will now default to the default printer for that computer.
+ Various Adjustments, including When prompted, on closing out a sale, for the pickup date and name for repairs, you are no longer forced to add a name and date. [but in almost all cases you should - as finalized sales normally means the repair is picked up]
When receiving merchandise from a prior purchase order the columns to check off the items to receive and the items to delete have been switched. Having the 'Select' column on the left is more intuitive, but watch out in case you got used to the previous layout!
The clerk lookup list on the repair screen is now sorted by initials (or code) where previously it was an unsorted list.
When searching for a customer by phone and then adding the new customer if it wasn't found, the last name box used to give you one chance to type the last name correctly and then became protected. If you mis-typed the last name it was a bit awkward to correct. Now, for a new customer added that way the last name remains open to easy correction.
+ Other
Version 1.139 05/22/2009 =============================================================================
Addition of a Sale Label. Sale labels could be used to stick on a layaway or "hold" envelope. From the sales screen, with a sale on-screen, choose Options at the top then Print a Sale Label. [These are designed to print on 2" x 4" shipping labels using a small label printer. They include the customer name, address, phone numbers, email address and item details. Note that if the sale contains more than one item, more than one label will print.]
When you run customer reports based on type of purchases (e.g. for Pandora or purchases last year) you need to specify a dollar range - e.g. $100 and up. But users sometimes forget to specify a value and so you get ALL customers! Now, if you forget to specify a dollar figure, a range of $1 and up will automatically default to prevent you from getting the entire list.
Fix for check-preparation for paying invoices-payable. Previously the options to restrict the list of payables by due-date or discount date were not working - now those criteria can be used. That way you can get a more concise list of just the payables due, say, by next week. [from the Main Menu, choose Accounting Menu, Pay Invoices Payable]
Adding items in the Enter Inventory screen: Warning f the retail is lower than the cost. When restocking items and the cost changes a new retail price is suggested based on the markup formula, but if the new suggested price is unreasonable it won't be suggested.
Fix for printing inventory index cards in JS-Classic.
+ Various Adjustments.
Version 1.138 05/14/2009 =============================================================================
The Hot-Seller report and Reorder Report by style now allow you to select results based on the Minor Class Code.
You can now specify that new repairs start out in the Quick-Fill boxes. That will save you a step on new repairs if you use the Quick-Fill wizards. [This option is on the the Repair Defaults Continued page of Preferences.] Also an improvement in the Quick-Fill areas for for keyboard users is that you can Tab or Enter to the green "Go" arrow instead of only being able to click it with the mouse.
The Assemble Disassemble screens adds a Print Tag option. Choose Options (from the top tool-bar) then Print a Tag.
The X-tra Search screens for the lookup of customers and vendors now shows the e-mail address (which, of course, always showed on the full profile screen,) Given space limitations, you need to scroll right in the list to see the e-mail column. As before, you cab shrink the size of columns less important to you and so you could make the email appear without scrolling right.
You can now select Company Check as the payment method for refunds on sales or refunds to in-house charge accounts. (Note that the check itself is not added to your Shopkeeper checkbook file nor exported to QuickBooks. You would record that in the checkbook file as a separate step.)
Version 1.137 05/08/2009 =============================================================================
+ Various Adjustments, including Check preparation and printing: Check layout corrections and removal of an extra step between preparing and printing checks. Enter Existing Inventory previously could sometimes skip Sku numbers (e.g. from -00001 to -00003, etc) in cases where you added pictures at take-in time. That no longer occurs.
Version 1.136 05/06/2009 =============================================================================
The sales screen Sku number entry is improved for barcode readers (There was a previous extra step encountered when reading barcodes for Sku's where the major code was 99 or lower.) Also - when you have typed a full Sku, it now no longer requires that Tab or Enter be pressed.
The Appraisal screen previously had a Delete button, but it could only delete the most recent changes. Now it will either delete the entire appraisal or just the changes or give you a choice.
Adjustment to 3-part repair envelope formatting. Due to the non-standard size of paper for the repair envelopes, some printers were selecting an inappropriate paper size which caused a layout problem (error 1298.) The change should prevent that from happening. (please note that any printing change made by Compulink cannot update any *Customized* layouts that you may have made)
Automated import of Pandora inventory list. Add to Shopkeeper's inventory list 1000's of Pandora items complete with description, style, price, cost. (Instructions available on request for certified Pandora resellers.)
+ Various Adjustments, including Improvements of the Quick-Fill boxes. These are the drop lists of pre- canned text (wizards) you can add to repairs, appraisals, inventory notes, customer notes. The improvements are that when you add new text entries they are now available immediately. Previously, new additions would be available the next time you re-opened that window. Also, in the Repair screen (the screen where the Quick-Fills are most useful) the buttons the click on to activate the fill-in are made larger so easier to click. Further, if you fill in some Description Quick-Fill Boxes then some Instruction Quick-Fill boxes, you can click just one time on the Instruction "Go" button and both Description and Instructions will be filled in. (previously you'd have to click separately on the Description Go and the Instructions Go.
Adjustments to the Pay Accounts Payable screen including using the requested next check number instead of the previously expected next check number
Version 1.135 05/01/2009 =============================================================================
Much improved performance of the "Add an Inventory Item" screen that pops up from the sales screen when you choose Options, Add Special Order.
The Special order / Add an Inventory item now creates a proper purchase order record (previously the item was on the on-order list, but the an actual purchase order wasn't made so the purchase order printout wasn't complete an the purchase order could not be retrieved from the Enter Inventory screen.
+ Various Adjustments, including Correct a typo on the posting report - "Non Taxable Merchandise instead of "Taxable Merchandise"
Version 1.134 05/01/2009 =============================================================================
The customer email screen makes it easier to attach pictures. *) When you click on the "Browse" button to find attachments the file-finder screen will now go directly to the folder which contains all your inventory pictures *) A small picture box will show the picture that has been selected *) You can drag and drop picture files. E.g., if you have an inventory status window open showing the details and picture of an item, you can drag the picture from the inventory screen and drop it on the picture box of the email screen.
Addition of Pay Invoices-Payable / Cut Checks to VJS Previously the "Print Checks" option was available in VJS, but the actual preparation of them was only in JS-Classic Choose "Accounting Menu" then "Pay Invoices" Most payables and checkbook reports are still only on JS-Classic but will be added to VJS.
The X-tra Search screens for the lookup of customers and vendors now shows the fax number (which, of course, always showed on the full profile screen,) Given space limitations, you need to scroll right in the list to see the fax column. Also note that unlike before when you scroll right, the left columns with the customer or vendor name remain visible.
+ Various Adjustments, including On the Add Inventory screen for special order items from the sales screen Bonus Point Calculation (previously available in Shopkeeper 9.x) has been added to JS-Classic Check printing formatting improvements. 3-Part Repair envelope formatting improvements (removed excess spacing between address lines.) On the sales screen when typing in the Sku, for Sku's with a two-letter or two-digit major code (e.g. AB) you can type AB-Space then the rest of the item instead of having to type AB-Dash or AB-Enter. (some people may find this easier as the space bar is larger.) On the sales screen, when you want to add or exclude tax you check or un-check the tax box. This can only be done when that sales Sku line is "active" but previously the screen would appear to let you change the tax status before "activating" that line - which could cause you to think you changed the tax status. Now, the check boxes for tax are clearly un-selectable until you "Activate" the sales line. On Repair Screen when you add a new repair, the blinking cursor normally starts in the Description box. You can now make it jump initially to the Clerk box. [This option is on the Repair Defaults Continued page of Preferences.]
Version 1.133 04/27/2009 =============================================================================
Customer Special Events reports now have new layout options to include details from all the items on the customer's wish-list and previous sales. This is a significant tool for salespeople as they can now run reports of customer with, say, Anniversaries or Birthdays in May, and under each name you can see items to suggest along with previous purchases. Note that "Wish-List" items are the same as Sales Quotes items. To add items this this list, create a sale in the sales screen, but do NOT save it. Instead choose, at the top tool-bar, Options, then Save as a Sales Quote. To Run these reports choose Customer Special Events Reports (or Customer Reports and Labels then choose Full Selection) then select the special events month then for the Report Type select Special Events+Wish List or Special Events+Wish+Sales
A correction to the previously added Special Events report feature. (see V 1.123 below.) Previously, selecting a year would remove the month criterion, and selecting a month would remove the year criterion. Now you can select both a month and a year. However, the most frequent selections is just a single month as it's not often important the year of the anniversary or birthday.
The 3-part point-of-sale receipts are very handy because, on a single sheet, they include a file copy, a customer copy and a gift receipt copy which does not show the selling price or payment information. The gift receipt copy has been corrected to NOT show the "regular price." for discounted items.
JS-CLASSIC: The repair templates are now active similar to the way they were in Shopkeeper 9.9 and before. i.e., you can enter a repair templates which pre-fill in the repair Description and Instructions with standard wording, leaving just some details to be filled in at take-in. You can enter a standard template for all jobs on page 16 of Store Information Defaults. You can enter different templates for each repair Sku by editing the Sku from Edit Inventory (2,8,E) and accessing the 2nd page with the Notes. That way, for example, a watch repair Sku could have a completely different template from a Resize Sku.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.132 04/17/2009 =============================================================================
When adding a special order item during a sale there is now an option to print or fax the purchase order at that time. Otherwise, to print you would have to later to go the Enter inventory Screen and retrieve and print the purchase order from there. From the sales screen, within a new line for an item, choose Options, Add Special Order, then a blue Add an Inventory Item screen appears The button is called "Print of Fax Purchase Order." Note that if you want to fax the item, you would have to have a "fax printer driver" installed in Windows.
VJS: When assembling components into another piece, VJS used to mark each assembly record with the date the component originally came in. VJS now matches JS-Classic where the assembly record is marked with the date the item was assembled.
JS-Classic: For components that have been assembled into another finished piece, the item history (from 2,6 Inventory Status) was not showing the items into which they went. That history now shows.
+ Various adjustments
Version 1.131 04/16/2009 =============================================================================
A new option allows you to choose whether or not appraisals will be made all-upper case. Previously they were upper-case if you chose to make names and addresses upper-case only. Now you can continue to have names and addresses upper-case but can independently allowed appraisals to be mixed-upper-lower-case. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Inventory", "Inventory Defaults", "Should Appraisals be Made Upper Case"
Resolve a problem when you type in a very long invoice or purchase order number for a payable or P.O.
When receiving merchandise from purchase orders, the list of items on order now shows the vendor's style numbers. That's important as the packing list/invoice used to check of the item would normally list them by style. To receive merchandise from a previously typed in purchase order choose Add Inventory, Invoice, from the inventory entry grid (After entering invoice number, date, shipping etc) at the bottom choose P.O.'s. The list of outstanding ordered items pops up and you can select the items being received. You can also add items to the invoices in addition to those showing on the purchase order list.
New option for adding pre-canned notes/text to customer notes fields. (similar to the quick-fill options for repair descriptions, appraisals, extended inventory notes, etc.) This could be used to add standard notes to record when you mailed or called a customer or if there's a standard request template you often use. this is on the Notes page of the customer profile screen.
The credit slip report from VJS has a column for the Sale # the slip was used on. Previously this column was only filled in when VJS was used to record the sale. Now it will be filled in even if JS-Classic was used to record the sale where the slip was used. To report Credit Slips in VJS, open the credit Slip screen and choose Options, Report Credit Slips.
Version 1.130 04/10/2009 =============================================================================
Fixed a problem when adding special orders. For a never-before received style VJS could have suggested a description from a different item from that same vendor.
+ Various
Version 1.129 04/10/2009 =============================================================================
Various minor adjustments
Version 1.128 04/09/2009 =============================================================================
Easier to retrieve prior payments on account (e.g. to reprint them) To retrieve a prior payment on account you need to type in the payment number. However, the payment number was hard to locate. Now the Xtra-Search screen and the Entire Customer History will show the payment numbers.
Invoice Printouts: After receiving an invoice of merchandise you can print an item list. A new optional format for this list prints the pictures of each item and includes the line number of each item. Another change is that the format with the cost now adds lines to show the freight (and other expense, if any) along with the grand total (previously only the total of the inventory items was shown.)
Performance increased significantly when accessing VJS over the internet using Windows Remote Desktop or Terminal Services. There may be a bit of flickering but the screens changes will be much faster.
+ Various adjustments
Version 1.127 04/07/2009 =============================================================================
Ability to drag n Drop text into the notes areas of Inventory, customers, appraisals. (i.e. you can drag text from an email or a website into those notes areas). You can also drag n drop text *from* those areas but be sure to right-click drag n drop out and choose Copy not Move because Move would remove the text from VJS.
Added ability to import and Drag n Drop picture files from Firefox web browser into inventory items, appraisals, more in addition to the usual dragging from a Windows folder - See 0.991 below.) (Doesn't seem to work with Internet Explorer built-in to Windows - which, anyway, isn't a particularly good web browser.)
Customer purchase reports for "Top n" Customers: previously if you selected a number of customers larger than the number who purchased the items you were considering (e.g. if you picked Top 200 customers with purchases within the past week) you'd get the entire customer report. Now in such a case you'll get only those who had $1 or above and you'll get fewer than the number requested. (This doesn't affect the usual situation where you pick a reasonable "Top n" count.)
Customer Special Events Reports let you exclude the long customer comments in case they take up too much space.
Fixed problem printing credit slips where option to print entire payment histories on sales receipts had been turned Off.
+ Various adjustments, including Improved reliability in the Drag n Drop method of adding pictures (see notes under version 0.991 below)
Version 1.126 04/03/2009 =============================================================================
Various adjustments, including Address formatting corrections on the printed Return to Vendor slips;
A/R Statement formatting correction when you choose NOT to show the sales detail.
The inventory Entry screen displays the vendor address and has a button to access the full vendor profile screen.
Sales screen behavior - sometimes when clicking on a line in the sales screen the cursor went one-line higher
Etc.
Version 1.125 03/31/2009 =============================================================================
Some printing tasks, have different layouts available. For example, receipts have Side-by-side, 40-Column, 3-Part, etc. If you have a multi-computer network and want different stations to default to different layouts (e.g. 40-Column at Station A, and Side-by-Side at Station B) you can now do that by assigning each computer a Cash Register Code Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Local Defaults", "Local Defaults Continued", "Cash Register Code" Enter a two-letter or two-digit code. Also Note that the cash register code can also help produce separated cash register reports. See notes under version 0.944 below Also see notes further below on "Local Settings"
+Various adjustments, including problem clicking on the "Archive" button on the Credit Slip screen
Version 1.124 03/26/2009 =============================================================================
The sales screen will now issue a warning, or disallow, prices that are too low. If you use passwords, each clerk from the Login screen can be assigned a maximum Discount. From the Login screen choose "More" then pick a name from the list and set the Maximum Discount. (zero implies no limitation has been set.) On any individual item you can set a minimum selling price which is available on the Inventory Status screen You can set a store-wide minimum markup from "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Inventory", "Inventory Defaults", "The Minimum Allowed Sale Markup" E.g. if you set this at 1.2 then a 100 item cannot be sold for less than $120 (even if the usual price were $150 someone were allowed to discount 30%) Normally the sales screen will give a warning on a too-low price but let you continue. If you want to disallow too-low prices, set the security level needed to override the warning from "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Security Settings", "Sales Security", "Able to Override Discount Limitations"
Correction to the layout of the Inventory Report by Location With pictures, which previously had the position of the cost and retail totals switched.
Correction to the format (address) of the Return to Vendor printed sheets.
+ Various adjustments. including adjustments to the sorting of appraisals in the appraisal lookup lists from Zone 3 of the appraisal screen. etc.
Version 1.123 03/23/2009 =============================================================================
Addition of Customer Reports by Special Events. Choose "Reports Menu", "Customer Reports and Labels", "Full Selection" and towards the end are the new options "Spec. Events" and "Month / Year". You do not have to select all three of the choices. Very commonly you'll choose only the month - e.g. April, to get a list of all customers with any special event in April. You could combine that with an Event code such as ANN to get only customers with an Anniversary in April. You could further combine that with a year - such as 84 to get just silver anniversaries. Note that the resulting report shows all the special events for matching customers - not just the one you were looking for. Change the Report Type (line 1) to Special Events to see the version of the customer list showing the special events. Choose report type Spcl Events w/Purchases to also show the calculated purchase totals - but only if you select purchase criteria.
There is a separate menu choice "Customer Special Events Lists" - which is a much simplified set of choices. For any additional choices including purchases or zip codes you need to use the main "Customer Reports and Labels"
+ correction of a typo on the customer report screen: The choice to select the top X (100, 500, etc) customers previously had the caption "For Prices" (i.e. there were two lines showing "For Prices")
+ Various adjustments.
Version 1.122 03/19/2009 =============================================================================
In more cases, the most recently used customer will be remembered for the next customer lookup. (e.g. if you retrieve an appraisal from customer A, then open the repair screen, the X-Search screen will default to customer A) [this feature was partially available before - it's now expanded]
The Entire Customer History previously did not print the Instructions for repair jobs but they will now print. You can access this from several screens (sales, customer profile, repairs,credit slip, etc.) - Choose Options from the top tool-bar then Entire Customer History.
When entering repair Description and Instructions, a previous update made the screen interpret extra 'Enter' key-strokes to mean 'jump to the next box.' That helped some users familiar with old Shopkeeper but was awkward for others. The behavior has been adjusted to be less intrusive but if you find this behavior awkward you can remove it by adding the key-word NOREPAIRENTER in the "Miscellaneous Options" box in "Maintenance", "Preferences", "General"
+ Various adjustments including work on file lock messages
Version 1.121 03/18/2009 ===================
Improvements to the layout of the Daily Cash Register Posting Report. (tidier - fewer extra lines for customer name, etc)
Reduced chance of duplicate repair numbers when adding repairs simultaneously from multiple computers on a network.
JS-Classic: When restocking inventory styles which already have a picture file the new Sku will share the picture with the previous Sku. (this was already the case in VJS)
+ Various adjustments
Version 1.120 03/13/2009 ===================
Adjustments to the "Return to Vendor" feature added in the prior update.
Version 1.117 - 1.119 03/12/2009 ===================
Addition of Return Stock to Vendors feature. This prepares a list of items to be returned, deducts them from inventory, creates a credit-invoice in your payables list and prints a return slip to accompany the items. There are two return slip formats: One with the inventory pictures and one without. By default this feature is on the Inventory Menu.
Relating to printing Credit Slips, new options in "Preferences" let you choose whether or not to print the store name and address on the slips. Also you can choose a different logo file than the one selected for sales receipts. Choose "Maintenance", "Defaults", "Receipt", "Receipt Options", "Half Page", "Credit Slip Logo" and "Print Store Name and Address on Credit Slips" As with the receipt logo, the suggested location to store the logo file is in the folder CUSTOM which is under your main data folder (often 'MAIN' but you may have selected another name) in the folder DATA which is in the VISUALJS folder.
When you run an itemized inventory report, an Excel copy is usually created in the VJSREPORTS folder on the Windows desktop. (This is not new) An extra column - the second description line - is now included in that Excel export file.
+ Various adjustments including, The full-page printed customer profile sheet now includes the email addresses. + other
Version 1.116 03/03/2009 ===================
Various Adjustments, including
Correct the data organization in the sales activity tables in the activity page of the Inventory Status screen. (the columns had been switched in version 1.115)
Correct problem saving the new alternative email address (see V1.108 below)
When using JS-Classic with Merchant Warehouse credit card processing the receipts will indicate the type of card used (Visa, etc) instead of just 'Swipe.'
Version 1.115 02/27/2009 ===================
The Inventory Report adds a new choice to select only those items withOUT an attached picture, or Only those items WITH a picture. From the Inventory Report screen choose Full Selection and change the selection for the prompt "Only Items With Pictures"
Improved keyboard behavior for the Enter key in the "description" box of the repair details tracking screen,
Normally repairs are given an "Alternative Job Number" which is the same as the primary job number. If you want the Alt Job No. to start blank, add the keyword BLANKALTJOB anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Settings" box in "Preferences."
In the Inventory Status screen - Activity page, if you highlight a sale and right-click it or press Ctrl-C, the sale number is copied to the Windows Clipboard. That can help if you then wanted to paste that number into the Sales screen to look up the entire sale.
+ Various Adjustments including possible error 12 in the JS-Classic sales screen) The Right-Click option indicated in Version 1.108 below wasn't previously active - it is now. + misc.
Version 1.114 02/25/2009 ===================
Clearer indication on screen when you retrieve a voided sale (both JS-Classic and VJS)
The receipt "23 40 Column Receipt - Narrower" has been adjusted to be even narrower since some POS printers (e.g. Epson 220) have very limited printing width.
+ Various Adjustments, including a sometimes present problem running a Cash Requirements report in JS-Classic.
Version 1.112-3 02/23/2009 ===================
Resolves a problem that sometimes occurred in printing archived (old) appraisals.
Resolved warning message on screens assemble disassemble, deduct from inventory.
The (purple) Inventory Search lookup form now includes the second basic description line if you scroll to the right for additional columns.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.111 02/20/2009 =================== + Various Adjustments (incl. error opening vendor profile screen)
Version 1.110 02/19/2009 ===================
New sales receipt format for laser / inkjet printer. 3-part receipt using letter size paper with two perforations. Each part is 3-2/3" x 8-1/2". The customer gets a standard receipt and a gift receipt and the store keeps a copy of the standard receipt. You can buy plain paper with two perforations by the ream. (such as from http://www.lintonlabels.com/lasercutsheet/cut_sheet.html and others)
Alternative Pop-Up Calendar. You may choose it either because you prefer its appearance or if your computer doesn't work with the original style. To use the new style, add the keyword CALENDARV2 anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Settings" box in "Preferences"
Previously added was the ability to drag and drop image files *into* inventory, appraisals, repairs and customers (see notes under 0.991 below) Now you can also drag and drop pictures to copy *from* those areas. E.g. you can drag n drop copy a repair picture to an inventory item or appraisal. You can also drag n drop copy a picture from an inventory item to an email message (such as Outlook) or into a word processing document.
Improvements to the option to move inventory items from one (incoming ) invoice or memo to another invoice. (Relates to addition made in version 1.106 -- see below.)
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.109 02/16/2009 =================== Various Adjustments
Version 1.108 02/12/2009 ===================
Addition of a further option to speed up selling by style on the sales screen: Press Ctrl-S in the Sku number box (see v 1.106 below for more on this subject)
Changes to the sales screen in JS-Classic to reduce the chance of duplicate sale numbers if you have both JS-Classic users and VJS users making sales at the same time. -Note that for this to take effect you'll need to run, one time, the 'Update Data Files' option from the VJS File Center.
Addition of a Spouse's E-Mail field on the customer profile screen.
+ Various Adjustments, including addition of the Part Number on the invoice printouts (after receiving inventory); reduction in some network file lock situations; etc.
Version 1.107 02/12/2009 ===================
The receive payment on account screen (for a/r customers) can now accept credit slip payments
+ Various Adjustments including a warning notice that the built-in Shopkeeper data backup does NOT backup your picture files; you have to back them up to a CD/DVD or memory stick
Version 1.106 02/10/2009 ===================
On the sales screen, if you wish to select an inventory item by style number (instead of by Sku) you were able to click the drop-down arrow the choose to search by style from the resulting Inventory Search window. For those who do this frequently there are some key-saving changes: In the Sku number box you can type the Vendor Code followed by a few letters of the Style and press Enter to bring up the Inventory Search Window already in search-by-Style mode and at the right part of the list. Since that works only if the style start with a letter, the other shortcut is to *Right*-click the drop-down arrow. If you prefer not to use the Mouse you can fake out the first approach by entering an A for the style - e.g. ABC-A will at least bring up the inventory search window already in Style mode and at the correct vendor.
On the invoice (receive inventory) screen, the option to move an item from one invoice to anther (or from a memo to an invoice) has been activated. Select the line item, choose the Options button then choose "Move.."
Interstore transfers of inventory now transfer copies of picture files. Interstore transfer is done via JS-Classic screen 2,C. Note that if using a memory stick you should make sure you have enough room for the pictures. Since picture files may be large and since you may already transfer pictures another way, you may turn off the picture export/import to save time. Those options are on the Change Transfer Defaults page, Option 2,C,6 from Js-Classic
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.105 02/06/2009 ===================
Various Adjustments
Version 1.104 02/05/2009 ===================
You can now link a repair screen with a Sku number and jump between the inventory screen, the assemble-disassemble screen and the repair tracking screen. (there was previously a Sku number on the repair screen but that was only for transfer to the sales screen) This is principally for custom jewelry where you need a unique Sku number but may also want to track job progress. From the Inventory Status screen choose the Notes page then, click on the Repair Tracking button at the center bottom.. This button is visible only if there is already a repair job with this inventory Sku. From the Assemble Disassemble screen click on the Repair Tracking button near the top right, under the picture. This button is visible only if there is already a repair job with this inventory Sku. From the Repair Tracking screen click the green right-arrow button near the Sku Number.
A new sales receipt format - 23 40 Column Receipt - Narrower has been added in case your printer doesn't support the other 40 column receipt formats.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.103 01/29/2009 ===================
An additional format has been added for credit card sized Product Cards The new format "Credit-Card Size Product Card For Stones" includes all the information from the loose stones details page of Inventory Status. To print, locate an item in the Inventory Status page, select Print Tag then select Print the select Product Cards. As with all Credit Card size printouts, this requires special paper stock and a printer that can print on small format paper - such as Canon iP90.
+ Various Adjustments including A fix for a previous problem where some of the GMROI reports had incorrect values for the Profit Per Item and ROI % in the Subtotal and Total lines. (though each line was individually correct)
Version 1.102 01/27/2009 =================== Better separation of pictures for different appraisals which share a common appraisal Sku number. Retrieve the appraisal class in the major code screen to verify that it is set as an Appraisal Type of class code.
The Inventory Status screen, "Activity" page now has the option to show you the components from which an item was assembled. Choose "Assembled From" at the top of this page This can save you the step of bring up the item in the Assemble- Disassemble screen to see the components.
+ Various Adjustments including smoother activation of the "Style" page of inventory status JS-Classic 6,2,5 report previous worked only with the current sales file but now it also searches the archived sales file.
Version 1.001 01/23/2009 ===================
Improvements in customer lookup by telephone number via the internet
+ Various Adjustments
Version 1.000 01/21/2009 ===================
The appraisal screen Options button adds options for "Edit Customer Name & Address", "Mailing Label or Profile", "Entire Customer History"
The appraisal screen can now retrieving older archived appraisals (previously, access to archived appraisals was quite limited)
The inventory status screen - "style" tab has a new alternative description box (but this does not print anywhere.)
+ Various Adjustments
Version 0.999 01/15/2009 =================== The itemized sales report - the type where you set the Report Organization to "Sales Tax" will now include a column with the Department code. This can be handy if you code certain non-taxable sales with a Dept code on the sales screen (e.g. WS for Wholesale, or SOS for Shipped Out of State, etc) From the Main Menu, choose Sales Report Menu, Itemized Sales Report, Report Organization.
You can now customized the layout of the list of customers in the X-tra Search Screens for Customers and for Vendors. i.e. you may want the Address column to be before the phone numbers. You can move columns by dragging them. You can resize columns by dragging the separator bar between column headings. To reset to the standard layout, right-click anywhere on the list.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 0.998 01/13/2009 ===================
If you check the tax-exempt box on the customer profile screen the sales screen will automatically exclude sales tax. See the "Other" tab from the Customer profile screen. You can override the sales tax setting on any individual item on any sale.
On a store-wide basis, you can set the sales screen to Not charge sales tax for any out-of-state customer. See the "Sales Screen Cont." page in "Maintenance", "Preferences"
When recording a gift certificate/ Gift card you can now select the number of the certificate. From the "Sales" Menu choose "Gift Cards/Certificates" If you do NOT want Shopkeeper to suggest the next number (e.g. because you have pre-printed numbers) add the keyword NOAUTOCREDITNO anywhere in the "Miscellaneous Settings" box in "Preferences" Note that gift cards starting with a letter will NOT increment the sequence number.
+ Various Adjustments
Version 0.997 01/06/2009 ===================
A Print option has been added to the Deduct Inventory screen to print a list of the adjustments you've recorded. Choose "Inventory Menu", "Deduct Inventory" The lists are printed a combination of the Reference and date so deductions with a reference of "PHYSICAL INV ADJUSTMENT" with a date of 01/07/2011 won't mix with "PHYSICAL INV ADJUSTMENT" with a date of 01/07/2009
+ Various Adjustments
Version 0.996 01/06/2009 ===================
Inventory reports (versions with pictures) add the Part Number information.
When entering previously stocked styles, the part number information from the last received item will be copied to the new Sku record.
Customized logo image files for receipts are easier to share on a network. Place an image file in the CUSTOM folder under your main data folder (something like \visualjs\data\main\custom) and then select the logo file from "Maintenance", "Defaults", "Receipt", "Receipt Options", "Half Page", "Logo"
+ Various Adjustments
Version 0.994-0.995 12/31/2008 ===================
Larger font size for the short customer notes area on the customer profile page. (separate from the re-sizable font change added to version 0.993 for the *extended* customer notes)
Addition of Inventory Relocation in batches of multiple inventory items. From the "Main Menu" choose "Inventory Menu", "Relocate Inventory" You can review relocation activity of individual items by choosing "Inventory Status", then choose the "Activity" tab then choose the "Relocation" radio button.
The Relocate Inventory (mass update) screen can now accept a text file list of Sku numbers. This could be useful if you've created a list of Sku numbers to be relocated with a portable data collector or by typing it into a text file (e.g. with Notepad) Choose "Inventory Menu", "Relocate Inventory", then after selecting a reference number and a destination location you can click "OK-Edit List" then click "import a list."
You can choose to NOT print inventory pictures on sales receipts Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipts", "Do you want to print pictures on the receipts?"
+ Various Adjustments including, X/Z reports now deduct Paid-Out amounts from the Depositable Receipts figure.
Version 0.993 12/29/2008 ===================
Several "Notes" areas have been enlarged and have been given Font Size buttons so you can size the notes text to a more readable size. The Customer Notes Inventory Notes Appraisals Changes that you make are computer-specific and are remembered.
The option for a mailing label for an *individual* customer previously had an Envelope option - which included a return address. A new option is an envelope format without a return address - for pre-printed envelopes. From the Customer Maintenance screen, retrieve a customer and choose Options, Mailing Label and Profile, then select the desired Layout.
The mass-mailing / Full customer report screen previously did not have an envelope option. The envelope choice is now available. From the Reports Menu choose Customer Reports and Labels, then select Type of Report where you can find Envelopes, labels, standard reports etc.
The repair instructions and description boxes are "edit boxes" which can be any length like a mini-word processor. Normally pressing Enter adds an extra line and to exit you have to press Tab or click with a mouse. However - users familiar with the Shopkeeper DOS method of pressing Enter several times to get out sometimes end up with inadvertent blank lines or the actual description pushed down. The keyboard behavior there now allows pressing Enter a few extra times to get out. It might be slightly non-standard but is there to help users.
+ Various Adjustments including The data verification part of Cleanup will ignore some harmless entries formerly reported as suspicious.
Version 0.992 12/23/2008 ===================
Many screens in VJS start out in "View-Mode" (Unlocked) to reduce the risk of changing data before you're ready. You click the Unlock Padlock (or press Alt-L) to unlock the screen to enter "Edit-Mode" in order to make changes. A new preference allows you to make most screens start out in Unlock / Edit mode. Choose "Maintenance Menu", "Preferences" and on the first page find "Do you want screens to start out unlocked." This does Not supersede any security settings you have set, so for users who do not have rights to make changes to a certain screen, the screen will remain in View-Mode.
The Login screen has had an option to store the preferred login-name and the choice to Auto-Login. A change in that area now makes these selections computer-specific so that different stations can be set to default to different login names.
The itemized sales report adds the selection choice "Only Items Still on Memo" I.e. this lets you see memo sales where the associated inventory item has not yet been billed to you. This choice was available in JS-Classic before
Debit and Memo miscellaneous adjustments to in-house charge accounts now have a box to enter a small reference or explanation. From the Main Menu choose "Accounts Receivable Menu", "A/R Credit and Debit Memos"
+ Various Adjustments
Version 0.991 12/23/2008 ===================
Improved Picture Drag-n-Drop Importing. Using a webcam is the most direct way of adding a picture to inventory or repairs or appraisals, but VJS has previously allowed Importing an existing picture file which is needed if you use a digital camera or pictures from another source. The new improvement allows you to add a picture by dragging a picture file to the picture area in VJS. This works in inventory screens, repair screens, appraisal screens, customer screens and clerks screens.
+ Various Adjustments, including improvements to the Merchant Warehouse credit-card reporting.
Version 0.990 12/18/2008 ===================
The customer "Extra Search" screen now searches by the spouse's first name. In the Extra Search screen type a name and if the name is NOT located as a Last Name or a First name, the Spouse's name list will automatically be checked. If you *specifically* want to search the spouse's name you can change the "Search By" box to "Spouse" (This can be helpful, if, say, "Christa" were found in the first name list but the customer you wanted had Christa in the Spouse name list.)
Addition of a Merchant Warehouse transaction report. If you use integrated point-of-sale credit card processing using Merchant Warehouse a new report retrieves and reports the official account tranactions details directly from the Merchant Warehouse computer. Choose "Sales Reports Menu", "Merchant Warehouse", "Credit Card Report" (or if it's not there, choose Customize Menu and add that option to your menu)
Version 0.989 12/16/2008 =================== You can require that at least one telephone number be added to the customer profile page for repair customers. (so you can contact them.) Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Repair Defaults", "Repair Defaults Cont." "Require...phone"
Credit card payment report includes authorization number (if you use integrated credit card authorization)
+ Various Adjustments, including: Improvements to the repair billing selection screen Improvements when adding non-Sku'd items to sales screen (either by entering a Sku in the form at xxx-99999 or pressing Options, Add New Item. Etc.
Version 0.988 12/13/2008 ===================
Addition of a 3-Part Sales Receipt. This format is arranged to enable printing receipts (often Layaways, special orders or Quote Sheets) on the same double-perforated 3-part tickets used for 3-part repair envelopes. This way you can put such items in an envelope and organize them in repair-like boxes. When printing receipts, at the "print Options" screen change the "Report Layout" entry to "3-Part Receipt"
Addition of the ability to add sales notes to the sales receipts. The sales notes are the optional notes on the bottom left corner of the sales screen. By default, these notes do NOT print on receipts due to space limitations, but they are accessible if you customize receipts using the field RECEIPTDATA.SALESNOTES. The new 3-part receipt *does* include these by default - but only on the middle copy of the three copies.
Receipts for payments on-account by credit card for in-house charge accounts will print the authorization number and credit card signature message lines (if using integrated credit card processing.)
+ Various Adjustments.
Version 0.987 12/11/2008 ===================
Addition of the Chart of Accounts report listing Choose "Accounting Menu", "Chart of Accounts", "Options" "Report Chart of Accounts"
Addition of the Credit Card Payment Report Choose "Sales Reports Menu", "Credit Card Payment Report."
Correction of the 3" x 1" mailing label when printing a label for just one customer (presumably on a small label printer) From the Customer Maintenance screen, retrieve a customer, choose Options (at the top) then Mailing Label & Profile, then change the Report Layout to "Small Customer Mailing Label 3 x 1"
+ Various Adjustments (credit slip usage, etc)
Version 0.986 12/10/2008 ===================
The Itemized Sales report now creates an Excel version of the results of the sales report. This file is in the "VJS Reports" folder which is on the Windows desktop.
+ Various Adjustments including the addition to JS-Classic of the SALTOT utility
Version 0.985 12/08/2008 ===================
Sales Quotes can now be printed. Previously Sales Quotes could NOT be printed and printing a sale automatically committed the sale to the sales files. Reminder: Quotes are not in the sales files and do NOT affect inventory levels or cash register reports in any way (unless/ until they are subsequently saved as a sale.) To Print a sales quote choose Options at the top tool-bar in the Sales screen and choose Print Quote Sheet. Be sure to add an appropriate message to print so that the quote validity is clear and to be clear that the quote sheet is not mistaken for a sales receipt. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipt", "Receipt Messages", "Quote Sheet"
Repairs due dates can now be set to skip certain days of the week. For example, if you are closed Sunday and Monday you wouldn't want to suggest those days as pickup days. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Repair Defaults", "Repair Defaults Cont." Here, as before, you can set the usual repair completion time if you want VJS to suggest a due-date. Below that you can check the days of the week you do NOT want to be suggested as due-dates.
If you choose NOT to print the payment history for repairs and layaways previously some sales would print only the payments from the initial date and not the new payment. This problem has been fixed.
When you print receipts, reports, etc you usually see the "Print Options" box which lets you change the printer or report layout etc before the print-job previews on-screen or print. You have always the option to turn that off - perhaps to speed up receipt printing. However, that's a problem if you need to change the printer because now that option won't appear! There are two ways to make that Print Options box temporarily re-appear 1) At the top of the screen in the Tool-Bar choose Options, then "Show Hidden Prompts" 2) Instead of left-clicking the "Print" button, Right-Click the print button. both of the above settings will re-enable the print options box until you exit VJS.
+ Various adjustments.
Version 0.984 12/05/2008 ===================
An additional month-end A/R account statement format for pre-printed forms is available "Statement for Pre-Printed Forms B", which may be required depending on how the printer made your forms. However, when your statement forms run out, you might consider using blank statement paper and letting VJS print the entire form.
The repair screen for a previously billed repair will show the billing Sku number.
Improvements in the address formatting for customers found by an internet search using the phone number.
Improvements in the payment posting spreadsheet. Sometimes there were unnecessary additional subtotals even for a report of just one day
JS-Classic customer profile screen. Previously the only way to reliably exit the Comments box at the bottom of the form was to press Tab. Now you can Tab or PageDown or Esc.
+ Various adjustments.
Version 0.983 12/04/2008 ===================
Various adjustments. (printing, payables, payables, repair report, etc)
Version 0.982 12/03/2008 ===================
Addition of sales tax reports - itemized and summarized to the "Itemized Sales Reports". Improved formatting of the Summarized version of the sales report. From the Main Menu choose "Sales Reports", "Itemized Sales Reports" Then set the "Report Organization" to "Sales Tax" or "Summary" or "Summary Tax"
Improved formatting for the 3-across customer mailing labels
Option to add customer comments to the sales receipts.
Various adjustments.
Version 0.981 12/01/2008 =================== The Hot Seller Report - and related reports which summarize inventory sales by Vendor Style number (instead of by Sku) have the option to select an individual style number. In addition there is a new option to exclude from the sales figures those items sold as a special order - so that you can see the sales figures and turnover based on showcase items without the skewing effect of "instant turnover" special order sales.
The customer screen will show Wholesale customers as Business Name ("Firm") and Contact instead of the usual "Last" (last name) and "Spouse" Add something to either the "Resale No." box or the "Wholesale Level" box to identify a customer as Wholesale. Or - if you want the customer screen to appear in Wholesale View for *all* customers, set that option in the Customers page of "Preferences" from the "Maintenance Menu"
The Repair Status Quick Update screen now has a report to print a list of all changes in repair status that are being recorded. From the Main Menu, choose "Sales Menu", "Repair Status Quick Update" Note: If you print the list but then choose to Cancel the proposed updates you'd have a list of changes that were not actually saved.
Various adjustments.
Version 0.980 11/26/2008 ===================
The Commission Report adds a Price Range option to help clerks follow-up with significant customers.
Correction for the entry of assigned QuickBooks G/L code for each major class code.
Room for larger cost on the Extended Details page of Inventory Status
Correction for the checkbook reconciliation report in JS-Classic.
Various adjustments.
Version 0.979 11/24/2008 ===================
The spouse's name is now included on repair tickets.
Repair reports can now be filtered by Clerk (Which you might choose be the take-in-clerk or the clerk-in-charge.)
+ Various adjustments.
Version 0.978 11/21/2008 ===================
Addition of a 2-Part Side-by-Side Repair Ticket. This format is arranged to enable printing repair tickets on the same perforated paper used for Side-by-Side Sales Receipts.
+ Various adjustments.
Version 0.977 11/20/2008 ===================
JS-Classic Interstore Transfer will now transfer the inventory Style-specific page (additional style-specific notes and wholesale pricing) JS-Classic Interstore Transfer also now offers the choice to transfer the sender's wholesale price as the receiving store's cost value to reflect the price at which Store A sells items to (owned) Store B. Select which Wholesale price will be used from 2,C,6 "Change Transfer Defaults"
Fix problem when receiving inventory where the manufacturer code could not be set different than the vendor code.
Extra room on inventory details screen for over 9 center stones.
Improved default settings for Eltron tag printers (Zebra TLP printers without Z in the model number)
Various adjustments.
Version 0.976 11/14/2008 ===================
Fixed a problem with the "Delete Sale" option from the Sales Screen
Ensured that new items received inherit the previous Reorder Levels for that same style.
Various adjustments.
Version 0.975 11/14/2008 ===================
Addition of Credit Slip / Gift Card Reports. Run for Used or Unused or for All for One Customer or History of One Slip, etc. From the Main Menu choose "Sales Menu", "Credit Slips" Options, Report.
Credit Slips - Directly on the credit slip entry screen without running a report, you can view a list of previous slips for that customer.
Addition of printing actual Credit slips. (the Print button existed before, but the Print Slip feature was not active.)
Sales Receipts. New option to print total number of items anywhere (e.g. at the top of every page "20 Total Items") This is mostly for wholesale type of invoices. Instructions are available on request.
When accepting a cash payment on a sales screen, the expected sequence is to accept the net payment amount in the payment box then select Cash, then type the amount tendered. Now, if you enter the amount tendered a bit early (in the net payment amount box) the payment will auto-correct to save you from recording an overpayment.
Changes made to reorder levels for a single Sku on the screen Inventory Status will now be copied to all items with the same style (because reorder levels are supposed to be Style-specific not Sku-specific.)
Addition of Sort by Retail Price to Inventory Report.
Addition of more Appraisal Printing Formats.
Removed the duplicated retail column from the Hot Seller Report by Style.
Version 0.974 11/7/2008 ===================
The Inventory Hot-Seller report now lets you restrict the report by vendor or brand.
The repair screen previously had some "jumpy" cursor movement that selected the Description box - that behavior is gone.
JS-Classic - adds support for USB cash drawers from MS Cash Drawer company. (you need to install this program on each computer that has such a cash drawer: ftp://jsclient:123456ab@ftp.jewelryshopkeeper.com/hardware/setupms10.exe
+ Various adjustments.
Version 0.973 11/6/2008 ===================
Addition of a third Accounts Receivable Month-End Statement. The new format is designed to print on pre-printed forms. (the previous formats were designed to print on plain paper so they printed all the wording, boxes, etc.)
Security option to disallow deletion of an inventory item. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Security", "Inventory Security", "Delete Sku in Enter Inventory Screens"
Corrections to the appearance on the Tag Layout screen including a top margin indicator for Datamax tags. (text should generally be below the dotted top margin line.)
+ Various adjustments.
Version 0.972 11/5/2008 ===================
The total customer count is now always shown on the customer profile screen. "Maintenance", "Customers." Also - when running a customer report ("Reports", "Customer Reports & Labels") after you select your criteria (zip code, etc) and choose start - before you run the report you can see the total number of matching customers in the title of the "Print Options Dialog." This removes the need to review the entire report just to see the count of the matching customers.
You can now change the customer of a sale. Retrieve a sale in VJS, then click X-Search, then double-click a different customer and you have the choice to reassign the sale to the new customer. (This choice appeared to be available before but wasn't active.)
In JS-Classic, the utility SALCST is now present (previously available in older versions of Shopkeeper for DOS). This lets you reassign a sale from the wrong customer to the correct customer.
+ various Version 0.971 11/3/2008 ===================
On the sales screen when Billing a previously unbilled job, the Cost from the repair ticket is added to the cost details in the sales file. Also, the Estimate from the repair ticket is now added to the sales file as "Regular Price", (in addition to being added as "Price" which was always the case.) This means that if you discount the selling price on the sales screen, the sales receipt will also show the original estimate to reflect the discount that you offered. Of course, it won't show the original estimate if the final selling price is higher.
+ various adjustments - including better behavior when selecting a customer from the repair screen via X-tra Search.
Version 0.970 10/31/2008 ===================
The Repairs Quick Update Screen now lets you directly edit the cost and estimate of each repair. "Sales Menu" "Repair Status Quick Update" The cost and estimate are available if you enable the "Direct Editing" option.
The ability save sales as Quotes has been restored.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.969 10/29/2008 ===================
Activation of Reorder Reports. From the "Main Menu" choose "Reports Menu", "Hot-Seller & Reorder Reports", change the "Re-Order Report By" option to "Below Low" or "Below High or "Any Reorder Item" (by default this will remove the requirements for Repeat Sales and Turnover Speed - but you can reimpose them.) Reorder levels are assigned on the Notes page of the Inventory Status screen.
Improvements to Inventory Reports by Location. The Brand and Style Cross-Tab reports are tidier, more succinct and add the item description (The Cross-Tab report is the one which shows the quantity of each style across the page - up to six locations per line.)
+ various adjustments
Version 0.968 10/28/2008 ===================
Further options on the commissions reports.
Correction of problem when entering the expense-code breakdown of invoices payable.
Version 0.967 10/28/2008 ===================
Check printing fixes needed for printing checks from *other* than the primary checking account. Choose "Accounting Menu", "Check Printing"
Improved picture linking to vendors' picture catalogs. Previous updates could link Shopkeeper inventory items to picture catalogs from vendor websites or CD's. The linking was done only at the time you viewed individual items in the VJS inventory status screen. While the JS-Classic program would display such linked pictures, JS-Classic would not implement the link. Also, if you hadn't previously linked a picture, the picture would not show on a picture inventory report. The JS-Classic utility FINDPIX will check all items in inventory for a linkable picture. You may want to run this utility each time you install on your computer a new set of pictures from a supplier. To run this utility start JS-Classic and choose "File", "Miscellaneous Options", "Utility Programs", "FINDPIX" See notes under Version 0.948 below for folder and image file naming requirements.
Clearer Payment-type Buttons (Cash, Visa, etc) Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Payment Options", "Payment Types" then click a payment type word on the list on the left, then click an icon on the right.
Enabled Hot-Keys for Payment-type Buttons (Cash, Visa, etc) Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Credit Card Defaults", "Payment Types" then click a payment type word on the list Then you can assign a letter such as C for Cash, K for Check, A for Amex, etc. On any payment screen when the list of payment types is showing, you can press the hot-key on the keyboard to select that payment type. Of course, you can still arrow down through the list and press Enter, or scroll down with the mouse and click.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.966 10/27/2008 ===================
+ various adjustments, including further commission reports changes.
Version 0.965 10/25/2008 =================== Addition of Commission Reports. From the Main Menu choose "Sales Reports", "Sales Reports by Clerk - Commissions" You can also add this menu choice to any Menu by clicking the "Customize" button. A quick sales and commission tally was previously available from the "Clerks" screen - but that was just on-screen and just one clerk at a time. The new reports are full-featured and the summarized versions are much tidier and concise compared to the ones in JS-Classic.
Security setting available to grant or restrict access to printing checks by bank account. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Security", "Bank Accounts",
+ various adjustments
Version 0.964 10/24/2008 ===================
Fixed Problems encountered when searching for inventory items by manufacturer and style number. Various screens with a Sku No. lookup - sales, inventory status, etc.
X-tra search from sales screen - show line-item details initially instead of showing customer details initially.
Sales screen - show taxable status for non-currently selected line for quicker overview of the status of all lines without selecting each line separately.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.963 10/23/2008 ===================
Problem fixed in Js-Classic Appraisals for loose stones with extended loose-stone detail.
The Inventory by Location Report now has the option to print the picture of each item. From the "Main Menu" select "Reports Menu", "Inventory by Location Reports", "Show Pictures" This works only in combination with the report organized by Class & Sku. (This was previously indicated as having been added in a prior update but it actually wasn't.)
Version 0.962 10/22/2008 ===================
Clicking on the "New" button in the customer sales screen allows you to add several customers in a row - without the customer screen closing after each customer. Useful for entering a long series of customers from a list.
Fixed a problem with data-entry in grids. For example, when printing tags, when you changed the Quantity, previously you had to hid Tab or Enter to save that change. Now it will save even if you click directly on the "Print" button after typing a new quantity. Another example is the entries in the Look-Up List Manager.
Fixed a check printing error when checks contained a return credit.
+ Adjustments to Z report in JS-Classic + various adjustments
Version 0.961 10/21/2008 ===================
Addition of two more side-by-side sales receipt formats.
New Cash Register Paid-Out & Cash-Received entry screen. Choose "Sales Menu" from the Main Menu the "Paid-Out" For a report, choose "Options" from within the Paid-Out screen.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.960 10/20/2008 ===================
Adjustment to X/Z-Report. (There had been a problem with the in-house charge sale figures [though they were affecting official sales report figures.])
Posting Report includes a Total With Tax Line (previously the subtotal and tax total were shown only separately.)
JS-Classic can now display vendor-downloaded pictures; the ones that were made possible for VJS in a previous update. (See 0.948 below)
Version 0.959 10/17/2008 ===================
Adjustment to X/Z-Report. (There had been a problem with the layaway figures. [though they were affecting official sales report figures.])
Major Class Code Report. An additional format has been added which is much more compact so you may be able to review the entire list in a page or two Choose "Options" from the Major Class Code screen and when the Print Options box appears you'll have choice of Full-Size or Compact.
Change to Time Card Reports. (previously it was easy to accidentally select the 'blank' clerk )
+ various adjustments
Version 0.958 10/13/2008 ===================
When the Inventory by Location report is run, simultaneously an Excel file copy of the report is created an put in the folder VJSREPORTS which is on the Windows Desktop.
Tag layouts change allows you to select the wording for the MSRP on the tag (e.g. "MSRP", "Regularly", etc)
+ various adjustments to VJS + various adjustments to JS-Classic
Version 0.957 10/08/2008 ===================
New complete Consolidated Customer History Report, viewable and printable. There are versions with and without pictures of items bought and repairs and with and without customer notes. Choose "Entire Customer History" from the "Options" toolbar entry of the screens for Customers, Repairs, Sales and X-tra Search
Version 0.956 10/08/2008 ===================
You can use a graphics logo file at the top of repair envelopes instead of your company name and address in text. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipt Options", "Half and 40 Col.", add/find a logo file and also UN-check the box "Do you want your store name on the receipt" [under the 40-column section - not at the top - as this selection applies to both 40 column receipts AND repair envelopes]
On-screen progress meters for the GMROI reports.
+ various adjustments to VJS + various adjustments to JS-Classic
Version 0.955 10/02/2008 ===================
You can now change vendor code, manufacturer code, P.O. number from "Inventory Status" screen. After unlocking the page, those boxes are still protected, but you can Control-Click them to change them.
Version 0.954 09/30/2008 ===================
Additional customer search. When you search by customer number you can append a letter or two of the customer surname. E.g. you can type 9145A for customer Adams with No. 9145 Customer searches by account number are often done when processing accounts receivable payments accompanied by a payment coupon. This new search helps when the customer number looks like the beginning of a phone number. E.g. after typing 9145 VJS could show you customers with a phone number starting with (914) 5xx-xxxx but with the A appended it would switch to customer number search. It will accept up to 3 letters, however no more than 1 will ever be needed.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.953 09/29/2008 ===================
Security change required in order to continue to receive VJS updates and to submit error reports.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.952 09/25/2008 ===================
Negative sales taxes are permitted. This is often needed for sales tax rates that taper-off at higher sales values.
+ various adjustments to sales and inventory screens
Version 0.951 09/24/2008 ===================
Fixed A/R Received-on-Account receipts.
Repair Envelopes print the date the item was received.
Calculated / suggested repair due-dates will Skip Sundays and Mondays. Of course, you can override and specify any due-date you like. Enter the standard due-date lead-time in "Maintenance" "Preferences", "Repair Defaults Cont."
Easier entry of time-card records and option to change and save the "message o' the day."
Purchase Order printout will no longer truncate long style numbers. Choose "Print Order" from the P.O. page of "Inventory Entry"
Improved navigation of the Major Class Code screen
Improved navigation of the Minor Class Code screen
+ various adjustments
Version 0.949-0.950 09/22/2008 ===================
Removal of an ignorable error message from sales screen.
Add impcst Utility (only for use in special cases with instructions from Compulink)
+ various adjustments
Version 0.948 09/22/2008 ============= Addition of his log file to the VJS File Center. Identify VJS and JS-Classic program changes by choosing "More", "What's New."
The Inventory by Location Report now has the option to print the picture of each item. From the "Main Menu" select "Reports Menu", "Inventory by Location Reports", "Show Pictures"
To make the Sku number on price tag print at the same size as the retail price add the keyword "SKURETAILFONT" anywhere in the Miscellaneous Settings box in "Maintenance", "Preferences", "General" This helps if you choose a larger font for retail price and want a similarly large font for the Sku number. This has been available in JS-Classic previously.
The Cash Register "Sales Payment Spreadsheet" Report will now show finalized repairs and special orders even when no final payment was received that day. From the "Main Menu" select "Sales Reports Menu", "Sales Payment Spreadsheet"
You can download your vendors' picture catalogs to your hard drive and VJS will link the picture automatically. Save the picture files in the folder \visualjs\data\main\images\inv\XXX where you might be using a different folder for "main" and where XXX is the a folder of the same name as the 3-letter Vendor/Mfg code. The picture names have to be the same as the style number - but only letters and digits - no spaces or punctuation. E.g. AB78W.JPG for style AB-78/W The pictures will link either when you receive new merchandise or if you check an item in "Inventory Status." Later there may be a utility to retroactively link items that are already in your inventory list
Remember that the VJS daily backup does NOT backup any of your picture files,
You need to establish your own backup routine to safeguard all your images in the entire \visualjs\data\main\images\ folder - and subfolders. (Again, you may use a different folder name other than "main")
E.g you could backup to DVD, to an external hard drive, to an on-line internet backup service etc.
A Daily backup may not be necessary, weekly may be fine or Monthly at the longest.
You can control the suggested down-payment percentage for special orders. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Sales Defaults", "Sales Screen Cont." Typically this could be 33.33% or 50% or 0% (if there is no standard for the deposit.)
More standard entry of accounts receivable interest rates and minimum payment amounts (percentages instead of fractions) Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Accounts Receivable"
+ various adjustments
Version 0.947 09/19/2008 ============= Non merchandise payables receive an automatic G/L code distribution suggestion as per the merchandise payables as in 0.946 below.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.946 09/19/2008 ============= After entering accounts payable invoices for merchandise or non merchandise you will be automatically prompted to distribute the payable total among the correct G/L account codes. For merchandise invoices an initial distribution is suggested based on the vendor's usual G/L code and the usual Freight and Additional Taxes G/L Code.
Addition in JS-Classic of the utility APOBAL. This utility checks if there are any accounts payable invoices which have not been expensed and then helps you expense them all correctly. [payables which are not expensed will not show on financial reports.]
+ various adjustments
Version 0.945 09/18/2008 =============
Addition of the option to print in-house copy of received invoices of merchandise. Choose "Inventory Entry" Enter a new or retrieve an existing invoice then choose "Print List"
Addition of the Preference whether or not to suppress Due Date and Estimate Amount on Repair Tickets. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Receipt Options", "Repair Ticket Options"
Automatic Discount options now apply to VJS sales screen. You can apply automatic discount options on the customer profile screen, the minor code screen and the major code screen. The order of priority is Customer, Minor, Major.
+ various adjustments
Version 0.944 09/11/2008 ============= Addition of "Deduct Inventory" feature from "Inventory Menu" Quickly lower the in-stock levels of multiple inventory items. This feature is primarily used for those users who have not ordered Sales features
Addition of "Register Codes" If you stamp different workstations to stamp payments and sales with a different register codes then you can run separated cash register reports to help balance them. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Local Defaults", "Local Defaults Continued", "Cash Register Code" Enter a two-letter or two-digit code. * See notes below on "Local Settings" To run separated reports, choose "Sales Reports" then "Sales Payment Spreadsheet" or "X & X Report"
Addition of Sales Prefix Letters per Computer This feature adds a letter to the beginning of each sales number. E.g. W so you would have sales numbers such as W1012, W1025, etc This Code is computer-specific so Computer 1 could have W and Computer 2 could have X. This may be helpful to more quickly identify which computer a sale was rung up at This does not affect the number part of the sales number So you might have a sequence such as W1001, X1002, 1003 X1004, X1005, W1006 etc. Note that some computers may have No prefix while others do. Choose "Maintenance", "Preferences", "Local Defaults", "Local Defaults Continued", "Prefix Letter For Sale Numbers" Enter a one-letter code (no numbers) * See notes below on "Local Settings" There are no reports which use this prefix.
+ various adjustments
Previous Recent Updates ======================= Print Purchase Orders From the "Inventory Entry" screen, Choose Purchase Orders Then either add a new or retrieve an existing purchase order. Then Click the "Print Order" button. There are two pre-made layouts: One with 01 Without Sku No. and with Cost 02 Without Sku No. without Cost 03 With your Sku No. and with Cost
Addition of Print Checks From the Main Menu select Accounting Menu, Print Checks * note that entry of checks is still done in Js-Classic for now
Addition of Quick Repair Update From the "Main Menu" select "Sales Menu" "Repair Status Quick Update" Enter a list of repairs, then enter the items(s) to be update (e.g. Location), choose "Preview" to view the proposed changes, then chose "Save Changes" to update the master repair list.
Notes on "Local Settings" =========================
Essentially all choices you make in "Maintenance", "Preferences" affect ALL computers on a network - if you have a network.
Local settings are preferences that you choose that affect only the computer at which you enter those settings. If you enter a Cash Register Code FR at the front computer, that will not affect any other computer.
These settings are stored in the .INI file C:\VISUALJS\VISUALJS.INI folder of that computer. If you reformat or replace a computer your local settings will have to be re-done. (or you can save then restore this .INI file to the new or newly formatted computer.)
Notes on "Local Settings" and Remote Desktop =============================================
These Notes apply only to Windows Remote Desktop or Windows Terminal Services. These notes do Not apply to other remote access solutions such as LogMeIn or GotoMyPC.
When you use Windows Remote Desktop you access a "virtual" computer inside the Remote Desktop host computer.
Several different people from several locations may access this same computer.
In order that different people accessing the same computer can maintain different local settings, local settings for Remote Desktop sessions are store separately for each Windows User Name who logs in.
That way JOE can access Remote Desktop specifying a a 7% sales tax rate (for Town A) while SUE can specify a 5% sales tax rate for Town B - even though they are both running VJS from the same computer.
Note that if both JOE and BOB from Town A log in with different Windows User Names, they Both have to establish the correct local settings. BOB will Not get any of JOE's local settings even if they connect from the same Computer X in Town A. |